Optima MR450w, MR450w GEM, and SIGNA Artist: Installation Manual

Optima MR450w, MR450w GEM, and SIGNA
Artist
Installation Manual
5670002
Revision 15.0
US English
© 2010-2021 General Electric Company
All rights reserved.
Installation Manual
Language Policy
Direction 2128126 - Language Policy For Service Documentation
ПРЕДУПРЕЖД Това упътване за работа е налично само на английски език.

ЕНИЕ • Ако доставчикът на услугата на клиента изиска друг език, задължение на клиента е да
(BG) осигури превод.
• Не използвайте оборудването, преди да сте се консултирали и разбрали упътването за
работа.
• Неспазването на това предупреждение може да доведе до нараняване на доставчика на
услугата, оператора или пациентa в резултат на токов удар, механична или друга опасност.
警告本维修手册仅提供英文版本。
(ZH-CN) • 如果客户的维修服务人员需要非英文版本，则客户需自行提供翻译服务。
• 未详细阅读和完全理解本维修手册之前，不得进行维修。
• 忽略本警告可能对维修服务人员、操作人员或患者造成电击、机械伤害或其他形式的伤害。
警告本服務手冊僅提供英文版本。
(ZH-HK) • 倘若客戶的服務供應商需要英文以外之服務手冊，客戶有責任提供翻譯服務。
• 除非已參閱本服務手冊及明白其內容，否則切勿嘗試維修設備。
• 不遵從本警告或會令服務供應商、網絡供應商或病人受到觸電、機械性或其他的危險。
警告本維修手冊僅有英文版。
(ZH-TW) • 若客戶的維修廠商需要英文版以外的語言，應由客戶自行提供翻譯服務。
• 請勿試圖維修本設備，除非您已查閱並瞭解本維修手冊。
• 若未留意本警告，可能導致維修廠商、操作員或病患因觸電、機械或其他危險而受傷。
UPOZORENJE Ovaj servisni priručnik dostupan je na engleskom jeziku.
(HR) • Ako davatelj usluge klijenta treba neki drugi jezik, klijent je dužan osigurati prijevod.
• Ne pokušavajte servisirati opremu ako niste u potpunosti pročitali i razumjeli ovaj servisni priruč-
nik.
• Zanemarite li ovo upozorenje, može doći do ozljede davatelja usluge, operatera ili pacijenta uslijed
strujnog udara, mehaničkih ili drugih rizika.
VÝSTRAHA Tento provozní návod existuje pouze v anglickém jazyce.
(CS) • V případě, že externí služba zákazníkům potřebuje návod v jiném jazyce, je zajištění překladu do
odpovídajícího jazyka úkolem zákazníka.
• Nesnažte se o údržbu tohoto zařízení, aniž byste si přečetli tento provozní návod a pochopili jeho
obsah.
• V případě nedodržování této výstrahy může dojít k poranění pracovníka prodejního servisu, obsluž-
ného personálu nebo pacientů vlivem elektrického proudu, respektive vlivem mechanických či ji-
ných rizik.
ADVARSEL Denne servicemanual findes kun på engelsk.
(DA) • Hvis en kundes tekniker har brug for et andet sprog end engelsk, er det kundens ansvar at sørge for
oversættelse.
• Forsøg ikke at servicere udstyret uden at læse og forstå denne servicemanual.
• Manglende overholdelse af denne advarsel kan medføre skade på grund af elektrisk stød, mekanisk
eller anden fare for teknikeren, operatøren eller patienten.
5670002 Revision 15.0 Optima MR450w, MR450w GEM, and SIGNA Artist 2/358
Installation Manual
WAAR- Deze onderhoudshandleiding is enkel in het Engels verkrijgbaar.

SCHUWING • Als het onderhoudspersoneel een andere taal vereist, dan is de klant verantwoordelijk voor de
(NL) vertaling ervan.
• Probeer de apparatuur niet te onderhouden alvorens deze onderhoudshandleiding werd geraad-
pleegd en begrepen is.
• Indien deze waarschuwing niet wordt opgevolgd, zou het onderhoudspersoneel, de operator of een
patiënt gewond kunnen raken als gevolg van een elektrische schok, mechanische of andere geva-
ren.
WARNING This service manual is available in English only.
(EN) • If a customer's service provider requires a language other than English, it is the customer's respon-
sibility to provide translation services.
• Do not attempt to service the equipment unless this service manual has been consulted and is un-
derstood.
• Failure to heed this warning may result in injury to the service provider, operator or patient from
electric shock, mechanical or other hazards.
HOIATUS See teenindusjuhend on saadaval ainult inglise keeles.
(ET) • Kui klienditeeninduse osutaja nõuab juhendit inglise keelest erinevas keeles, vastutab klient tõlke-
teenuse osutamise eest.
• Ärge üritage seadmeid teenindada enne eelnevalt käesoleva teenindusjuhendiga tutvumist ja sell-
est aru saamist.
• Käesoleva hoiatuse eiramine võib põhjustada teenuseosutaja, operaatori või patsiendi vigastamist
elektrilöögi, mehaanilise või muu ohu tagajärjel.
VAROITUS Tämä huolto-ohje on saatavilla vain englanniksi.
(FI) • Jos asiakkaan huoltohenkilöstö vaatii muuta kuin englanninkielistä materiaalia, tarvittavan kään-
nöksen hankkiminen on asiakkaan vastuulla.
• Älä yritä korjata laitteistoa ennen kuin olet varmasti lukenut ja ymmärtänyt tämän huolto-ohjeen.
• Mikäli tätä varoitusta ei noudateta, seurauksena voi olla huoltohenkilöstön, laitteiston käyttäjän tai
potilaan vahingoittuminen sähköiskun, mekaanisen vian tai muun vaaratilanteen vuoksi.
ATTENTION Ce manuel d'installation et de maintenance est disponible uniquement en anglais.
(FR) • Si le technicien d'un client a besoin de ce manuel dans une langue autre que l'anglais, il incombe au
client de le faire traduire.
• Ne pas tenter d'intervenir sur les équipements tant que ce manuel d'installation et de maintenance
n'a pas été consulté et compris.
• Le non-respect de cet avertissement peut entraîner chez le technicien, l'opérateur ou le patient des
blessures dues à des dangers électriques, mécaniques ou autres.
WARNUNG Diese Serviceanleitung existiert nur in englischer Sprache.
(DE) • Falls ein fremder Kundendienst eine andere Sprache benötigt, ist es Aufgabe des Kunden für eine
entsprechende Übersetzung zu sorgen.
• Versuchen Sie nicht diese Anlage zu warten, ohne diese Serviceanleitung gelesen und verstanden
zu haben.
• Wird diese Warnung nicht beachtet, so kann es zu Verletzungen des Kundendiensttechnikers, des
Bedieners oder des Patienten durch Stromschläge, mechanische oder sonstige Gefahren kommen.
Installation Manual
ΠΡΟΕΙΔΟΠΟΙ Τοπαρόν εγχειρίδιο σέρβις διατίθεται στα αγγλικά μόνο.

ΗΣΗ • Εάν το άτομο παροχής σέρβις ενός πελάτη απαιτεί το παρόν εγχειρίδιο σε γλώσσα εκτός των
(EL) αγγλικών, αποτελεί ευθύνη του πελάτη να παρέχει υπηρεσίες μετάφρασης.
• Μηνεπιχειρήσετε την εκτέλεση εργασιών σέρβις στον εξοπλισμό εκτός εάν έχετε συμβουλευτεί
και έχετε κατανοήσει το παρόν εγχειρίδιο σέρβις.
• Εάν δεν λάβετε υπόψη την προειδοποίηση αυτή, ενδέχεται να προκληθεί τραυματισμός στο
άτομο παροχής σέρβις, στο χειριστή ή στον ασθενή από ηλεκτροπληξία, μηχανικούς ή άλλους
κινδύνους.
FIGYELMEZ- Ezen karbantartási kézikönyv kizárólag angol nyelven érhető el.
TETÉS • Ha a vevő szolgáltatója angoltól eltérő nyelvre tart igényt, akkor a vevő felelőssége a fordítás elkés-
(HU) zíttetése.
• Ne próbálja elkezdeni használni a berendezést, amíg a karbantartási kézikönyvben leírtakat nem
értelmezték.
• Ezen figyelmeztetés figyelmen kívül hagyása a szolgáltató, működtető vagy a beteg áramütés,
mechanikai vagy egyéb veszélyhelyzet miatti sérülését eredményezheti.
AÐVÖRUN Þessi þjónustuhandbók er aðeins fáanleg á ensku.
(IS) • Ef að þjónustuveitandi viðskiptamanns þarfnast annas tungumáls en ensku, er það skylda viðskip-
tamanns að skaffa tungumálaþjónustu.
• Reynið ekki að afgreiða tækið nema að þessi þjónustuhandbók hefur verið skoðuð og skilin.
• Brot á sinna þessari aðvörun getur leitt til meiðsla á þjónustuveitanda, stjórnanda eða sjúklings frá
raflosti, vélrænu eða öðrum áhættum.
AVVERTENZA Il presente manuale di manutenzione è disponibile soltanto in lingua inglese.
(IT) • Se un addetto alla manutenzione richiede il manuale in una lingua diversa, il cliente è tenuto a
provvedere direttamente alla traduzione.
• Procedere alla manutenzione dell'apparecchiatura solo dopo aver consultato il presente manuale
ed averne compreso il contenuto.
• Il mancato rispetto della presente avvertenza potrebbe causare lesioni all'addetto alla manuten-
zione, all'operatore o ai pazienti provocate da scosse elettriche, urti meccanici o altri rischi.
警告このサービスマニュアルには英語版しかありません。
(JA) • サービスを担当される業者が英語以外の言語を要求される場合、翻訳作業はその業者の責
任で行うものとさせていただきます。
• このサービスマニュアルを熟読し理解せずに、装置のサービスを行わないでください。
• この警告に従わない場合、サービスを担当される方、操作員あるいは患者さんが、感電や
機械的又はその他の危険により負傷する可能性があります。
경고 본 서비스 매뉴얼은 영어로만 이용하실 수 있습니다.
(KO) • 고객의 서비스 제공자가 영어 이외의 언어를 요구할 경우, 번역 서비스를 제공하는 것은 고객
의 책임입니다.
• 본 서비스 매뉴얼을 참조하여 숙지하지 않은 이상 해당 장비를 수리하려고 시도하지 마십시
오.
• 본 경고 사항에 유의하지 않으면 전기 쇼크, 기계적 위험, 또는 기타 위험으로 인해 서비스 제공
자, 사용자 또는 환자에게 부상을 입힐 수 있습니다.
BRĪDINĀJUMS Šī apkopes rokasgrāmata ir pieejama tikai angļu valodā.
(LV) • Ja klienta apkopes sniedzējam nepieciešama informācija citā valodā, klienta pienākums ir nodroši-
nāt tulkojumu.
• Neveiciet aprīkojuma apkopi bez apkopes rokasgrāmatas izlasīšanas un saprašanas.
• Šī brīdinājuma neievērošanas rezultātā var rasties elektriskās strāvas trieciena, mehānisku vai citu
faktoru izraisītu traumu risks apkopes sniedzējam, operatoram vai pacientam.
Installation Manual
ĮSPĖJIMAS Šis eksploatavimo vadovas yra tik anglų kalba.

(LT) • Jei kliento paslaugų tiekėjas reikalauja vadovo kita kalba – ne anglų, suteikti vertimo paslaugas pri-
valo klientas.
• Nemėginkite atlikti įrangos techninės priežiūros, jei neperskaitėte ar nesupratote šio eksploatavi-
mo vadovo.
• Jei nepaisysite šio įspėjimo, galimi paslaugų tiekėjo, operatoriaus ar paciento sužalojimai dėl elek-
tros šoko, mechaninių ar kitų pavojų.
ADVARSEL Denne servicehåndboken finnes bare på engelsk.
(NO) • Hvis kundens serviceleverandør har bruk for et annet språk, er det kundens ansvar å sørge for over-
settelse.
• Ikke forsøk å reparere utstyret uten at denne servicehåndboken er lest og forstått.
• Manglende hensyn til denne advarselen kan føre til at serviceleverandøren, operatøren eller pa-
sienten skades på grunn av elektrisk støt, mekaniske eller andre farer.
OSTRZEŻENIE Niniejszy podręcznik serwisowy dostępny jest jedynie w języku angielskim.
(PL) • Jeśli serwisant klienta wymaga języka innego niż angielski, zapewnienie usługi tłumaczenia jest
obowiązkiem klienta.
• Nie próbować serwisować urządzenia bez zapoznania się z niniejszym podręcznikiem serwisowym
i zrozumienia go.
• Niezastosowanie się do tego ostrzeżenia może doprowadzić do obrażeń serwisanta, operatora lub
pacjenta w wyniku porażenia prądem elektrycznym, zagrożenia mechanicznego bądź innego.
ATENÇÃO Este manual de assistência técnica encontra-se disponível unicamente em inglês.
(PT-BR) • Se outro serviço de assistência técnica solicitar a tradução deste manual, caberá ao cliente fornec-
er os serviços de tradução.
• Não tente reparar o equipamento sem ter consultado e compreendido este manual de assistência
técnica.
• A não observância deste aviso pode ocasionar ferimentos no técnico, operador ou paciente decor-
rentes de choques elétricos, mecânicos ou outros.
ATENÇÃO Este manual de assistência técnica só se encontra disponível em inglês.
(PT-PT) • Se qualquer outro serviço de assistência técnica solicitar este manual noutro idioma, é da respon-
sabilidade do cliente fornecer os serviços de tradução.
• Não tente reparar o equipamento sem ter consultado e compreendido este manual de assistência
técnica.
• O não cumprimento deste aviso pode colocar em perigo a segurança do técnico, do operador ou do
paciente devido a choques eléctricos, mecânicos ou outros.
ATENŢIE Acest manual de service este disponibil doar în limba engleză.
(RO) • Dacă un furnizor de servicii pentru clienţi necesită o altă limbă decât cea engleză, este de datoria
clientului să furnizeze o traducere.
• Nu încercaţi să reparaţi echipamentul decât ulterior consultării şi înţelegerii acestui manual de
service.
• Ignorarea acestui avertisment ar putea duce la rănirea depanatorului, operatorului sau pacientului
în urma pericolelor de electrocutare, mecanice sau de altă natură.
ОСТОРОЖНО! Данное руководство по техническому обслуживанию представлено только на английском языке.
(RU) • Если сервисному персоналу клиента необходимо руководство не на английском, а на каком-
то другом языке, клиенту следует самостоятельно обеспечить перевод.
• Перед техническим обслуживанием оборудования обязательно обратитесь к данному
руководству и поймите изложенные в нем сведения.
• Несоблюдение требований данного предупреждения может привести к тому, что специалист
по техобслуживанию, оператор или пациент получит удар электрическим током,
механическую травму или другое повреждение.
Installation Manual
UPOZORENJE Ovo servisno uputstvo je dostupno samo na engleskom jeziku.

(SR) • Ako klijentov serviser zahteva neki drugi jezik, klijent je dužan da obezbedi prevodilačke usluge.
• Ne pokušavajte da opravite uređaj ako niste pročitali i razumeli ovo servisno uputstvo.
• Zanemarivanje ovog upozorenja može dovesti do povređivanja servisera, rukovaoca ili pacijenta
usled strujnog udara ili mehaničkih i drugih opasnosti.
UPOZORNE- Tento návod na obsluhu je k dispozícii len v angličtine.
NIE • Ak zákazníkov poskytovateľ služieb vyžaduje iný jazyk ako angličtinu, poskytnutie prekladateľských
(SK) služieb je zodpovednosťou zákazníka.
• Nepokúšajte sa o obsluhu zariadenia, kým si neprečítate návod na obluhu a neporozumiete mu.
• Zanedbanie tohto upozornenia môže spôsobiť zranenie poskytovateľa služieb, obsluhujúcej osoby
alebo pacienta elektrickým prúdom, mechanické alebo iné ohrozenie.
ATENCIÓN Este manual de servicio sólo existe en inglés.
(ES) • Si el encargado de mantenimiento de un cliente necesita un idioma que no sea el inglés, el cliente
deberá encargarse de la traducción del manual.
• No se deberá dar servicio técnico al equipo, sin haber consultado y comprendido este manual de
servicio.
• La no observancia del presente aviso puede dar lugar a que el proveedor de servicios, el operador o
el paciente sufran lesiones provocadas por causas eléctricas, mecánicas o de otra naturaleza.
VARNING Den här servicehandboken finns bara tillgänglig på engelska.
(SV) • Om en kunds servicetekniker har behov av ett annat språk än engelska, ansvarar kunden för att
tillhandahålla översättningstjänster.
• Försök inte utföra service på utrustningen om du inte har läst och förstår den här servicehandbo-
ken.
• Om du inte tar hänsyn till den här varningen kan det resultera i skador på serviceteknikern, opera-
tören eller patienten till följd av elektriska stötar, mekaniska faror eller andra faror.
OPOZORILO Ta servisni priročnik je na voljo samo v angleškem jeziku.
(SL) • Če ponudnik storitve stranke potrebuje priročnik v drugem jeziku, mora stranka zagotoviti prevod.
• Ne poskušajte servisirati opreme, če tega priročnika niste v celoti prebrali in razumeli.
• Če tega opozorila ne upoštevate, se lahko zaradi električnega udara, mehanskih ali drugih nevar-
nosti poškoduje ponudnik storitev, operater ali bolnik.
DİKKAT Bu servis kılavuzunun sadece ingilizcesi mevcuttur.
(TR) • Eğer müşteri teknisyeni bu kılavuzu ingilizce dışında bir başka lisandan talep ederse, bunu tercüme
ettirmek müşteriye düşer.
• Servis kılavuzunu okuyup anlamadan ekipmanlara müdahale etmeyiniz.
• Bu uyarıya uyulmaması, elektrik, mekanik veya diğer tehlikelerden dolayı teknisyen, operatör veya
hastanın yaralanmasına yol açabilir.
ЗАСТЕРЕЖЕН Даний посібник з експлуатації доступний тільки англійською мовою.
НЯ • Якщо постачальник послуг клієнта спілкується іноземною мовою, тоді клієнт зобов'язаний
(UK) забезпечити переклад.
• Заборонено проводити огляд обладнання без попереднього звертання до даного посібника
з експлуатації і розуміння інформації, поданої у ньому.
• Недотримання цього застереження може завдати шкоди здоров’ю постачальника послуг,
оператора або пацієнта через ураження електричним струмом, механічну травму або інше
ушкодження.
Revision History
Managed as DOC0962146.
Installation Manual
Revision Date Description

1.0 February 2, 2010 For review approval and validation of this document. See information below.
• DOC 0666573, rev 1, review and approval.
• DOC 0666573, rev 2, for validation
• DOC 0666573, rev 3, for re-validation based on SPR's: Cable map updates
(MRIhc46698). E-Off update (MRIhc47230). Update illustrations for new Teal MDP
(MRIhc47445). Revise connection point of gradient cable ground wires at rear of
magnet (MRIhc47442). I Provide instructions for installation of dongle to SRPS J50
(MRIhc47443). Rear pedestal installation procedure updates (MRIhc46657). Update
installation instructions for enclosure covers shipping separately (ECO2097330).
Installation Manual

2.0 September 13, In table 1-1, removed magnet relative humidity and atmospheric pressure information
2010 and replaced with n/a, (not applicable) (MRIhc46642). Revised installation flow chart to
reflect changes to respective sections in manual. Updated illustrations throughout
manual to show 450w product (MRIhc49463). Added note to save cabinet shipping
brackets for seismic anchoring (MRIhc49004). Added instruction for installing SRPS J50
Dongle to rear of SRPS module prior to installing PEN cabinet (MRIhc47443 &
MRIhc49340). Added view of new PDU that does not require DIP switch setting (ECO
2090162). On cable maps, added note for fiber optic connections (MRIhc51560,
MRIhc51563). Corrected run numbers connected to DDSPLIT (MRIhc51353). Revised ca-
ble map errors (MRIhc52352, MRIhc51538). Removed IRD fiber optic cable on LED cable
maps (MRIhc48761). Removed Runs M1311, M1341 & M1342 from equipment room ca-
ble tray (MRIhc48837 & MRIhc50338). Removed Run M3307 (MRIhc51535). Added (32
ch) information to Run P2004 (MRIhc50338) and removed from 16 channel cable maps
(MRIhc49462, MRIhc50341, & MRIhc50680). Revised cable tray width illustration
(MRIhc50338). Added alternateviews of overhead cable trays in stacked positions
(MRIhc52726). Clarified left/right viewing of end of cable tray (MRIhc50340). Removed
section pertaining to removal of enclosure covers (MRIhc49454). Added instruction for
gradient cables to be in a single layer (MRIhc48840 & MRIhc50342). Added note for cor-
rect placement of gradient cable lockwasher (MRIhc48789, MRIhc48339, &
MRIhc49339). Corrected order of gradient cable connection to SPW in illustration 4-16
(MRIhc49455). Clarified initial positioning of rear pedestal (MRIhc49464). Added in-
struction for attaching air hoses to rear end bell before attaching rear pedestal
(MRIhc50450). Added step for connecting PGR ground to RF common ground
(MRIhc48937). Added note for connecting E4007 to alternate ground stud (MRIhc48936
& MRIhc48938). Updated illustrations pertaining to connecting hoses to the newest
version of the HEC (ECO 2100354). Added minimum floor clearance of dock bracket
when installing dock (MRIhc50226). Added note for alternate method of installing
Blower Box (MRIhc48792). Added instruction to refer to Direction 500097 for installing
cryo-compressor cooling hoses (MRIhc49003). Updated air and water hose schematic
(MRIhc49457, MRIhc49678, MRIhc50541). Added instruction that final position of 1.5
inch hoses will be under bridge (MRIhc48810). Added note for applying insulation be-
fore routing in cable trays (MRIhc49667). Added Important Note to not apply cork/
rubber wrap until after leak check (MRIhc48856). Added steps for installing insulation
sleeves on 1.5 and 4 inch hoses and the gray, yellow, black, blue, green and red hoses
(MRIhc49457, MRIhc49678, & MRIhc50341). Clarified location of Air Y-fitting on cable
tray (MRIhc50341). Added to instruction for applying teflon tape to fittings connecting
to cryo-cooler (MRIhc49318). Reversed steps for installing left and right front covers
(MRIhc49460). Updated illustration 4-61 of dock left side cable bracket (MRihc49461).
Revised LED Display installation (MRIhc49459). Added information for attaching cables
to I/O panel at top of magnet )MRIhc50683). Added routing and connection of Run 1001
to hybrid splitter at rear of magnet (MRIhc49455). Revised attachment of skirt covers.
Revised the tie-wrapping of cables at rear of magnet and added more cable informa-
tion (MRIhc48837 & MRIhc49455). Added connections of Runs M1305 and M1306
(MRIhc49455). Revised photo for rear end of magnet (MRIhc50690). Added info for mak-
ing sure that 8w8 cables at rear ped do not get routed near antenna (MRIhc52329).
Added note for minimum fiber optic cable bend radius (MRIhc49402, MRIhc49366). Cor-
rected fastener information for mounting rear pedestal bracket (MRIhc49464,
MRIhc50447). Updated illustration for I and Q cable insulation (MRIhc49455). Added
Reed Switch installation (MRIhc48850). Removed Runs 1341, 1342 and 331 connecting
to PEN Panel (MRIhc50388 and MRIhc50389). Corrected fastener size for attaching rear
enclosure covers (MRIhc48857). Added instruction for installing vacuum port
(MRIhc49469). Corrected fastener information for attaching skirt covers (MRIhc48857).
Added instruction for installing cable curtains in magnet room (MRIhc48838). Added
note that all table covers must be in place after all tests are complete (MRIhc49624).
Added fastener information for attaching rear pedestal bumpers and covers
(MRIhc49472). Added view of New Z400 computer for cable connections (G60002DA).
Installation Manual

Corrected connection of cable connection to J1 of F/O converter box (MRIhc49338). Up-
dated cable specification table with minimum bend radii for all cables (MRIhc50339).
3.0 June 15, 2011 Updated manual to include installation procedures for new MR450w GEM product.
Chapter 4: Updated cable maps for inclusion of PAC5 module and updated Run M3360
cable. Section 4-28: Updated MAG PAC connection designator (ECO 2112564). SPW Ca-
bles Section: Updated SPW cable connection panel by adding J200, J201, J202, J203,
J204, and J205 (ECO 2111555).
4.0 July 20, 2012 Updated manual as required per HD VCP to add information on XGD2 Gradient Amplifi-
er (ECO 2128543), eSRPS Filter Box (ECO 2128544), and ePDB Assembly (ECO
2128757). Chapter 2: Removed errant rectangle on HEC illustration (HCSDM00078549).
Chapter 4: Revised cable map by removing Runs 1325 and 1326 references
(HCSDM00117375). Revised cable map air hose to rear ped from 2” to 1.5”
(HCSDM00079663). Added PGR iButton install option. Reaffirmed that note was added
for applying insulation before routing in cable trays in rev 2 (HCSDM00079713). Reaf-
firmed that Nordlock washer installation instructions were added in previous revision
(HCSDM0007967). Changed magnet top beam L-bracket fastener from 110mm long to
80mm long (ECO 2122240).
5.0 April 19, 2013 Chapter 1, Section 1.2: Added Caution for dock anchor stud trip hazard
(HCSDM00167937). Chapter 2, Section 1.8: Updated screw size from M5 x 12mm to M5
x 16MM (HCSDM00078593). Chapter 4, Section 2: Corrected magnet monitor cable
connection labels at terminal box on magnet (HCSDM00078613 & HCSDM00080119).
Chapter 4, Section 11: Added note to not remove insulation on I & Q cables at rear of
magnet (HCSDM00078625). Chapter 4, Section 23: Added step for checking height of
dock anchor stud (HCSDM00167937).
6.0 May 28, 2014 Chapter 7: Updated the PC cable connection section. Added z420 PC and removed
XW8400 PC. (DV25 product)
7.0 November Chapter 6: Added Section 2.12, Cable Management Kit. Chapter 7, Section 1.5.4: Re-
11,2014 vised the step for connecting ethernet to PC. It must be connected to the RIGHT side
port on the back of the z420 computer.
8.0 September 12, Added SMART installation pages.
2016
9.0 January 5, 2017 Added cable maps for DV26 systems with ICE and USB hub. Chapter 1: Moved SMART
installation content into Chapter 1. Chapter 2: Added lean cart information. Chapter 4,
Section 27.2: Added fiber optic cable map for system with ICE. Chapter 6, Section 1.6.3:
Added Dell T5810 cable connection procedure.
10.0 June 30, 2017 Added installation content for SIGNA Artist systems. Chapter 2: Added lean cart and
staging information. Added Grafidy and MCRV to tools and equipment list. Added
grounding check to be done by customer supplied licensed electrician. Chapter 5: Add-
ed note for routing orange cryogen line. Added Warning about laser radiation that can
be emitted from disconnected fiber-optic cables. Added Notice to observe electrostatic
discharge (ESD) precautions. Added Notice about SFP optical tranceiver and SFP Loop-
back sensitivity, and precautions to observe. Added details for M2025-D remaining dis-
connected for Artist and Artist XT. Updated cable maps to indicate that GOC hub is not
included in newer GOCs. Added magnet gradient cable torque. Chapter 8: Removed
Brainwave option connections from Host PC. Added notes and instructions for newer
GOCs which do not include the 8-port Ethernet hub. Chapter 9: Added step to indicate
prestaged software and calibration information. Appendix A: Updated bend radius for
fiber optic cables.
Installation Manual

11.0 January 31, 2018 Chapter 1: Removed reference to separate FRU and magnet delivery manuals. Added
notes for staged system calibrations. Chapter 2: Revised gradient cable tool kit in the
installation equipment table. Updated GOC staging and preinstalled software informa-
tion. Added grounding check to be done by customer supplied licensed electrician.
Chapter 5: Revised tools and methods for crimping gradient cables. Added note for
routing orange cryogen line. Revised connection instructions for M3392 and M3316 at
the MEMS cable management panel. Updated Table Interface Cable connection to Rx
Distribution J57, and added new illustrations for Rx Distribution and Table Interface
Cable. Chapter 6: Referred to FRU manual for PA coil part numbers. Revised PA coil in-
structions for foam filler. Chapter 7: Added notes and instructions for newer GOCs
which do not include the 8-port Ethernet hub. Chapter 9: Added instructions for gradi-
ent cable inspection requirements. Appendix: Changed X and Y gradient cables to 1
AWG.
12.0 September 24, Chapter 2: Added non-magnetic torque wrench kit. Added gradient cable stripper and
2018 crimper tools. Chapter 5: Updated magnet gradient cable installation instructions. Add-
ed note for hydraulic crimping tool. Added gradient cable lug torque to busbar. Chapter
8: Added LCD monitor power cable adapter.
13.0 November 7, 2019 Chapter 2 is added for Smart installation for IPM magnet. Chapter 6: Added cable map
for SIGNA Artist. Chapter 8: Added the sections about middle right side cover bracket
and enclosure lower cover brackets for IPM Magnet.
14.0 July 15, 2020 Chapter 6: Correct the part number 5337932-3 for IPM magnet. Update Magnet I/O ca-
ble connections.
Chapters 6, 7, and 8: Updated hardware and added required hardware tables.
Chapter 10, Section 10.2.2:
• Added step to do the Emergency Off Connection Safety check.
• Added step to execute the e-Installation form (DOC1685408) and submit it to the
e-forms repository.
15.0 June 7, 2021 Added Section 8.2.2 Cutting right top cover (only for M6001AC).
Revise Section 6.9 Gradient Cable Installation to comply with the new design.
Add Appendix 11.2 Stripping and crimping gradient cables.
IDENTIFIER LOC ACCEPTANCE METH- SAMPLING RATE NOTES

OD
EC01 Chapter 6 Cable and According to Upgrade NA NA
System Installation, manual update, FE
section 6.27 Bridge must follow procedure
and rear pedestal in- to operate it.
stallation
EC02 Chapter 8 Final Enclo- According to Upgrade NA NA
sure Installation for manual update, FE
MR450w GEM and Ar- must follow procedure
tist Systems, section to operate it.
8.2.4 Installation of
front covers
Installation Manual Contents
Contents
1 SMART Installation ................................................................................................................................. 14
1.1 SMART installation ........................................................................................................................................................................... 14
1.2 SMART installation overview ....................................................................................................................................................... 17
1.3 Service documentation .................................................................................................................................................................. 19
1.4 Site readiness ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 19
1.5 Pre-magnet delivery mechanical installation.......................................................................................................................21
1.6 Magnet installation .......................................................................................................................................................................... 22
1.7 Equipment delivery .......................................................................................................................................................................... 22
1.8 Mechanical installation (day 1-5) ...............................................................................................................................................23
1.9 Mechanical install hand-off to GE (day 5)...............................................................................................................................24
1.10 Magnet ramping and system start-up (day 6-7) ...............................................................................................................25
1.11 Adjustments and calibrations...................................................................................................................................................25
1.12 System calibrations....................................................................................................................................................................... 26
2 SMART Installation for IPM Magnet...................................................................................................... 28

2.1 SMART Installation Overview for IPM Magnet......................................................................................................................28
2.2 Service documentation .................................................................................................................................................................. 29
2.3 Site readiness ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 29
2.4 Pre-magnet delivery mechanical installation.......................................................................................................................31
2.5 Magnet installation .......................................................................................................................................................................... 32
2.6 Equipment delivery .......................................................................................................................................................................... 32
2.7 Mechanical installation (day 1-5) ...............................................................................................................................................33
2.8 Mechanical install hand-off to GE (day 5)...............................................................................................................................34
2.9 Magnet ramping and system start-up (day 6-7)..................................................................................................................35
2.10 Adjustments and calibrations...................................................................................................................................................36
2.11 System calibrations....................................................................................................................................................................... 37
3 Getting Started ....................................................................................................................................... 38

3.1 Overview Information ..................................................................................................................................................................... 38
3.2 Lock Out Tag Out (LOTO)................................................................................................................................................................ 48
3.3 System components........................................................................................................................................................................ 55
3.4 Installation process.......................................................................................................................................................................... 57
4 Cabinet Installation................................................................................................................................ 63
4.1 Cabinet positioning .......................................................................................................................................................................... 63
5 PGR Cabinet PDU Setup ......................................................................................................................... 74
5.1 PGR/PDU setup .................................................................................................................................................................................. 74
6 Cable and System Installation .............................................................................................................. 77

6.1 Overview of system components..............................................................................................................................................77
6.2 Cable map interconnects .............................................................................................................................................................. 78
6.3 Sorting and routing cables ......................................................................................................................................................... 109
6.4 Storage of excess cable length................................................................................................................................................. 110
6.5 Rear magnet enclosure cable cover test-fit ....................................................................................................................... 111
6.6 Cable locations in equipment room overhead cable trays .......................................................................................... 113
6.7 Cable locations in magnet room overhead cable trays................................................................................................. 116
6.8 Cryogen line positioning on magnet...................................................................................................................................... 118
6.9 Gradient cable installation......................................................................................................................................................... 118
6.9.1 Installing the cables to the GFA1 (1st generation gradient filter)................................................................ 129
6.9.2 Installing gradient cables to the GFA2 scan room (2nd generation gradient filter)............................. 142
6.9.3 Installing gradient cables to the GFA2 equipment room (2nd generation gradient filter)................ 145
6.9.4 Storage Requirements for Excess Gradient Cable.............................................................................................. 147
6.10 Connect magnet ground, Run M4005................................................................................................................................. 150
6.11 Position rear pedestal ............................................................................................................................................................... 150
6.12 RF transmit cable installation................................................................................................................................................ 151
6.13 Route and connect ground cables ....................................................................................................................................... 154
6.14 Route and connect equipment room power cables..................................................................................................... 156
6.15 Route and connect equipment room data cables......................................................................................................... 157
6.16 Install temperature/humidity sensor components in equipment room............................................................. 162
6.17 Install RF door switch Run E3014......................................................................................................................................... 164
6.18 Install blower box on penetration panel ........................................................................................................................... 164
6.19 Install air and water hoses ...................................................................................................................................................... 166
6.20 In-Room Display (IRD) installation - GEM style enclosure......................................................................................... 177
6.21 In-Room Display (IRD) installation - MR450w ................................................................................................................. 179
6.22 LED display installation............................................................................................................................................................. 187
6.23 Dock installation.......................................................................................................................................................................... 192
6.24 Route and connect cables in magnet room ..................................................................................................................... 196
6.25 Install fiber optic cables............................................................................................................................................................ 209
6.26 Pneumatic patient alert installation................................................................................................................................... 227
6.27 Bridge and rear pedestal installation ................................................................................................................................. 235
6.28 LPCA installation.......................................................................................................................................................................... 245
6.29 SRI connections............................................................................................................................................................................ 247
6.30 Emergency off connections..................................................................................................................................................... 247
6.31 Route and connect Secondary Pen Wall (SPW) cables............................................................................................... 248
6.32 Route and connect penetration panel cables................................................................................................................. 249

6.33 Installation of magnet enclosure rear covers for MR450w....................................................................................... 252
6.34 Coil and dress cable in penetration panel closet .......................................................................................................... 253
7 Final Enclosure Installation for MR450w........................................................................................... 254

7.1 Install Enclosure Covers.............................................................................................................................................................. 254
7.2 Install Cable Curtain at Top of Magnet (Optional) ........................................................................................................... 259
7.3 Install Laser Alignment Light Warning Label ..................................................................................................................... 263
7.4 Patient Transport Installation .................................................................................................................................................. 264
8 Final Enclosure Installation for MR450w GEM and Artist Systems................................................ 266
8.1 Installation of enclosure cover brackets.............................................................................................................................. 266
8.2 Installation of enclosure covers............................................................................................................................................... 273
8.3 Cable Concealment Kit installation ....................................................................................................................................... 290
8.4 PA coil installation in patient table ........................................................................................................................................ 294
9 Operator Workspace Installation....................................................................................................... 305

9.1 Operator workspace..................................................................................................................................................................... 305
10 Checklist .............................................................................................................................................. 324

10.1 Completion checklist ................................................................................................................................................................. 324
10.2 GE Field Engineer responsibilities........................................................................................................................................ 324
11 Appendix.............................................................................................................................................. 327
11.1 Cable specification...................................................................................................................................................................... 327
11.2 Stripping and crimping gradient cables............................................................................................................................. 341
11.2.1 Stripping gradient cables ............................................................................................................................................ 341
11.2.2 Crimping gradient cables ............................................................................................................................................ 347
11.2.3 Preparing the cables for the GFA2 ......................................................................................................................... 354
1
1 SMART Installation
1.1 SMART installation

SMART definition and site readiness
SMART is a system installation methodology that was developed through best practices of MR
installations, having received positive feedback from many GE Customers. It promotes having the
Customer, the GE Healthcare Project Manager (PMI) and the Field Service Engineer (FSE) working as a
connected team throughout the installation project. With SMART, the GE Project Manager explains to
the Customer up front that GE will commit to a product installation applied time of 10-14 business days
from magnet delivery through calibration/clean-up for customer use. Application training can be
scheduled to a committed date immediately following completion of SMART.
SMART relies on transparent planning and good up-front execution to be successful. There are multiple
enablers to achieve desired results with SMART:
• Project coordination with high transparency among customer, PMI and FSE which includes full
understanding of roles and responsibilities among general contractor, RF shield vendor and rigging
team to maintain the planned project schedule.
• Site readiness process execution with high quality
• Field service tasks - knowledge of and expectations
• SMART install timeline execution with high rigor
Project coordination
• Customer and GE Project Manager agree to the specific construction on time and include
communications with:
• General Contractor (GC)
• RF shield vendor
• Rigging team
• GE project manager and the primary field engineer plan a schedule to deliver:
• Pre-magnet shipping collector – for GC to install and provide power and water
• Schedule cryogens and all necessary service tools
• Schedule magnet / equipment delivery
• Schedule and define work for system installation
Installation Manual 1.1 SMART installation
Site readiness process
Site readiness to enable SMART requires:

• Magnet room construction complete including ceiling, lighting, cable trays, mill work, storage
cabinets and paint (exception is the magnet delivery path).
• Equipment room requires MDP installed, power supplied to MDP from facility, LOTO applied, HEC
installed, plumbed with by-pass, water flushed, power supplied to HEC from MDP, shut down to
receive coolant without fear of flooding the site.
• Operator room completion no later than start of day 3 mechanical install
Field service tasks
The FSE understands SMART is used to define a process for ALL tasks needed for Product installation
and calibration. The person performing the tasks knows what needs to be complete, they know the
interdependencies to include:
• A full understanding of all tasks to complete for system transfer
• Adjust the work flow to the site conditions:
• Room construction not complete is any given room
• Finished work due to magnet delivery independent of which wall/ceiling the magnet delivers
• Full understanding of the time required to complete each task
• Parallel tasking to include working during:
• Equipment delivery – fill HEC coolant
• Patient table, dock or rear pedestal adjustment prior to magnet ramp
• TPS Reset prior to magnet ramp
Installation Manual 1.1 SMART installation
SMART install timeline

The Mechanical Installation Team and the Primary Field Engineer drive the key elements of SMART
Installation.
The key to SMART installation is:

• To do any task one time
• Perform work in parallel with other tasks
• Select the days’ work based on available parts and site readiness
• Ensure all construction work not connected with path-of-magnet is complete prior to room closure
• Plan ahead and schedule support to meet anticipated due dates
• Work in a relaxed SMART method
• Remove empty boxes and packaging from the site during equipment delivery; keep as much
cardboard out of the MRI suite as possible.
• Complete tasks
The following timeline was achieved at a clinic pilot site in 11 days using SMART:
Day 1 - Magnet arrives, RF vendor closed RF cage/final tested the shield, FSE put magnet on life support
routing gas lines and power through SPW
Day 2 - Equipment delivered followed by a half day of Mech Installation (MI), FSE filled HEC with coolant.
FSE unpacked coils, installed GEM Coil insert into patient table,aligned dock, patient table, and rear
pedestal
Day 3 - MI continued
Day 4 - MI continued, FSE setup to ramp magnet
Day 5 - MI completed (3.5 days), FSE completed SW Load, MI completion checks, TPS Reset (failed and
delayed to day 9)
Day 6 - HEC Start-up and final table alignments
Day 7 - Ramped magnet
Day 8 - Shimmed magnet
Day 9 - TPS Reset, complete calibrations to obtain first image
Installation Manual 1.2 SMART installation overview
Day 10 and 11 - Finished calibrations to transfer system for clinical application

Summary - FSE on site 10 days, applied 124.5 hours with 76 hours to ramp and shim (6 iterations) (4
FSE applied time to ramp / shim)
1.2 SMART installation overview

Pre-Installation
Site Readiness NOTE: Timeline does
not include installation
Pre-Magnet Delivery Mech Install of site-specific options.
IMPORTANT: This is in-
Arrival Day 1 Magnet Installation tended to communicate
(16 hrs, 1 FE) MR target installation
timelines. This is not a
Arrival Day 2 substitute for released
Arrival Day 3 Equipment Delivery MR product installation
documents.
(3.5 hrs, 1 FE, 1 Mech Installer)
Installation
Day 1–5 Mechanical Installation
(50 hrs, 2 Mech Installers) (3 hrs, 1 FE)
Hand Off to GE
(1.5 hrs, 1 FE)
Day 6–7 Pre-Ramp Install

(2 hrs, 2 FEs)
Magnet Ramping System Power Up

(5 hrs, 2 FEs) (6 hrs, 1 FE)
Day 8–9 Settling Time/Pressure Cals/Shim Prep Table/Bridge Adjustments & Enclo-
Build (5 hrs, 1 FE) sures
(48 hrs) (5.5 hrs, 1–2 FEs)
Day 10 Drift Test/Passive Shimming

(8 hrs, 1-2 FEs)
Day 11–13 Calibrations

(10.5 hrs, 1 FE)
Clean-Up
(8 hrs, 1 FE)
Turnover to Customer
Post-Install
Support Day 1–2 Additional Support Tasks
(16 hrs, 1 FE)
Installation Manual 1.2 SMART installation overview
Figure 1-1 Smart Installation Overview for IPM Magnet
Installation Manual 1.3 Service documentation
1.3 Service documentation

Direction Title Description
number
5670006 Service Methods Complete reference for service and FRU documentation
5670001 Preinstallation Manual Provides information to prepare a site for system installation:
• To define system requirements and interactions
• For the effective arrangement and interconnection of system
components
5500097 Pre-Magnet Delivery System In- Instructions to install:
stall • MDP LOTO placard
• HEC cabinet containing cooling loops and gradient blower
• HEC to cryogen chiller hoses and insulation
• SPW and PEN Panel mounting frames
• Magnet room curtain rail/cable concealment kit
5670009 Magnet & Cryogens Instructions for set-up, commissioning and service of the super-
conducting magnet
5670002 System Installation Instructions for installing system including cabinets, cables, en-
closures and operator workspace
1.4 Site readiness

Equipment room requirements
Done? Done?
Equipment room con- HEC power complete
struction complete /
dust free
MDP installed RF filters backup water
Chilled water installed RF blank panels
Installation Manual 1.4 Site readiness
Done? Done?
Water flush bypass Med Gas / SR fire sup-
pression / DC light
HEC water complete Trays / facility work

complete
Scan room requirements

Done? Done?
Closet door hung Customer coils stor-
age / cabinets com-
plete
Walls painted
RF panels ready to re- PEN panel closet finish-

assemble ed
(5670001, Chapter 3,
Section 6.2)
Installation Manual 1.5 Pre-magnet delivery mechanical installation
Done? Done?
Magnet scan room Cable Trays Hung
opening (5670001, Chapter 6,
Section 2)
1.5 Pre-magnet delivery mechanical installation

NOTE
Must meet ISO 9001 requirements.
Customer contractor tasks Mechanical installer or GE FE tasks PMI or RF screen room vendor
tasks
Electrical contractor
Install main disconnect panel Position HEC cabinet RF screen room construction
5500097, Chapter 2, Section 1.3 5500097, Chapter 2, Section 1.2 5670001, Chapter 3, Section 5
Connect facility power to MDP Install Lockout-Tagout placard Verify floor levelness
5500097, Chapter 2, Section 1.3 5500097, Chapter 2, Section 1.4 5670001, Chapter 3, Section 6.5
Connect power from MDP to HEC Connect power cord from Cryo- Mark location of VibroAcoustic
cabinet cooler to HEC damping mats
5500097, Chapter 2, Section 1.6.1 5500097, Chapter 2, Section 1.7 5475706, Chapter 9
Customer plumber
Connect customer supplier water Install HEC-Cry hoses and insula-
lines to HEC cabinet tion
5500097, Chapter 2, Section 1.6.2 5500097, Chapter 2, 1.8-1.9
General contractor
Install curtain rail frame in mag- Install penetration panel and
net room ceiling (customer op- mounting frames
tion) 5500097, Chapter 2, Section 1.11
5500097, Chapter 2, Section 1.12
Install VibroAcoustic damping

mats
5475706, Chapter 9
Installation Manual 1.6 Magnet installation
1.6 Magnet installation

Magnet Delivery and Installation Manual: 5475706
Magnet delivery
Magnet unloading and movement

5475706, Chapter 6
Moving magnet to MR suite

5475706, Chapter 10
Note: Scheduled for same day Post delivery tasks
GE FE
Magnet checks
5475706, Chapter 8
GE FE
Magnet Leveling
5475706, Chapter 11
RF screen vendor
Dock floor anchor installation
RF screen vendor
RF screen room test
5670001, Chapter 3, Section 5 and Chapter 7,
Sections 3 and 4
1.7 Equipment delivery

Labor hours: 3.5 hrs Tools needed:
FEs needed: 1 • Non-ferrous tool set
Mech installer needed: 1 • Cabinet dollies
(to direct where equipment delivers) See Service Manuals for complete list.
Important: Color-coded labels key:

• Throw away all boxes/packaging GE Manufacturing boxes have color coded labels
• Clear all working areas for full access during • GREEN = Equipment Room
installation • ORANGE = Operator Room
• Delivery material directly to final room loca- • PURPLE = Magnet Room
tion
• YELLOW = Post-Installation (Coils, Phantoms)
• 1 Mechanical Installer on-site to direct where
material should go
• Only touch parts once. No need to locate
parts when installation begins
Installation Manual 1.8 Mechanical installation (day 1-5)
Scan room Equipment room
Contractor FE
Enclosures HEC coolant
Unpacked and temporary storage Fill HEC
(For systems with DV28.0 and earlier software) Throw away empty packaging
Phantom cart loaded
Contractor Contractor
Deliver/arrange cables Deliver/arrange air, water, interconnections
Ready for routing Ready for routing
Contractor
Unpack customer pads, documents, coils
Store in final locations
Operator room
Contractor
Deliver/arrange cables
Ready for routing
Contractor
GOC, table, chair, Op manuals
Temporary storage
1.8 Mechanical installation (day 1-5)

Labor hours: Personnel needed: Tools needed:
Mech installer hours: 96 Mech installers: 2 Non-ferrous tool set
FE hours: 3 hours daily FEs: 1 See Service Manuals for complete list
Mechanical installation
Installation Manual: Gradient cable routing/termina-

5670010 tion
(5670002, Ch 5, Sect 9 on page 118) (6
Hours, 2 MIs)
Ground cable installation

(5670002, Ch 5, Sect 10,
13 on page 118) (2 Hours, 2MIs)
RF transmit cables routing

(5670002, Ch 5, Sect 12 on page 154)
(4 Hours, 2 MIs)
Scan room cables - route and confirm lengths

(5670002, Ch 5, Sect 24 on page 151) (3 Hours, 2 MIs)
Installation Manual 1.9 Mechanical install hand-off to GE (day 5)
Equipment room cables - route and confirm lengths

(5670002, Ch 5, Sect 14-15 on page 196) (3 Hours, 2 MIs)
Dock, bridge, rear pedestal

Install only. No adjustments (5670002, Ch 5, Sect 23,
27 on page 156) (3 Hours, 2 MIs)
Install blower box on PEN panel Connect equipment room cables

(5670002, Ch 5, Sect 18 on page 192) (3 Hours, 1 (5670002, Ch 5, Sect 14-15 on page 164) (4 Hours,
MI) 1 MI)
Connect scan room cables IRD/LED install

(5670002, Ch 5, Sect 24 on page 156) (4 Hours, 1 (5670002, Ch 5, Sect 20 or 21, 22 on page 196) (2
MI) Hours, 1 MI)
Scan room - install air and water hoses Equipment room - install air and water hoses
(5670002, Ch 5, Sect 19 on page 177) (5670002, Ch 5, Sect 19 on page 166) (4 Hours, 1
MI)
Install fiber optic cables Dock, bridge, rear ped connection (NO LEVEL-
(5670002, Ch 5, Sect 23 on page 166) (4 Hours, 1 ING)
MI) (5670002, Ch 5, Sect 27 on page 209) (2 Hours, 1
MI)
Dress all cables and install covers Install RF door switch and pneumatic alert
(9 Hours, 1 MI) (5670002, Ch 5, Sect 17, 26 on page 235) (3 Hours,
1 MI)
Complete PDU settings

(2 Hours, 1 MI)
GOC installation
(5670002, Ch 8 on page 164) (3 Hours, 1 MI)
Wiring check and FE hand-off

(4 Hours, 1 MI)
1.9 Mechanical install hand-off to GE (day 5)

Labor hours: 1.5 hours Tools needed:
FEs needed: 1 Non-ferrous tool set
See Service Manuals for com-
plete list
Mechanical install hand-off to GE
Resolve open install issues
Final top-off of HEC coolant
HEC water leak check
Installation Manual 1.10 Magnet ramping and system start-up (day 6-7)
1.10 Magnet ramping and system start-up (day 6-7)

Total labor hours: 19 hours Tools needed:
Pre-ramp: 3 hours See Service Manuals for complete list
Ramping: 10 hours
Start Up: 6 hours
FEs needed: 2
IMPORTANT: Refer to Installation Calibration Wizard for the latest calibration procedures
Table/bridge adjustments Pre-ramp installation
Dock, rear ped and bridge alignment Refill helium

(5670002, Ch 5, Sect 27 on page 305) (5495018, Chapter 5) (1 Hour, 2 FEs)
Dock/table adjustments PDU power-up

(0.5 Hours, 1 FE)
Dock X-Axis alignment Power-up checks: E-Off, MRU

(0.5 Hours, 1 FE)
Dock/table engagement force Remove table from scan room to allow for
GEM coil installation during ramping
Magnet ramping System start-up (in parallel with ramping)
Preparation Install PA coil into table

(5495018, Ch 7, Sect 4) (1 Hour, 2 FEs) (5670002, Ch 7, Sect 4 on page 294) (1.5 Hours, 1
FE)
Ramp magnet System power-up

(5495018, Ch 7) (6 Hours, 2 FEs) (5670002, Ch 2, Sect 4) (1.5 Hours, 1 FE)
**Will not affect Ramping
Clean-up * Load SW VRE - boot check TPS Reset

(1 Hours, 2 FEs) (2.5 Hours, 1 FE)
Start system/load options

(0.5 Hours, 1 FE)
* If the site received a staged system with enhanced GOC, the FE only has to perform network configuration.
1.11 Adjustments and calibrations
Installation Manual 1.12 System calibrations
Total labor hours: 29.5 Hours Tools needed:

Cals/shim prep: 5 Hours • Non-ferrous tool set
Adjustments/enclosures: 8.5 Hours • Level
Shimming: 16 Hours See Service Manuals for complete list
FEs needed: 1-2
IMPORTANT: Refer to Installation Calibration Wizard for the latest calibration procedures.
Magnet Set-
tling Time (Day
8-9 )
Calibrations Enclosures
Coil datapath diagnostic Final cover test fit

(0.5 Hours, 1 FE) 5670002, Ch 6 or 7 on page 57
(2 Hours, 2 FEs)
TR dynamic disable cals

(0.25 Hours, 1 FE)
Tune body coil

(1.5 Hours, 1 FE)
Finish SW InSite checkout

(0.5 Hours, 1 FE)
RF calibrations
(1 Hour, 1 FE)
Shim camera prep UPM calibrations

(2 Hours, 1 FE) (0.5 Hours, 1 FE)
1st image
(minutes, 1 FE)
Day 10 Passive shimming
Drift test
(5495018, Chapter 8, Section 3) (15 minutes, 1
FE)
Shimming
(5495018, Chapter 8) (20 Hours, 2 FEs)
1.12 System calibrations

Total labor hours: 18.5 Hours
Calibrations: 10.5 Hours
Clean Up: 8 Hours
FEs needed: 1-2
IMPORTANT: Refer to Installation and Calibration Wizard for latest calibration procedures.
Day 11
System calibrations Day 12-13
Fwd/rev quad check EPT calibrations

(0.5 Hours, 1 FE) (0.5 Hours, 1 FE)
DQA 1st pass PAC checks

(0.5 Hours, 1 FE) (0.25 Hours, 1 FE)
Gradient fidelity diag GOC calibrations

(0.25 Hours, 1 FE) (0.5 Hours, 1 FE)
White pixel Coil MCQA

(0.25 Hours, 1 FE) (4 Hours, 1 FE)
LV shim gradshim Clean-up

Grafidy test
(1 Hour, 1 FE)
DQA 2nd pass

(0.5 Hours, 1 FE)
System gain
(0.75 Hours, 1 FE)
SPT *Start at end

(1 Hour, 1 FE) of day, run dur-
ing evening
2
2 SMART Installation for IPM Magnet
2.1 SMART Installation Overview for IPM Magnet

Pre-Installation
Site Readiness NOTE: Timeline does
not include installation
Pre-Magnet Delivery Mech Install of site-specific options.
IMPORTANT: This is in-
Arrival Day 1 Magnet Installation tended to communicate
(14 hrs, 1 FE) MR target installation
timelines. This is not a
Arrival Day 2 substitute for released
Arrival Day 3 Equipment Delivery MR product installation
documents.
(3.5 hrs, 1 FE, 1 Mech Installer)
Installation
Day 1–5 Mechanical Installation
(50 hrs, 2 Mech Installers) (3 hrs, 1 FE)
Hand Off to GE
(1.5 hrs, 1 FE)
Day 6–8 Pre-Ramp Install

(2 hrs, 2 FEs)
Magnet Ramping System Power Up

(3 hrs, 2 FEs) (6 hrs, 1 FE)
Cals/Shim Prep Table/Bridge Adjustments & Enclo-

(5 hrs, 1 FE) sures
(5.5 hrs, 1–2 FEs)
Day 9 Drift Test/Passive Shimming

(8 hrs, 1-2 FEs)
Day 10–12 Calibrations

(11.5 hrs, 1 FE)
Clean-Up
(8 hrs, 1 FE)
Turnover to Customer
Post-Install
Support Day 1–2 Additional Support Tasks
(16 hrs, 1 FE)
Installation Manual 2.2 Service documentation
2.2 Service documentation

Direction Title Description
number
5670006 Service Methods Complete reference for service and FRU documentation
5670001 Preinstallation Manual Provides information to prepare a site for system installation:
• To define system requirements and interactions
• For the effective arrangement and interconnection of system
components
5500097 Pre-Magnet Delivery System In- Instructions to install:
stall • MDP LOTO placard
• HEC cabinet containing cooling loops and gradient blower
• HEC to cryogen chiller hoses and insulation
• SPW and PEN Panel mounting frames
• Magnet room curtain rail/cable concealment kit
5670002 System Installation Instructions for installing system including cabinets, cables, en-
closures and operator workspace
5807458 Magnet Handling Manual for IPM Installations for Magnet transportation to suite
Magnet
5796143 Magnet Cryogen Manual for IPM Introduction for Magnet setup, commissioning and service of su-
Magnet perconducting magnet.
2.3 Site readiness

Equipment room requirements
Done? Done?
Equipment room con- HEC power complete
struction complete /
dust free
MDP installed RF filters backup water
Installation Manual 2.3 Site readiness
Done? Done?
Chilled water installed RF blank panels
Water flush bypass Med Gas / SR fire sup-

pression / DC light
HEC water complete Trays / facility work

complete
Scan room requirements

Done? Done?
Closet door hung Customer coils stor-
age / cabinets com-
plete
Walls painted
Installation Manual 2.4 Pre-magnet delivery mechanical installation
Done? Done?
RF panels ready to re- PEN panel closet finish-
assemble ed
(5670001, Chapter 3,
Section 6.2)
Magnet scan room Cable Trays Hung

opening (5670001, Chapter 6,
Section 2)
2.4 Pre-magnet delivery mechanical installation

NOTE
Must meet ISO 9001 requirements.
tasks
Install main disconnect panel Position HEC cabinet RF screen room construction
5500097, Chapter 2, Section 1.3 5500097, Chapter 2, Section 1.2 5670001, Chapter 3, Section 5
Connect facility power to MDP Install Lockout-Tagout placard Verify floor levelness
5500097, Chapter 2, Section 1.3 5500097, Chapter 2, Section 1.4 5670001, Chapter 3, Section 6.5
Connect power from MDP to HEC Connect power cord from Cryo- Mark location of VibroAcoustic
cabinet cooler to HEC damping mats
5500097, Chapter 2, Section 1.6.1 5500097, Chapter 2, Section 1.7 5475706, Chapter 9
Customer plumber
Connect customer supplier water Install HEC-Cry hoses and insula-
lines to HEC cabinet tion
5500097, Chapter 2, Section 1.6.2 5500097, Chapter 2, 1.8-1.9
General contractor
Install curtain rail frame in mag- Install penetration panel and
net room ceiling (customer op- mounting frames
tion) 5500097, Chapter 2, Section 1.11
5500097, Chapter 2, Section 1.12
Installation Manual 2.5 Magnet installation
tasks
Install VibroAcoustic damping

mats
5475706, Chapter 9
2.5 Magnet installation

Magnet Delivery and Installation Manual: 5807458
Magnet delivery
Magnet unloading and movement

5807458, Chapter 6
Moving magnet to MR suite

5807458, Chapter 10
Note: Scheduled for same day Post delivery tasks
GE FE
Magnet checks
5807458, Chapter 8
GE FE
Magnet Leveling
5807458, Chapter 11
RF screen vendor
Dock floor anchor installation
RF screen vendor
RF screen room test
5670001, Chapter 3, Section 5 and Chapter 7,
Sections 3 and 4
2.6 Equipment delivery

Labor hours: 3.5 hrs Tools needed:
FEs needed: 1 • Non-ferrous tool set
Mech installer needed: 1 • Cabinet dollies
(to direct where equipment delivers) See Service Manuals for complete list.
Installation Manual 2.7 Mechanical installation (day 1-5)
Important: Color-coded labels key:

• Throw away all boxes/packaging GE Manufacturing boxes have color coded labels
• Clear all working areas for full access during • GREEN = Equipment Room
installation • ORANGE = Operator Room
• Delivery material directly to final room loca- • PURPLE = Magnet Room
tion
• YELLOW = Post-Installation (Coils, Phantoms)
• 1 Mechanical Installer on-site to direct where
material should go
• Only touch parts once. No need to locate
parts when installation begins
Scan room Equipment room
Contractor FE
Enclosures HEC coolant
Unpacked and temporary storage Fill HEC
(For systems with DV28.0 and earlier software) Throw away empty packaging
Phantom cart loaded
Contractor Contractor
Deliver/arrange cables Deliver/arrange air, water, interconnections
Ready for routing Ready for routing
Contractor
Unpack customer pads, documents, coils
Store in final locations
Operator room
Contractor
Deliver/arrange cables
Ready for routing
Contractor
GOC, table, chair, Op manuals
Temporary storage
2.7 Mechanical installation (day 1-5)

Labor hours: Personnel needed: Tools needed:
Mech installer hours: 96 Mech installers: 2 Non-ferrous tool set
FE hours: 3 hours daily FEs: 1 See Service Manuals for complete list
Mechanical installation
Installation Manual: Gradient cable routing/termina-

5670010 tion
(5670002, Ch 5, Sect 9 on page 118) (6
Hours, 2 MIs)
Installation Manual 2.8 Mechanical install hand-off to GE (day 5)
Ground cable installation

(5670002, Ch 5, Sect 10,
13 on page 118) (2 Hours, 2MIs)
RF transmit cables routing

(5670002, Ch 5, Sect 12 on page 154)
(4 Hours, 2 MIs)
Scan room cables - route and confirm lengths

(5670002, Ch 5, Sect 24 on page 151) (3 Hours, 2 MIs)
Equipment room cables - route and confirm lengths

(5670002, Ch 5, Sect 14-15 on page 196) (3 Hours, 2 MIs)
Dock, bridge, rear pedestal

Install only. No adjustments (5670002, Ch 5, Sect 23,
27 on page 156) (3 Hours, 2 MIs)
Install blower box on PEN panel Connect equipment room cables

(5670002, Ch 5, Sect 18 on page 192) (3 Hours, 1 (5670002, Ch 5, Sect 14-15 on page 164) (4 Hours,
MI) 1 MI)
Connect scan room cables IRD/LED install

(5670002, Ch 5, Sect 24 on page 156) (4 Hours, 1 (5670002, Ch 5, Sect 20 or 21, 22 on page 196) (2
MI) Hours, 1 MI)
Scan room - install air and water hoses Equipment room - install air and water hoses
(5670002, Ch 5, Sect 19 on page 177) (5670002, Ch 5, Sect 19 on page 166) (4 Hours, 1
MI)
Install fiber optic cables Dock, bridge, rear ped connection (NO LEVEL-
(5670002, Ch 5, Sect 23 on page 166) (4 Hours, 1 ING)
MI) (5670002, Ch 5, Sect 27 on page 209) (2 Hours, 1
MI)
Dress all cables and install covers Install RF door switch and pneumatic alert
(9 Hours, 1 MI) (5670002, Ch 5, Sect 17, 26 on page 235) (3 Hours,
1 MI)
Complete PDU settings

(2 Hours, 1 MI)
GOC installation
(5670002, Ch 8 on page 164) (3 Hours, 1 MI)
Wiring check and FE hand-off

(4 Hours, 1 MI)
2.8 Mechanical install hand-off to GE (day 5)
Installation Manual 2.9 Magnet ramping and system start-up (day 6-7)
Labor hours: 1.5 hours Tools needed:

FEs needed: 1 Non-ferrous tool set
See Service Manuals for com-
plete list
Mechanical install hand-off to GE
Resolve open install issues
Final top-off of HEC coolant
HEC water leak check
2.9 Magnet ramping and system start-up (day 6-7)

Total labor hours: 19 hours Tools needed:
Pre-ramp: 3 hours See Service Manuals for complete list
Ramping: 10 hours
Start Up: 6 hours
FEs needed: 2
IMPORTANT: Refer to Installation Calibration Wizard for the latest calibration procedures
Table/bridge adjustments Pre-ramp installation
Dock, rear ped and bridge alignment

(5670002, Ch 5, Sect 27 on page 305)
Dock/table adjustments PDU power-up

(0.5 Hours, 1 FE)
Dock X-Axis alignment Power-up checks: E-Off, MRU

(0.5 Hours, 1 FE)
Dock/table engagement force Remove table from scan room to allow for
GEM coil installation during ramping
Magnet ramping System start-up (in parallel with ramping)
Preparation Install PA coil into table

(5796143, Ch 7, Sect 5) (1 Hour, 2 FEs) (5670002, Ch 7, Sect 4 on page 294) (1.5 Hours, 1
FE)
Ramp magnet System power-up

(5796143, Ch 8) (6 Hours, 2 FEs) (5670002, Ch 2, Sect 4) (1.5 Hours, 1 FE)
**Will not affect Ramping
Installation Manual 2.10 Adjustments and calibrations
Clean-up * Load SW VRE - boot check TPS Reset

(1 Hours, 2 FEs) (2.5 Hours, 1 FE)
Start system/load options

(0.5 Hours, 1 FE)
* If the site received a staged system with enhanced GOC, the FE only has to perform network configuration.
2.10 Adjustments and calibrations

Total labor hours: 29.5 Hours Tools needed:
Cals/shim prep: 5 Hours • Non-ferrous tool set
Adjustments/enclosures: 8.5 Hours • Level
Shimming: 16 Hours See Service Manuals for complete list
FEs needed: 1-2
IMPORTANT: Refer to Installation Calibration Wizard for the latest calibration procedures.
Magnet Set-
tling Time (Day
8)
Calibrations Enclosures
Coil datapath diagnostic Final cover test fit

(0.5 Hours, 1 FE) 5670002, Ch 6 or 7 on page 57
(2 Hours, 2 FEs)
TR dynamic disable cals

(0.25 Hours, 1 FE)
Tune body coil

(1.5 Hours, 1 FE)
Finish SW InSite checkout

(0.5 Hours, 1 FE)
RF calibrations
(1 Hour, 1 FE)
Shim camera prep UPM calibrations

(2 Hours, 1 FE) (0.5 Hours, 1 FE)
1st image
(minutes, 1 FE)
Day 9 Passive shimming
Drift test
(5796143, Chapter 8, Section 3) (15 minutes, 1
FE)
Shimming
(5796143, Chapter 8) (8 Hours, 2 FEs)
2.11 System calibrations

Total labor hours: 18.5 Hours
Calibrations: 11.5 Hours
Clean Up: 8 Hours
FEs needed: 1-2
IMPORTANT: Refer to Installation and Calibration Wizard for latest calibration procedures.
Day 10
System calibrations Day 11-12
Fwd/rev quad check EPT calibrations

(0.5 Hours, 1 FE) (0.5 Hours, 1 FE)
DQA 1st pass PAC checks

(0.5 Hours, 1 FE) (0.25 Hours, 1 FE)
Gradient fidelity diag GOC calibrations

(0.25 Hours, 1 FE) (0.5 Hours, 1 FE)
White pixel Coil MCQA

LV shim gradshim Clean-up

Grafidy test
(1 Hour, 1 FE)
DQA 2nd pass

(0.5 Hours, 1 FE)
System gain
(0.75 Hours, 1 FE)
SPT *Start at end

(1 Hour, 1 FE) of day, run dur-
ing evening
3
3 Getting Started
3.1 Overview Information

System Configuration
This manual provides instructions to complete the installation of a 450w GEM, 450w non-GEM, or SIGNA
Artist system. Many of the installation procedures are same for either system. Those procedures that
are specific to either system will be identified.
Additional options are installed according to the installation manual delivered with the option.
Site Ready Check for Mechanical Installation
Before equipment is delivered, the following must be complete to avoid delays and confusion.
• Pre-installation work must be complete. Refer to: Direction 5670001, Optima MR450w and
Artist Preinstallation Manual
• Magnet Delivery and Installation complete. Refer to: Direction 5475706, Magnet Handling for
1.5T R and HM Series Magnets 3.0T W, WB and UA Series Magnets
For IPM magnet: Magnet Delivery and Installation complete. Refer to: Direction 5807458,
Magnet Handling Manual .
• Magnet Subsystem should be installed. Refer to: Direction 5495018, Magnet & Cryogen Manual
for Passively Shimmed Magnets
For IPM magnet: Magnet Subsystem should be installed. Refer to: Direction 5796143, Magnet
Cryogen Manual.
CAUTION
POTENTIAL TRIP HAZARD!

Dock Anchor Stud in front of magnet.
Remove stud or clearly mark the area to prevent tripping. Stud is to be reinstalled when
completing the Dock installation process.
Figure 3-1 Location of Dock Anchor Stud
Installation Manual 3.1 Overview Information
Product Delivery Instructions

The “Shipping Document” lists catalog numbers delivered. Review and confirm that order is delivered
complete. Check impact on installation schedule if Catalogs and/or packing boxes are missing and/or
noted as shipped short.
NOTE
Two or more people are required to accept delivery of equipment due to weight and size of
cabinets and other components.
Labels that are attached to the outside of packing boxes summarize box contents.
NOTE
Project Manager Install (PMI): Make sure the right combination of short and/or long cables
have been delivered to site.
“Product Delivery Instructions” (PDI) specify box contents, part numbers, and shipping procedure. The
PDI is numbered according to the catalog number (for example, PDI - M7000BL is for the Fixed Site
Installation Kit). Lists of items included with each box are detailed by separate checklists, or a separate
sheet that provides a summry of that box contents. Refer to PDI and packing lists for information
specific to your shipment.
A set of service and operator manuals is delivered with the Fixed Site Kit. Refer to checklists packed with
“Technical Publication” boxes for a list of delivered documents.
The newer MR System delivery includes two lean carts (which helps the mechanical installers to identify
the parts easily), and some additional hardware sub-systems that are sub-assembled at factory.
1. The equipment delivery will have a lean cart for Equipment/Operator room with the following parts
in it according to the picture and layout shown (Figure 3-2 Equipment Room Lean Cart on page 40
and Figure 3-3 Equipment Room Lean Cart Layout on page 40).
a. Water Hose Hardware that needs to be used in the equipment room and the Desktop Collector
are placed in a tray on top of the cart.
b. Hose reels are added to the cart to secure the excess of hose and cables.
c. The following cables are placed in the equipment lean cart with appropriate labels.
(For MR450w and Artist T) E2002, E2020, E2023, E3030, E3014, E1307, E4007, E4002, E4005,
E4009 and E4010
(For Artist and Artist XT) P2020, E3030, E3014, E1307, E4007, E4002, E4005, E4009, E4010,
E3391
d. Gradient Coil water hoses (Supply and Return) (to be used in the equipment room) are added to
the cart.
e. Keyboard, SCIM, Operator Alert and LCD monitor are also added to the equipment room lean
cart.
Figure 3-2 Equipment Room Lean Cart
Figure 3-3 Equipment Room Lean Cart Layout
2. The equipment delivery will have a lean cart for Magnet Room with the following parts in it
according to the picture and layout shown (Figure 3-4 Scan Room Lean Cart on page 41 and Figure
3-5 Scan Room Lean Cart Layout on page 42).
a. Water Hose Hardware that needs to be used in the Magnet Room are placed in a tray on top of
the lean cart.
b. Air Hoses clamps and fittings are placed in another tray on top of the lean cart.
c. The following cables are bundled together and added to the Magnet Room lean cart.
(For MR450w, Artist T, Artist, and Artist XT) M3311 and M3315
(For MR450w and Artist T) M3316 and M3309
(For Artist and Artist XT) M3316 and M3391
d. The following cables are bundled together and added to the Magnet Room lean cart.
(For MR450w and Artist T) M1303 and M1304
e. The following cables are placed in the Magnet Room lean cart with appropriate labels.
(For MR450w) P2026, P2004, P2003, M2025, M3030, M3300 (only for 450w with SRPS), M2300,
M4005, M3314, M3375, M3376, M3377, and M3378
(For MR450w with ICE and Artist T) P2026, P2003, M2025, M3030, M2300, M4005, M3355,
M3314, M3375, M3376, M3377, and M3378
(For Artist and Artist XT) P2026, P2004, P2006, P2003, M1303, M2025, M3030, M4005, M3314,
M3375, M3378, M3392 and M3355
f. Left and Right Operator Control panels are kept inside the Magnet Room lean cart.
g. In Room Display is added to the Magnet Room lean cart.
h. Blower box is added to the Magnet Room lean cart.
i. Gradient water hoses (both Supply and Return) are added to the Magnet Room lean cart.
Figure 3-4 Scan Room Lean Cart
Figure 3-5 Scan Room Lean Cart Layout
3. The PGR cabinet comes sub-assembled with the following cables as shown in Figure 3-6 PGR
Cabinet Subassembly on page 42.
a. The following cables go from PGR to GOC are bundled and sub-assembled with PGR cabinet.
(For MR450w, Artist T, Artist, and Artist XT) E0003 and E4008
(For MR450w only) E3011 and E3015
(For Artist T, Artist, and Artist XT) E3011, E3015 and E3037
b. The following cables go from PGR to HEC Signal box are bundled and sub-assembled with PGR
cabinet
(For MR450w, Artist T, Artist, and Artist XT) E3013 and E3028
Figure 3-6 PGR Cabinet Subassembly
4. The PEN cabinet comes sub-assembled with the following cables as shown in Figure 3-7 PEN
Cabinet Subassembly on page 43.
a. The following cables go from PEN to GOC are bundled and sub-assembled with PEN cabinet.
(For MR450w, Artist T, Artist, and Artist XT) E3017, E3018 and E3031
b. The following cables that goes from PEN to PGR cabinet are bundled and sub-assembled with
PEN cabinet.
(For MR450w, Artist T, Artist, and Artist XT) E3002, E3006, E3008 and E3009
(For MR450w, Artist T, Artist, and Artist XT) E1003, E1004 and E1005
(For MR450w, Artist T, Artist, and Artist XT) E0004 just attached to PEN cabinet by itself
Figure 3-7 PEN Cabinet Subassembly
5. If the whole system is staged or just “SFIed (Sub-assembly For Install) and kitted” from the factory,
then the GOC has the following items pre-installed. All SFIed GOC will have a yellow color label as
shown in Figure 3-8 GOC Subassembly on page 44. If it is part of a staged system, then the system
will also receive a factory Save Info DVD. As some of the software components are pre-loaded as
shown in Table 3-1 Preloaded Software on page 44, there is no need to install them in the field.
Figure 3-8 GOC Subassembly
Table 3-1 Preloaded Software
SW Items GOC- Staged GOC SFI

IRD Sub Assembled X X
Linux Operating System (OS) X X
MR Application Software X X
Restricted Service Software X @ Site
VRE OS SW and Configuration X @ Site
Network Configuration @ Site @ Site
System Configuration X @ Site
6. Magnet comes sub-assembled with the following cables.

a. The following cables go from Magnet to Rear Ped are bundled together and attached with the
magnet.
(For MR450w and Artist T) M1315, M3320, M3321, M3322, M3323 and M3351
b. The following cables that go from Magnet to Pen Wall is sub-assembled with magnet.
(For MR450w, Artist T, Artist, Artist XT) M3302, M3303, M3312 and M3313
(For MR450w, Artist T, Artist, Artist XT) M1310 and M1312
Figure 3-9 Magnet Subassembly
Damage in Transportation
All packages should be closely examined at time of delivery. If damage is apparent, have notation
“damage in shipment” written on all copies of the freight or express bill before delivery is accepted or
“signed for” by a General Electric representative or a hospital receiving agent. Whether noted or
concealed, damage MUST be reported to the carrier immediately upon discovery, or in any event,
within 14 days after receipt, and the contents and containers held for inspection by the carrier. A
transportation company will not pay a claim for damage if an inspection is not requested within this 14
day period
File a report with:
• Call 1-800-548-3366. Select “Install Support Services for FOA and MIS”.
• Contact your local service coordinator for more information on this process.
MR System Shipping and Storage Requirements
1. The customer must provide a shipping dock or other staging area for unloading system
components.
2. The customer is responsible for unloading and moving all system components from the delivery
truck or van to final locations in the MR suite. This includes:
• Door and other openings are sufficiently wide to allow passage
• Sufficient room is provided for any required dollies or rigging
3. The MR system must be shipped and stored within the environmental requirements listed below in
Table 3-2 Transportation and Storage Environmental Conditions for System
Components on page 45.
NOTE
Some equipment is liquid cooled. After coolant is added, the equipment must be kept
from freezing.
Table 3-2 Transportation and Storage Environmental Conditions for System Components
System Equip- Temperature Temperature Relative Humid- Humidity Atmospheric Pres-

ment Range Change ity Change sure
Cabinets and Sys- -22 to 158° F (-30 68° F/Hr (20° C/Hr) 5-95% Non-con- 30%/Hr 1060 to 525 hPa
tem to 70° C) densing
Host Computer1 -22 to 140° F (-30 8-90% Non-con- 1060 to 500 hPa
to 60° C) densing
LCD Monitor -22 to 158° F (-30 10-80% Non-con- 1060 to 525 hPa
to 70° C) densing
8-Port Ethernet -22 to 158° F (-30 10-90% Non-con- 1060 to 525 hPa
Hub to 70° C) densing
Magnet -22 to 158° F (-30 n/a n/a
to 70° C)
Non-English Label Installation

Components and accessories delivered to this site may have English labels attached to them. For non-
English sites, optional multi-language labels have also been supplied.
If required, non-English labels should be attached over the English labels.
• For Surface Coils and Coil Cables - Apply the appropriate label over the English label. The label is
included with the coil component.
• For all other labels, follow the label update procedures in the manual or on the applicable multi-
language label sheet.
Verify at the end of the installation that the original English labels are covered by new labels
representing the native language of the customer.
Product Locator
During installation, the Install FE shall confirm that the Model and Serial Numbers are part of the asset.
If missing, use either the gib web interface (http://gib.gehealthcare.com/gib/gib_entry.jsp) or the
MyPLCReader App. This information will then be loaded directly to Siebel by the IB Verification Team.
To install the MyPLCReader App, use the following procedure.
1. From the GE App Icon, search for and Install the MyPLCReader App on your iPhone or iPad.
Figure 3-10 MyPLCReader App
2. Update the Configuration Page.

a. The first time the App opens, the Configuration Page will open.
b. Enter your SSO, Country and if in US select the edit button to change the default email
address (by default, this app will send the email to the Europe IB Team
Resource.EuropeanCentralAdminGIB@ge.com). The email to be used in US is
usa.ib.verification@ge.com.
3. Start your first Scan.
a. Go to the Menu, make the appropriate selection for the job you are performing. New Install,
Upgrade System, or Update System.
b. Enter the applicable Data, Install End Date, System ID & RFS#.
c. Click Scan Bar Codes and start scanning each barcode on the PL Cards.
d. Click the “Email” Button.

e. Email is sent to the Default email address, which was set up earlier.
Required Tools
WARNING
FERROUS MATERIAL HAZARD!

IF MAGNET IS ENERGIZED, THE CRIMP TOOL, BLOWER BOX, AND OTHER TOOLS AND
PARTS REQUIRED FOR THIS INSTALLATION THAT CONTAIN FERROUS MATERIAL WILL BE
STRONGLY ATTRACTED TO MAGNET AND MAY BECOME DANGEROUS PROJECTILES.
KEEP ALL FERROUS TOOLS AS FAR FROM THE MAGNET AS POSSIBLE.
Tools to install the system are listed in following table:
Table 3-3 Installation Equipment
Item GE Part Number Description

1 --- N/A
2 --- Wrecking bar
3 --- Claw hammer, 3/4 lb
4 46-271138G1 Restricted Access Control Kit. Contains two plastic warning signs for posting at site
during installation and service activity.
5 --- Aluminum platform ladder, 47.5 inches (1206.5mm) (See Note 1)
6 5790054 Gradient Cable Tool Kit
• 5790056 — Thomas & Betts TBM5-S (Thomas & Betts TBM5 can also be used)
• 5790057 — Greenlee Cable Cutter model 45207
• 5790059 — Greenlee Insulation Stripper model 1903
• 5790061 — Greenlee Replacement Blades model 13544
• 5790062 — BAUSCH & LOMB 10X Magnification Inspection Loupe model
81-41-70
• 5790064 — Laminated inventory list with picture inside case
• 5790053 — Hard shell, sealed, latched flight case with handle, wheels, and cus-
tom formed foam interior to hold each tool
7 46-320273G3 or G4 Non-Magnetic Tool Kit - Universal (See Note 2)
8 5534134 Non-Magnetic Torque Wrench Kit
9 46-301450G1 Fiber optic connector repair kit (See Note 2)
10 46-198094P1 Wrist grounding strap
11 --- Volt Meter
12 --- Extension cords, with ground conductor
13 --- Power strip, grounded type, with minimum of five outlets
14 --- Plastic or aluminum flashlight
15 --- Assorted crimp tools.
16 --- Non-magnetic level, 2 foot length mimimum
17 --- Non-magnetic tape rule, 12 ft
Installation Manual 3.2 Lock Out Tag Out (LOTO)
Table 3-3 Installation Equipment (Table continued)
Item GE Part Number Description

18 --- Assorted drill bits
19 --- Inspection mirror
20 --- Hobby and utility knives
21 8 Inch Pipe Wrench (2)
22 5135527-7 Grafidy Kit
23 5182417 1.5T MCRv Toolkit
Note 1: Supplied as part of Optima.
Note 2: Supplied by GE until turnover of system to customer, then available as part of a GE Cryogen and/or Service
Contract.
3.2 Lock Out Tag Out (LOTO)

The Main Disconnect Panel (MDP) has been installed and is providing power to the HEC Cabinet and
Cryogen Cooler Compressor. Before installing the PGR Cabinet, the PDU input switch on the front of the
MDP must be locked out and tagged.
NOTICE
LOTO must be applied to the HEC cabinet before installation of coolant hoses, data cables,
and ground wire. Refer to HEC LOTO procedures below. It is also important to complete
the installation of all hoses and cables as soon as possible so that coolant supply is
restored to all components to prevent damage.
LOTO prerequisites
Procedure overview
The steps in this Lock Out /Tag Out (LOTO) procedure must be performed by a LOTO-authorized GE Field
Engineer. Completing all the steps in this procedure ensures a safe environment and avoids equipment
damage when working on these parts.
Table 3-4 Affected by LOTO
Name of Equipment Number of Titles of Employees Au- Titles of Affected How to No-
Locks thorized to perform LO- Employees tify
TO
Heat Exchanger Cabinet (HEC) 2 per GE Field En- GE Field Engineers Hospital Personnel Verbal, Post-
gineer (FE) ed signs
Power, Gradient, RF Cabinet (PGR)
Power Distribution Unit (PDU)
NOTE
The following table describes the type, location, and magnitude of energy for LOTO.
Energy Source Yes No Location of Energy Isolating Magnitude of Energy

Means
Electrical x • Main Disconnect Panel 380 to 480 VAC
(MDP)
• Circuit Breaker Panel
Pneumatic x
Hydraulic x
Gas/Water/Steam x
Chemical x
Mechanical Motion x
Gravity x
Springs x
Thermal x
Stored Energy x
Air Under Pressure x
Oil Under Pressure x
Water Under Pressure x Facility water valves at top of • 6.0 Bar (87 psi) Input
HEC and MDP Circuit Breaker • 5.7 Bar (82.8 psi) Output Gradi-
Panel ent Coil (GC)
• 5.0 Bar (80 psi) Output Power,
Gradient, and RF (PGR) Cabinet
Gas Under Pressure x
Steam x
Other x
Preliminary requirements
Table 3-5 Tools and test equipment
Item Part #
Personal Lock 46-194427P320
Multi-locking Device (If multiple service people) 46-194427P313
Red Warning LOTO Tag 46-194427P322
Digital Voltmeter 46-194427P284
Safety
DANGER
ELECTROCUTION HAZARD!
HIGH VOLTAGE PRESENT.
USE PROPER LOCK OUT / TAG OUT PROCEDURES BEFORE installing, servicing and/or
maintaining.
Applying LOTO to PGR cabinet PDU on MDP

NOTICE
The following process only removes power from the PGR Cabinet. The HEC will continue to
receive power so that the cryogen compressor can continue operation uninterrupted.
Powering off the HEC circuit breaker will cause the Cryogen Cooler Compressor to also
lose power. If this is done make sure that the HEC downtime is minimized to avoid boiling
off Cryogens.
Figure 3-11 PDU input switch on MDP with LOTO lock
1. To prepare for shutdown of equipment, notify affected personnel working in the area the LOTO is
being performed.
2. Observe that the POWER ON light is on. It signifies the main breaker is closed and control power is
on.
3. Make sure the PDU input switch is in the OFF position
4. Lock Out/Tag Out the PDU input switch on the MDP
LOTO for Heat Exchanger Cabinet (HEC)

NOTICE
Powering off the HEC circuit breaker will cause the Cryogen Cooler Compressor to also
lose power. If this is done make sure that the HEC downtime is minimized to avoid boiling
off Cryogens.
Type(s) of equipment and/or method(s) used to ensure disconnection(s)

A personal lock and tag and ball valve LOTO device at the site per FE working on the de-energized
equipment at the time of LOTO.
Applying LOTO to the MDP

1. Disable the Magnet Monitor to prevent false alarms if HEC power is locked and tagged out.
NOTE
Check with the facility owner to determine the proper shutdown method for the chiller.
2. Prepare for shutdown of the equipment. Notify affected personnel working in the area that LOTO is
being performed.
Figure 3-12 Powered HEC cabinet
3. Look at the variable speed Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) located on the front of the HEC to visually
confirm that power is on.
NOTE
Powering off HEC without first powering down pumps from VFD can put the VFD at risk
of damage.
4. Toggle off the pumps and blower with the PLC Signal Box keypad as follows:
• Blower: Press and hold the up-arrow ( ^ ), and press F1
• Gradient Coil Pump: Press and hold the up arrow ( ^ ), and press F2
• Power Electronics: Press and hold the up arrow ( ^ ), and press F3
5. Turn off the circuit breakers labeled GC, PE, BLOWER, and CRYO on front of the HEC power box.
Figure 3-13 HEC circuit breaker
6. At the front of the MDP, move the HEC circuit breaker to the OFF position and apply LOTO.
NOTICE
Powering off the HEC circuit breaker will cause the Cryocooler Compressor to also
lose power. Ensure that the HEC downtime is minimized to avoid boiling off cryogens.
7. Look at the variable speed drive LEDs again to visually confirm to ensure that power is off before
removing the front panel.
Figure 3-14 Location of screws on HEC power box
8. Verify all energy is dissipated. Carefully remove the six screws securing the HEC power box front
cover and remove the cover.
Figure 3-15 Terminal points of HEC power box
9. Confirm that voltage is removed by testing the line-to-line voltage at the top and bottom of the
terminal points.
10. Replace the power box front cover.
Applying LOTO to HEC shut-off valves

1. Prepare for shut down. Check with the facility owner to determine the proper shutdown method for
the chiller.
2. Shut off both the facility Return and Supply Valves by turning the handle to a 90º angle.
Figure 3-16 LOTO installed on return valve
Figure 3-17 LOTO installed on supply valve
3. Apply LOTO device to both the return and supply valves.

4. Confirm there is no water draining from quick disconnect, and pressure in the line is relieved.
Removing LOTO
Installation Manual 3.3 System components
Removing LOTO for the HEC

At the completion of the installation of hoses and cables in the HEC cabinet, complete the following
steps to return power to the HEC cabinet.
1. Prepare for re-energizing the equipment. Notify affected personnel working in the area that LOTO
will be removed.
2. If LOTO device was installed, remove personal LOTO device from the HEC circuit breaker on the
MDP.
3. If LOTO device(s) were installed, remove personal LOTO device(s) from both return and supply
valves.
4. If the MDP circuit breaker was turned off at the front panel of the MDP, switch ON the HEC circuit
breaker.
5. Toggle on the pumps and blower from the PLC signal box keypad as follows:
• Power Electronics: Press and hold the up arrow ( ^ ), and press F3
• Gradient Coil Pump: Press and hold the up arrow ( ^ ), and press F2
• Blower: Press and hold the up-arrow ( ^ ), and press F1
6. If return and supply valves were shut off, return the handles in line to the 0º angle.
Removing LOTO for the PGR

At the completion of the system installation, refer to the Service Methods DVD for procedures to remove
LOTO on PDU input switch.
3.3 System components

Basic system
The basic system consists of the following major equipment:
NOTE
(For systems with DV29.0 and later software) The phantom cart and the LVshim phantom side
lobes are not used and are not delivered with the system.
Installation Manual 3.3 System components
Figure 3-18 System components
• The magnet with magnet enclosure and magnet accessories

• Shield/cryocooler compressor cabinet
• Gradient (XRMW) and RF body coils and head coil
• Main disconnect panel
• System electronics cabinets:
• (For MR450w and MR450w GEM) PGR cabinet containing gradient drivers and power
distribution unit module with unregulated transformer 380/400/415/480 Volt, 50/60 Hz with
power filter, CAM chassis or ICE and ASC with boards for 32 channels, components for the
Volume Reconstruction Engine (VRE), narrow band RF amplifier
• (For SIGNA Artist, Artist T, Artist XT) PGR cabinet containing Gradient drivers and power
distribution unit module with unregulated transformer 380/400/415/480 Volt, 50/60 Hz with
power filter, Integrated Control Engine (ICE) and KASC, components for the Volume
Installation Manual 3.4 Installation process
Reconstruction Engine (VRE), narrow band RF amplifier. Supports 32 channels (Artist T), 96
channels (Artist), or 128 channels (Artist XT).
• HEC cabinet containing the cryocoolers supply, cooling loops, and gradient blower.
• PEN cabinet containing the PHPS2, scan room power supply, CAN Fiber I/F, T/R DD Driver
module, penetration panel, and MEMS power supply (Artist and Artist XT)
Software version DV29.1 and later introduces support for a non-MEMS system configuration.
Existing or upgraded systems will continue to use the MEMS power supply. Newly installed or
upgraded systems may not have the MEMS power supply. Identify the presence or absence of
MEMS on your system by looking for the MEMS DC Power Supply Assembly (part number
6859128) in the power supply rack of the ISC.
• Second Penetration Wall (SPW) containing gradient filter, scan room filters & I/F, and ramp/shim
access
• Operator workspace equipment: GOC computer cabinet (containing Linux PC and GOCAA), LCD
widescreen monitor, keyboard, SCIM, mouse and mouse pad, and chair
• Pneumatic patient alert system
• Patient transport table and cradle
• Patient accessories such as: a phantom kit, patient log book, head cushion and sponges, chin and
forehead straps, body wedges, knee cushions, and security/restraint straps
NOTE
(For systems with DV29.0 and later software) The LVshim phantom inner ball, and the
body TLT and loader phantom will ship together with their storage holder pads. Do not
discard the storage holder pads with the packing material.
• Gating accessories which include: patient cardiac leads, peripheral gating probe, and respiratory
bellows
System options
This section lists options that have site preparation impact.
• Advantage Workstation (AW). NOTE: LCD monitor is recommended for AW to be located near the
system Operator Workspace due to gauss field proximity limits
• Bar code reader for use in conjunction with HIS/RIS software option
• Oxygen monitor
• BrainWave option
• Additional patient transport table with cradle
• Other hard copy devices and patient accessories
3.4 Installation process
Installation procedure
The following flow chart is a guide for an orderly and efficient installation of the GEM or non-GEM
system. Note that many procedures may be performed in parallel and may be performed in any order
according to the specific situation of each site.
NOTE
All on-site construction must be completed before equipment is delivered and installation
starts. Attempting to install the system while construction is being completed will impact
installation efficiency and further delay site completion. Making sure that all preinstallation
and construction work is completed before equipment is delivered will usually result in an
earlier turnover date.
Installation flowchart explanation

This installation flowchart has been developed assuming that all equipment has been delivered
complete. Make sure that every part required is available before starting.
NOTE
These procedures are similar to cable maps in that they are to be removed from this binder
and used at the location where hardware installation is being performed. The Procedures
must be returned to the binder for future reference upon completion of the installation.
The flow chart references the section in this manual for completion. The columns are defined as follows:
• Step - The recommended order of installation procedures
• Completion Check - This box MUST be checked after completion of procedure per ISO 9001
requirements.
• System - This box spans the entire column. Mark with a check (√) when completion of a System
procedure
• Eq - This box spans half the column. Mark with a check (√) when completion of a Equipment
Room procedure
• Mag - This box spans half the column. Mark with a check (√) when completion of a Magnet
Room procedure
• System - Installation procedures that are not specific to the equipment or magnet rooms but
usually have to be completed before proceeding to the next step
• Equipment Room - Installation procedure to be performed in the equipment room or operator
workspace area
• Magnet Room - Installation procedure to be completed in the magnet room
Installation flowchart
Table 3-6 Installation flowchart
Completion
System
check
Step
System
Equipment room Magnet room
Eq Mag
PREREQUISITES FOR SYSTEM INSTALLATION
1 Magnet Delivery and Installation completed
2 Magnet and Cryogen Subsystem, Section 1, completed
3 Customer supplied water cooling installed
4 Magnet room exhaust fan installed and operational
5 Magnet room cryogen vent to building installed
Table 3-6 Installation flowchart (Table continued)
Completion
System
check
Step
System
Eq Mag
6 Main Disconnect Panel (MDP) installed
7 Site electrical wiring and HVAC installed and operational
8 SPW and PEN Panel frames installed
9 HEC cabinet installed with customer supplied power and cooling connected
GETTING STARTED
10 Product Delivery Instructions on page 39
11 Damage in Transportation on page 45
12 MR System Shipping and Storage Require-
ments on page 45
13 Non-English Label Installation
14
15 Required Tools on page 47
16 Before starting installation, complete Lock Out
Tag Out (LOTO) on page 48
POSITIONING OF EQUIPMENT
17 In Cabinet Positioning on page 63, com- Complete Install Blower Box on Penetration
plete Cabinet Installation Requirements Panel on page 164
through Install Penetration Panel in RF
Screen Room Opening
18 In Operator Workspace on page 305, com-
plete Operator Workspace Table Anchor
Installation and GOC Installa-
tion on page 306
CABLE AND SYSTEM INSTALLATION
19 Move lean cable carts into designated rooms
Sorting Cables
20 Rear Magnet Enclosure Cable Cover Test-
Fit on page 111
21 Cryogen Line Positioning on Mag-
net on page 118
22 Route gradient cables in equipment room Route gradient cables in magnet room DO NOT
DO NOT CONNECT at this time. Route CONNECT at this time. Route gradient cables
gradient cables in overhead cable in overhead cable tray on page 124
tray on page 119
23 Route ground cables DO NOT CONNECT Route and connect magnet ground cable
at this time.6.13 Route and connect 6.10 Connect magnet ground, Run
ground cables on page 154 M4005 on page 150
Completion
System
check
Step
System
Eq Mag
24 Route power cables DO NOT CONNECT Position rear pedestal at back of magnet
at this time.6.14 Route and connect 6.11 Position rear pedestal on page 150
equipment room power
cables on page 156
25 Route all cables to designated end points Route all cables to designated end points PEN
between cabinets, SPW, and OW. DO NOT Panel, SPW, and magnet & rear pedestal com-
CONNECT at this time. Overhead Cables, ponents. DO NOT CONNECT at this time.
on page 113 RF Cables, Data Cables, Overhead Cables, on page 116RF Cables, Data
on page 157 OW Cables Cables
26 Move cabinets to final position PEN cabi-
net and PGR cabinet
27 Complete PDU set-up in PGR cabinet
5.1 PGR/PDU setup on page 74
28 Connect ONLY the ground and power ca-
bles. Refer to Route and Connect Ground
Cables on page 154, Route and Connect
Equipment Room Power Ca-
bles on page 156 and Power and Ground
Connections
29 Perform Ground Resistance Checks. Instruc-
tions found on applicable Service Methods DVD
at Functional Checks>Grounding & Leakage
Current>Ground Resistance Checks. This check
should be performed by customer supplied li-
censed electrician.
30 In Gradient Cable Installation on page 118, In Gradient Cable Installation on page 118,
complete Equipment Room Gradient Ca- complete Magnet Room Gradient Cables for
bles for connection of cables between PGR connection of cables between magnet and
cabinet and SPW. SPW.
31 In RF Transmit Cable Installa- In RF Transmit Cable Installation on page 151,
tion on page 151, complete Route and complete Route and connect in magnet room
connect in equipment room for routing for routing and connecting RF cables in magnet
and connecting RF cables in equipment room
room
32 Complete connection of cables in equip- Complete connection of remaining cables in
ment room. Refer to Route and Connect magnet room. Refer to Route and Connect Ca-
Equipment Room Data Cables on page 157 bles in Magnet Room on page 196
33 Complete connection of cables to operator
workspace. Refer to Section 5 in Operator
Workspace
34 Complete the procedures in Install Air and Wa-
ter Hoses on page 166 for both the equipment
and magnet rooms
Completion
System
check
Step
System
Eq Mag
35 Complete the procedures in Install Fiber Optic
Cables on page 209 for both the operator work-
space, equipment room and magnet room
36 Complete Pneumatic Patient Alert Installa-
tion on page 227
37 Complete remaining installation proce-
dures in Operator Workspace on page 305
38 Complete Install Temperature/Humidity For MR450w GEM,
Sensor Components on PEN Cabi- MR750w or MR750w GEM, complete the In
net on page 162 Room Display (IRD) and Sensor Bracket In-
stallation
For MR450w (non-GEM) complete either In
Room Display Installation OR LED Display
Installation
39 Complete Dock Installation on page 192
40 Complete Install RF Door Switch Run Complete Bridge & Rear Pedestal Installa-
E3014 on page 164 tion on page 235
41 Complete LPCA Installation on page 245
42 Complete Emergency Off Connec- Complete SRI Connections on page 247
tions on page 247
43 Complete Route and Connect SPW Ca-
bles on page 248
44 Complete Route and Connect Penetration Pan-
el Cables on page 249
45 Complete MRU Installation. Refer to Magnet &
Cryogen Subsystem manual for installation
procedures.
46 Complete Installation of Magnet Enclosure
Rear Covers on page 252
47 Complete Coil and Dress Cable in PEN Panel
Closet on page 253
48 In 10.1 Completion checklist on page 324, com-
plete Mechanical Installation Completion
Checklist
49 Complete Final Enclosure Installation
50 Complete Install Laser Alignment Light Warn-
ing Label on page 263
51 Complete Install Patient Transport on page 264
52 Complete Returning Shipping Material
53 Complete Final Mechanical Installation Steps
Completion
System
check
Step
System
Eq Mag
54 Complete GE Field Engineer Responsibili-
ties on page 324
Mechanical Installation Complete
System start-up
Refer to the applicable Service Methods DVD for the following procedures:
1. Power On
2. LCD Monitor Screen Adjustments
3. Host Operating System Software Load
4. Either of the following:
• Class M procedures:
• Software Option Install with eLicense
• Installation Calibration Wizard
OR
• Class A and C procedures: Install Flow
5. Turn site over to Applications who will instruct the users
4
4 Cabinet Installation
4.1 Cabinet positioning

Cabinet installation requirements
Positioning of cabinets is critical for installing cables and post-installation system operation. Refer to
architectural site layouts for
• Location of all cabinets and related equipment.
• For seismic anchoring (where required)
• For crane rigging, contact your local field service engineer or Project Manager Installation, PMI.
CAUTION
DAMAGE TO CABINETS
Equipment room cabinets must not be installed in an area with magnetic fields higher
than 50 gauss.
Refer to site layout plans for positioning of cabinets.
WARNING
POTENTIAL INJURY HAZARD

Cabinet weight.
Due to weight of cabinets, at least two people are required to move any cabinet.
Cabinet positioning preparation

The following illustration shows a typical layout for the equipment room. For ease of cable installation in
overhead cable trays, it is recommended that cabinets NOT be positioned in final location until after
cables have been routed.
Installation Manual 4.1 Cabinet positioning
Figure 4-1 Initial positioning of cabinets
1. The HEC cabinet has already been positioned and installed prior to delivery of PEN and PGR
cabinets.
2. Refer to site layout drawings to determine location of PEN and PGR cabinets. Use the minimum
spacing distances as noted below, apply tape on floor to mark final location of front corners of
cabinets.
NOTE
The procedures for removing the dollies from the HEC cabinet and attaching them to the
PEN and PGR cabinets are provided in Cabinet moving dollies on page 65 through Final
position of PEN cabinet on page 72.
3. Using the dollies, move PEN and PGR cabinets into temporary position in front of final location.
Removing components from top of PGR cabinet
If the PGR cabinet, with the brackets and covers attached to the top of cabinet, is too tall to go through
doorways, then these components will have to be removed. They will be reinstalled after cabinet is
placed in final position.
Figure 4-2 PGR cabinet bracket removal
1. Unfasten the four screws that attach the front cover to the cable bracket and remove cover.
2. Unfasten the five screws that attach the cable bracket to the top of the cabinet and remove
bracket.
3. If provided on cabinet, lift and remove the protective coolant hose covers. These will be reinstalled
after the coolant hoses are connected.
Cabinet moving dollies
The HEC cabinet has already been delivered to site and installed. The moving dollies that are required for
positioning the cabinets should have remained attached to the HEC cabinet.
• If dollies are not on site, they can be ordered online at www.umi-dollyshop.com
• For technical questions, contact: UMI, 1-800-638-7457
The dollies have the following features to aid in their use:
• Wheel Locking Pin - Keeps the wheels locked into a certain direction
• Parking Brakes - For holding the cabinet in position
• Slide and Lock - The dollies can be removed in limited space (15 inches or 380mm)
• Twinning Hardware - hardware to connect each dolly to the other dolly during transport without a
cabinet
Figure 4-3 Cabinet dollies
1. The dollies are designed with a slide and lock attachment plate. Slide the dolly until the cabinet
bushing lines up with the large opening on the attachment plate.
2. Remove each dolly.
NOTE
Dolly height may have to be adjusted to aid in the removal process.
3. Remove each bushing and place in attached dolly bag.
4. Attach the two dollies together using the twinning hardware, if desired.
5. Move dollies to next cabinet to be positioned.
Remove cabinets from shipping pallets
The PEN and PGR cabinets are delivered to site secured to pallets. The cabinets must be removed from
the pallets and positioned in equipment room according to site layout plans. The cabinet moving dollies
that were attached to the HEC cabinet, which was delivered and installed prior to magnet delivery, are
required to move the PEN and PGR cabinets off the pallets.
Figure 4-4 Securing dollies to cabinets
Move PGR cabinet into equipment room
NOTICE
The screws and brackets used to secure the cabinets to the pallets during shipment of
cabinets are also used to secure the cabinets to the floor at sites requiring seismic
support. DO NOT DISCARD BRACKETS AND FASTENING SCREWS. Retain and save for
customer.
Figure 4-5 Installation of bushings
1. Unfasten screws for each angle shipping bracket and remove bracket from each side of cabinet.
2. Install the six bushings, three on each side, to the bottom of the cabinet.
Figure 4-6 Position dollies on bushings
3. Maneuver the dolly so that all three bushings slip into the slide lock on the attachment plate.
4. Slide the dolly sideways to position the bushings in the lifting part of the attachment plate.
Figure 4-7 Secure dollies to cabinet
5. Raise the dolly by turning the jack screw clockwise. This will lock the dolly into position.
6. Secure to dollies with strap. Make sure the strap goes through the slot of the attachment plate and
the clamp is on flat surface of dolly.
7. Tighten strap and close clamp.
8. Lift cabinet off of pallet by turning the jack screw clockwise until the cabinet surface is free from the
pallet surface.
NOTE
Alternate raising each dolly in 1/4 inch (6mm) increments until the cabinet is above the
pallet.
Figure 4-8 Final placement of cabinet
9. Slide the pallet out from under the cabinet.

10. Lower the cabinet by turning the jack screw counter-clockwise until the cabinet is about 1 inch
(25mm) above the floor.
NOTE
Alternate lowering each side of cabinet.
11. Move the cabinet into the equipment room.
12. Refer to Cabinet positioning preparation on page 63 for preliminary placement of cabinet and lower
cabinet into position.
NOTE
Cabinet will be moved to its final position after cables have been routed overhead.
13. Remove dollies for attachment to PEN cabinet.
Move PEN cabinet into equipment room
Repeat the steps in Move PGR cabinet into equipment room on page 67 for removing the PEN cabinet
from the shipping pallet and moving it to the temporary position in the Equipment Room.
Install penetration panel in RF screen room opening
NOTE
It is recommended that the following steps be completed after routing of cables in overhead
cable trays.
Figure 4-9 Initial position of PEN cabinet
1. Move PEN cabinet to within 6 inches (152mm, +/- 25mm) of framed opening in RF room wall.
NOTE
The SPW was previously installed.
2. Unfasten Penetration Panel from rear of cabinet.

3. Install and secure Penetration Panel into open frame using 20 M5 x 16mm SS Hex screws and 20 M5
SS Flat Washers.
NOTE
The fasteners were delivered to site earlier with the SPW installation.
Figure 4-10 Install PEN panel
Disconnect cables
Before moving the PEN Cabinet to its final position, the following steps need to be completed.
Figure 4-11 Cable disconnection requirements
1. (For SRPS Only) The SRPS J50 Dongle terminator (5172838-2) should have been delivered with the
unit. The terminator should be pre-installed on magnet room side of PEN panel at J50. make sure
terminator is installed at J50.
2. On the PEN panel, disconnect cables at J93, J95, and J96 of the dynamic disable filter module.
3. On the back of the driver module, disconnect same cables as above step at J22 (BD2), J24 (BD3),
and J25 (BD4). Discard cables.
Final position of PEN cabinet
NOTICE
FOR SRPS ONLY: Before moving PEN Cabinet into position, make sure above cables are
disconnected and the SRPS J50 Dongle terminator is installed at J50.
Figure 4-12 Final position of PEN cabinet
1. Move PEN cabinet to within 2 inches (50mm, +/- 25mm) of framed opening, position cabinet and
lower into place.
NOTE
Rear of cabinet must be positioned as close as possible to frame of Pen Panel.
2. Remove cabinet moving dollies. Refer to dolly removal steps in Cabinet moving dollies on page 65.
Final position of PGR cabinet
The final positioning of the cabinet is recommended after all the cables have been routed in the
overhead cable trays.
Figure 4-13 Positioning PGR cabinet
1. If dollies are not attached to cabinet, re-attach moving dollies to each side of cabinet
2. Lift and move cabinet to final position as indicated by site layout drawings.
Return moving dollies
Moving dollies must be returned for use on future shipments.
Figure 4-14 Secure dollies to pallet
1. Secure dollies to one of the pallets used for shipping cabinets to site.
2. Call Tech-Trans at 1-800-851-9929 to make arrangements for return of dollies for next shipment.
NOTE
For sites outside of the United States or Canada, re-use or dispose of dollies per the local
requirements.
5
5 PGR Cabinet PDU Setup
5.1 PGR/PDU setup

Input voltage selection
DANGER
ELECTRIC SHOCK HAZARD

Lethal voltages are present in the PGR/PDU gradient cabinet
Lock out and tag out the power at the main disconnect before proceeding. Refer to LOTO
for the Main Disconnect Panel (MDP).
The PDU is shipped with the default voltage setting of 480 VAC.
Figure 5-1 Remove cover plate
1. Using a voltmeter or other voltage indicating device, check to be sure that no voltage is being
applied to the input of the PDU.
2. Remove the plate from the front of the PDU marked INPUT VOLTAGE SELECT.
Installation Manual 5.1 PGR/PDU setup
Figure 5-2 Power wire connections to terminal
3. For each of the three phases, be sure the wire is connected to the proper terminal for the actual
input voltage at the site and that the terminal screw is tight to make a good connection.
4. If the power connections are not configured properly, make sure that the proper personnel correct
the wiring connection. See Teal PDU Installation and Maintenance Manual for additional details.
System power connections
All power connections to the Main Disconnect Panel (MDP) and other components should be completed
by customer supplied licensed electrician.
• Runs E3030, E0009, M3030, and E4002 are GE supplied. All other wiring is customer supplied.
• All circuits require ground wires.
Installation Manual 5.1 PGR/PDU setup
Figure 5-3 Power wiring diagram
6
6 Cable and System Installation
6.1 Overview of system components

The illustration below represents a typical layout for a GEM or non-GEM system. The procedures on the
following pages of this section will provide information on installing cables and completing the
attachment of components to the magnet.
Figure 6-1 Room layout
Installation Manual 6.2 Cable map interconnects
6.2 Cable map interconnects

Select the applicable equipment room and magnet room cable map from the following pages for the
system installed at the site. Maps with a slash (/) indicate the number of channels supported by the
system and by the patient table. For example, 32/32 indicates a system with 32 channels and a patient
table of 32 channels.
• MR450w installation interconnect maps
• 16/0 Channel MR450w 1.5T Interconnect Map with eSRPS & LED Display - Equipment & Control
Rooms
• 16/0 Channel MR450w 1.5T Interconnect Map with SRPS & LED Display - Equipment & Control
Rooms
• 16/0 Channel MR450w 1.5T Interconnect Map with eSRPS & IRD - Equipment & Control Rooms
• 16/0 Channel MR450w 1.5T Interconnect Map with SRPS & IRD - Equipment & Control Rooms
• 16/0 Channel MR450w 1.5T Interconnect Map with eSRPS & IRD & ICE – Equipment & Control
Rooms
• 32/0 or 32/32 Channel MR450w 1.5T Interconnect Map with eSRPS & IRD - Equipment & Control
Rooms
• 32/0 or 32/32 Channel MR450w 1.5T Interconnect Map with SRPS & IRD - Equipment & Control
Rooms
• 32/0 or 32/32 Channel MR450w 1.5T Interconnect Map with eSRPS & IRD & ICE – Equipment &
Control Rooms
• 16/0 Channel MR450w 1.5T Interconnect Map with eSRPS & LED Display - Magnet Room
• 16/0 Channel MR450w 1.5T Interconnect Map with SRPS & LED Display - Magnet Room
• 16/0 Channel MR450w 1.5T Interconnect Map with eSRPS & IRD - Magnet Room
• 16/0 Channel MR450w 1.5T Interconnect Map with SRPS & IRD - Magnet Room
• 16/0 Channel MR450w 1.5T Interconnect Map with eSRPS & IRD & ICE – Magnet Room
• 32/0 Channel MR450w 1.5T Interconnect Map with eSRPS & IRD - Magnet Room
• 32/0 Channel MR450w 1.5T Interconnect Map with SRPS & IRD - Magnet Room
• 32/0 Channel MR450w 1.5T Interconnect Map with eSRPS & IRD & ICE – Magnet Room
• 32/32 Channel MR450w 1.5T Interconnect Map with eSRPS, IRD & P ports - Magnet Room
• 32/32 Channel MR450w 1.5T Interconnect Map with SRPS, IRD & P ports - Magnet Room
• 32/32 Channel MR450w 1.5T Interconnect Map with eSRPS, IRD & Pports & ICE – Magnet Room
• MR450w GEM installation interconnect maps
• 32 Channel MR450w GEM 1.5T Interconnect Map with eSRPS - Equipment & Control Rooms
• 32 Channel MR450w GEM 1.5T Interconnect Map with SRPS - Equipment & Control Rooms
• 32 Channel MR450w GEM with ICE / SIGNA Artist T Installation Interconnect Map - Equipment
& Control Rooms
• 96 or 128 Channel SIGNA Artist or Artist XT Installation Interconnect Map - Equipment &
Control Rooms
• 32 Channel MR450w GEM 1.5T Interconnect Map with eSRPS - Magnet Room
• 32 Channel MR450w GEM 1.5T Interconnect Map with SRPS - Magnet Room
• 32 Channel MR450w GEM with ICE / SIGNA Artist T Installation Interconnect Map - Magnet
Room
• 96 or 128 Channel SIGNA Artist or Artist XT Installation Interconnect Map - Magnet Room
• SIGNA Artist Installation Interconnect Map- Equipment & Control Rooms- T5820
------ This page intentionally left blank ------
&KDQQHO05Z7,QWHUFRQQHFW0DSZLWKH6536 /(''LVSOD\±(TXLSPHQW &RQWURO5RRPV
)DFLOLW\3RZHU)LOWHUV
2: &XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG
2:*2& 7R06058
>%URZQ@ 2OGHU*2&VRQO\ (2II
(
6ZLWFK
+8% 5- 63:
3RUW$ (WKHUQHW 3RUW 3RUW (WKHUQHW 3RUW 6HUYLFH/DSWRS 5)'RRU ><HOORZ*UHHQ@
(
3RUW (WKHUQHW 6LWH1HWZRUN 6ZLWFK
02'(0 ( 56
3RUW (WKHUQHW $:RSWLRQ -- 0
2SWLRQ
3RUW
+267
3& ( - 0
86%56 ( - 0
( )- (
&RQYHUWHU &5<
.(<%2$5' ( ( >2UDQJH*UHHQ@ )
0QWU )
( -5 -&
)
0286(
( 3RZHU )
6HQVRU&DEOH L%XWWRQ
*DV6XSSO\ -:DYHJXLGH
+267 ( 0QWU
',63/$< *DV5HWXUQ -:DYHJXLGH
3RUW%
*2&$$ ( )- (
/LQH,Q
:DWHU6XSSO\
- -
/LQH2XW - :DWHU5HWXUQ
( )- (
6&,0 ( - ( - 0
-
*1' ( ; ; 0

6WXG 2:3'0 *UDGLHQW
( < )LOWHU < 0
6SDUH - - 6SDUH
(RU( = = 0
0RGHP3RZHU - - ,5'&3RZHURSWLRQ
6SDUH - - 6SDUH
(+RVW'LVSOD\ - - +XE3RZHU
3DWLHQW$OHUW%R[ - - +RVW3RZHU
( - - *2&$$3RZHU
)URP3*5
0
)DFLOLW\ +(&>*UHHQ@ - 0

8WLOLWLHV - -
&5<3ZU - 0
*5(< *5<+2 6(
,13ZU - 0
<(/+26( - 0
<(//2:
3RZHU%R[
%/8( %/8+26( -:DYHJXLGH
)DFLOLW\
:DWHU )DFLOLW\6XSSO\ %/. %/.+26( -:DYHJXLGH
6XSSO\
6XSSO\ $,5+26( -:DYHJXLGH
)DFLOLW\ $LU
5HWXUQ $,5+26( -:DYHJXLGH
:DWHU )DFLOLW\5HWXUQ )LOWHU
5HWXUQ
6LJQDO%R[ *1'
*1' 6WXG
6WXG
56 - (*1' 5)&RPPRQ
0*1'
)- &$7- (*1' *URXQG6WXG
( -)/7(03 *51
)- 5(' 3(1
><HOORZ@ 3DQHO
( - - ,QWHUIDFH
-
7R6LWH ( - 021 *1'
)SRZHU
*1'SRZHU
(WKHUQHW >*UHHQ5HG@ 6HQVRU 6WXG
L%XWWRQ
&DEOH
&XVWRPHU 75''
6XSSOLHG 3RZHU - (
)LOWHU
2XWOHW
-- 0
*1' --
5(' 5('
6WXG
-- 0
- *51 *51 -
-
3*5 - (
(
&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG
&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG
-
( - >5HG@ - ( -
- (
(*1'
- - 0
;
- 0
&%
<
*3(
- 0
=
- 0
- 0
0'3 (* 1'
- 0
(*1'
- 0
(* 1'
3+36
-
*1' - &DELQHW
(&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG
6WXG - (+HDG7[ ,QWHUIDFH ([FLWHU

(&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG
- 0
7% - (%RG\7[
- 0
- -
- 0
&% - ()2 -
- 0
&% (&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG &% 3DWLHQW$OHUW

7R2:3'0- - )2:DYHJXLGH
&RQWURO%R[
3)2
-
0 )2
5(95
- ()2 -
- ( -
6HQVRU - ( - H6536
L%XWWRQ &DEOH -
- ( - -
3(0 - ((6WRS - - 0
- ( -
- (%RG\75 -
- (+HDG75 -
- ( -
,QWHUFRQQHFWV1XPEHULQJ/HJHQG 6\PERO/HJHQG
)LUVW&KDUDFWHURQHGLJLWDOSKD %DOO9DOYH 5HIHUWR,Q VWDOO)L EHU2SWLF&DEOHVVH FWLRQIR UGH WDL OLQVWUXFWLR QVRQ
x ([[[[ 5XQVLQ(TXLSPHQW5RRPRU&RQWURO5RRP
&KHFN9DOYH URXWLQJ DQ GFRQQ HFWLQJILEHURSWLFVLQFDE LQHWV
x 0[[[[ 5XQVHQWLUHO\LQWKH0DJQHW5RRP

'HSHQ GHQWRQ V\VWHPG HOLYHUHGWR VLWHFRPSOHWHR QHRIWKHIROOR ZLQ J
x 3[[[[ 5XQVWKURXJK3(1RU63:DQGURXWHGLQ0DJQHWDQG(TXLSPHQW5RRP
SURFHG XUHV
6XEVHTXHQW&KDUDFWHUV x 2QV\VWHPVZLWK;* 'RQO\WKHL%XWWR QD QGWKH 6H QVR U&DEOH
x [[[[ $&3RZHU *URXQG DUHWRE HL QVWDOOHG DQ GFRQQ HFWHG WR- RQ3+36 PRGX OH
x [[[[ &RD[5) x 2QV\VWHPVZLWK;* R QO\FRQ QHFWWKHL %XWWRQ WRWKHSUH YLRX VO\
x [[[[ )LEHU2SWLFV LQVWDOOHGVHQVRUFDEO HFRQQ HFWHGWR-RQWK H3 (0PRGX OH
x [[[[ 6LJQDO
7KH*2&KXEVZLWFK LVRQO\LQ FOXG HGRQROGHU*2&V)RUQHZHU
',5(&7,21
x [[[[ 2WKHU
*2 &VWKH(WK HUQHWSRUWRQ WKH+RVW3&LVD YDL ODEOHIR UG LUHFW
FRQQHFWLRQWR VHUYLFH OD SWR SVLWHQHWZRUN$:R SWL RQRUFXVWRPHU
--Dotted lines for module outlines or cables indicate an option VXSSOLH GVZLWFKLIPXOWLSOHFRQQHFWLRQVD UHU HTXLUH G
&KDQQHO05Z7,QWHUFRQQHFW0DSZLWK6536 /(''LVSOD\±(TXLSPHQW &RQWURO5RRPV
2: &XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG
2:*2& 7R06058
>%URZQ@ (2II
2OGHU*2&VRQO\ (
6ZLWFK
63:
+8% 5- 5)'RRU
3RUW$ (WKHUQHW 3RUW 3RUW (WKHUQHW 3RUW 6HUYLFH/DSWRS (
><HOORZ*UHHQ@
3RUW 6ZLWFK
(WKHUQHW 6LWH1HWZRUN
02'(0 ( 56
2SWLRQ 3RUW
+267
3& ( - 0
86%56 ( - 0
&RQYHUWHU ( )- (
.(<%2$5' ( &5<
( >2UDQJH*UHHQ@ )
)
0QWU ( -5 -&
)
0286(
6HQVRU&DEOH L%XWWRQ ( 3RZHU )
+267 ( 0QWU
3RUW%
*2&$$ ( )- (
:DWHU6XSSO\
/LQH,Q - -
( )- (
6&,0 ( - - ( - 0
*1' ; ; 0
6WXG 2:3'0
( *UDGLHQW
( < )LOWHU < 0
6SDUH - - 6SDUH
(RU( = = 0
6SDUH - - 6SDUH
( - - *2&$$3RZHU
)URP3*5
0
8WLOLWLHV - -
&5<3ZU - 0
*5(< *5<+2 6(
,13ZU - 0
<(//2: <(/+26( - 0
3RZHU%R[
%/8( %/8+26( -:DYHJXLGH
)DFLOLW\
6XSSO\
)DFLOLW\ $LU
5HWXUQ
6LJQDO%R[ *1'
*1' 6WXG
6WXG
56 - (*1' 5)&RPPRQ
0*1'
)- &$7- (*1' *URXQG6WXG
( -)/7(03 *51
)- 5(' 3(1
*1'SRZHU
3DQHO
)SRZHU
><HOORZ@
( - - ,QWHUIDFH
-
7R6LWH ( - 021 *1'
L%XWWRQ
&DEOH
&XVWRPHU 75''
6XSSOLHG 3RZHU - (
)LOWHU
2XWOHW
&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG
&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG
-- 0
*1' --
5(' 6WXG
5(' -- 0
- *51 *51 -
-
3*5 - (
( -
( - >5HG@ - ( -
- (
(*1'
- - 0
&%
*3(
;
< - 0
(&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG
= - 0
(&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG
- 0
- 0
0'3 (* 1'
- 0
(*1'
- 0
(* 1'
3+36
-
*1' - &DELQHW
7% - 0
- (%RG\7[
- - - 0
&% ()2 - - 0
-
- 0
&RQWURO%R[
5(95
3)2
-
0 )2
- ()2 -
- ( - 6536
- ( - - 0
6HQVRU
L%XWWRQ &DEOH - - ( - - 0
- ((6WRS - - 0
3(0
- ( - - 0
6\PERO/HJHQG - (%RG\75 - - 0
- (+HDG75 - - 0
%DOO9DOYH - ( -
&KHFN9DOYH -
,QWHUFRQQHFWV1XPEHULQJ/HJHQG
7HUPLQDWRUDSSOLH GD W- R I3HQH WUDWLRQ 3D QHO
)LUVW&KDUDFWHURQHGLJLWDOSKD 5HIHUWR,Q VWDOO)L EHU2SWLF&DEOHVVH FWLRQIR UGH WDL OLQVWUXFWLR QVRQ

x ([[[[ 5XQVLQ(TXLSPHQW5RRPRU&RQWURO5RRP URXWLQJ DQ GFRQQ HFWLQJILEHURSWLFVLQFDE LQHWV
',5(&7,21
'HSHQ GHQWRQ V\VWHPG HOLYHUHGWR VLWHFRPSOHWHR QHRIWKHIROOR ZLQ J

SURFHG XUHV
x [[[[ 6LJQDO 7KH*2&KXEVZLWFK LVRQO\LQ FOXG HGRQROGHU*2&V)RUQHZHU

x [[[[ 2WKHU *2 &VWKH(WK HUQHWSRUWRQ WKH+RVW3&LVD YDL ODEOHIR UG LUHFW
&KDQQHO05Z7,QWHUFRQQHFW0DSZLWKH6536 ,5'±(TXLSPHQW &RQWURO5RRPV
2: &XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG
2:*2& 7R06058
(
6ZLWFK
+8% 5- 63:
3RUW$ (W KHUQHW 3RUW 3RUW (WKHUQHW 3RUW 6HUYLFH/DSWRS 5)'RRU ><HOORZ*UHHQ@
(
02'(0 ( 56 3RUW (WKHUQHW $:RSWLRQ -- 0
2SWLRQ 3RUW
+267
3& ( - 0
86%56 ( - 0
( )- (
&RQYHUWHU &5<
.(<%2$5' ( ( >2UDQJH*UHHQ@ )
0QWU '9,' )
- - ( -5 -&
86% )
0286( - ,5' - 6HQVRU&DEOH L%XWWRQ ( 3RZHU )
- -:DYHJXLGH
+267 ( 0QWU
*DV6XSSO\
3RUW%
*2&$$ ( )- (
/LQH,Q
:DWHU6XSSO\
- -
( )- (
6&,0 ( - ( - 0
-
*1' ( ; ; 0

6WXG 2:3'0 *UDGLHQW
( < < 0
6SDUH - - 6SDUH )LOWHU
(RU( = = 0
6SDUH - - 6SDUH
( - - *2&$$3RZHU
)URP3*5
0

8WLOLWLHV - -
&5<3ZU - 0
*5(< *5<+2 6(
,13ZU - 0
<(/+26( - 0
<(//2:
3RZHU%R[
%/8( %/8+26( -:DYHJXLGH
)DFLOLW\
6XSSO\
)DFLOLW\ $LU
5HWXUQ
6LJQDO%R[ *1'
*1' 6WXG
6WXG
56 - (*1' 5)&RPPRQ
0*1'
)- &$7- (*1' *URXQG6WXG
( -)/7(03 *51
)- 5(' 3(1
><HOORZ@ 3DQHO
( - - ,QWHUIDFH
-
7R6LWH ( - 021 *1'
)SRZHU
*1'SRZHU
L%XWWRQ
&DEOH
&XVWRPHU 75''
6XSSOLHG 3RZHU - (
)LOWHU
2XWOHW
-- 0
3,5'
*1' --
5(' 5('
6WXG
-- 0
- *51 *51 -
-
3*5 - (
&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG (
&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG
-
( - >5HG@ - ( -
- (
- - 0

(*1' ;
- 0
&%
<
*3(
- 0
=
- 0
- 0
0'3 (*1'
- 0
(*1'
- 0
(* 1'
3+36
-
*1' - &DELQHW
(&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG
6WXG ([FLWHU
(&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG
- (+HDG7[ ,QWHUIDFH

- 0
7% - (%RG\7[
- 0
- -
- 0
&% - ()2 -
- 0
&% (&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG &% 3DWLHQW$OHUW -
7R2:3'0- )2:DYHJXLGH
&RQWURO%R[
3)2
-
3)2
0)2
5(95
- ()2 -
- ( -
- ( - H6536
6HQVRU - ( - -
L%XWWRQ &DEOH -
- ((6WRS - - 0
3(0 - ( -
- (%RG\75 -
- (+HDG75 -
- ( -
5HIHUWR,Q VWDOO)L EHU2SWLF&DEOHVVH FWLRQIR UGH WDL OLQVWUXFWLR QVRQ
)LUVW&KDUDFWHURQHGLJLWDOSKD %DOO9DOYH
URXWLQJ DQ GFRQQ HFWLQJILEHURSWLFVLQFDE LQHWV
x ([[[[ 5XQVLQ(TXLSPHQW5RRPRU&RQWURO5RRP &KHFN9DOYH
x 0[[[[ 5XQVHQWLUHO\LQWKH0DJQHW5RRP 'HSHQ GHQWRQ V\VWHPG HOLYHUHGWR VLWHFRPSOHWHR QHRIWKHIROOR ZLQ J
x 3[[[[ 5XQVWKURXJK3(1RU63:DQGURXWHGLQ0DJQHWDQG(TXLSPHQW5RRP SURFHG XUHV
x 2QV\VWHPVZLWK;* R QO\FRQ QHFWWKHL %XWWRQ WRWKHSUH YLRX VO\
x [[[[ &RD[5) LQVWDOOHGVHQVRUFDEO HFRQQ HFWHGWR-RQWK H3 (0PRGX OH
x [[[[ )LEHU2SWLFV

x [[[[ 2WKHU
',5(&7,21

VXSSOLH GVZLWFKLIPXOWLSOHFRQQHFWLRQVD UHU HTXLUH G
--Dotted lines for module outlines or cables indicate an option
&KDQQHO05Z7,QWHUFRQQHFW0DSZLWK6536 ,5'±(TXLSPHQW &RQWURO5RRPV
2: &XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG
2:*2& 7R06058
(
6ZLWFK
+8%
63:
5- 5)'RRU
3RUW$ (WKHUQHW 3RUW 3RUW (WKHUQHW 3RUW 6HUYLFH/DSWRS (
><HOORZ*UHHQ@
02'(0 ( 56
2SWLRQ
3RUW
+267
3& ( - 0
86%56 ( - 0
&RQYHUWHU ( )- (
.(<%2$5' ( &5<
( >2UDQJH*UHHQ@ )
- - )
0QWU '9,' ( -5 -&
)
0286( 86% - ,5' - 6HQVRU&DEOH L%XWWRQ ( 3RZHU )
-
+267 ( 0QWU
3RUW%
*2&$$ ( )- (
:DWHU6XSSO\
/LQH,Q - -
( )- (
6&,0 ( - - ( - 0
*1' ( ; ; 0
6WXG 2:3'0 *UDGLHQW
( < )LOWHU < 0
6SDUH - - 6SDUH (RU( = = 0
6SDUH - - 6SDUH
( - - *2&$$3RZHU
)URP3*5
0
8WLOLWLHV - -
&5<3ZU - 0
*5(< *5<+2 6(
,13ZU - 0
<(//2: <(/+26( - 0
3RZHU%R[
%/8( %/8+26( -:DYHJXLGH
)DFLOLW\
6XSSO\
)DFLOLW\ $LU
5HWXUQ
6LJQDO%R[ *1'
*1' 6WXG
6WXG
56 - (*1' 5)&RPPRQ
0*1'
)- &$7- (*1' *URXQG6WXG
( -)/7(03 *51
)- 5(' 3(1
*1'SRZHU
3DQHO
)SRZHU
><HOORZ@
( - - ,QWHUIDFH
-
7R6LWH ( - 021 *1'
L%XWWRQ
&DEOH
&XVWRPHU 75''
3,5'

6XSSOLHG 3RZHU - (
)LOWHU
2XWOHW
&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG
&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG
-- 0
*1' --
5(' 6WXG
5(' -- 0
- *51 *51 -
-
3*5 - (
( -
( - >5HG@ - ( -
- (
- - 0
&%
*3(
(*1' ;
(&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG
< - 0

(&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG
= - 0
- 0
- 0
0'3 (* 1'
- 0
(* 1'
- 0
(* 1'
3+36
-
*1' - &DELQHW
7% - 0
- (%RG\7[
- - - 0
&% ()2 - - 0
-
- 0
&RQWURO%R[
5(95
3)2
-
3)2
0 )2
- ()2 -
- ( - 6536
- ( - - 0
6HQVRU
L%XWWRQ - - ( - - 0
&DEOH
- ((6WRS - - 0
3(0
- ( - - 0
6\PERO/HJHQG - (%RG\75 - - 0
- (+HDG75 - - 0
%DOO9DOYH - ( -
&KHFN9DOYH -
7HUPLQDWRUDSSOLH GD W- R I3HQH WUDWLRQ 3D QHO
)LUVW&KDUDFWHURQHGLJLWDOSKD 5HIHUWR,Q VWDOO)L EHU2SWLF&DEOHVVH FWLRQIR UGH WDL OLQVWUXFWLR QVRQURXWLQJ

x ([[[[ 5XQVLQ(TXLSPHQW5RRPRU&RQWURO5RRP DQG FRQQH FWLQJIL EHURSWLFVLQFDE LQHWV
',5(&7,21

LQVWDOOHGVHQVRUFDEO HFRQQ HFWHGWR-RQWK H3 (0PRGX OH
x [[[[ )LEHU2SWLFV
x [[[[ 6LJQDO
7KH*2&KXEVZLWFK LVRQO\LQ FOXG HGRQROGHU*2&V)RUQHZHU*2&V
x [[[[ 2WKHU WKH(WK HUQHWS RUWRQ WKH+R VW3 &LVD YDLO DEOHIR UGL UHFWFR QQHFWLR QWR
VHUYLFH ODS WRS VL WHQHWZRUN$:R SWLR QRUFXVWRPHUVXSSOLHG VZLWFKLI
PXOWLSOHFR QQHFWL RQVDUH UH TXLUHG
&KDQQHO05Z7,QWHUFRQQHFW0DSZLWKH6536 ,5' ,&(±(TXLSPHQW &RQWURO5RRPV
2: &XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG
2:*2& 7R06058
(
6ZLWFK
+8% 5- 63:
3RUW$ (W KHUQHW 3RUW 3RUW (WKHUQHW 3RUW 6HUYLFH/DSWRS 5)'RRU ><HOORZ*UHHQ@
(
02'(0 ( 56
2SWLRQ 3RUW
+267
3& ( - 0
.(<%2$5' ( ( - 0
86%56
( )- (
&RQYHUWHU &5<
(
0286( >2UDQJH*UHHQ@ )
0QWU '9,' )
- - ( -5 -&
86% )
- ,5' - 6HQVRU&DEOH L%XWWRQ (
+267 ( 0QWU 3RZHU )
',63/$< -
*DV5HWXUQ -:DYHJXLGH

3RUW%
*2&$$ ( )- (
/LQH,Q
:DWHU6XSSO\
- -
( )- (
6&,0 ( - ( -
- 0
*1' ( ; ; 0

6WXG 2:3'0 *UDGLHQW
( < < 0
6SDUH - - 6SDUH )LOWHU
(RU( = = 0
6SDUH - - 6SDUH
( - - *2&$$3RZHU
)URP3*5
0

8WLOLWLHV - -
&5<3ZU - 0
*5(< *5<+2 6(
,13ZU - 0
<(/+26( - 0
<(//2:
3RZHU%R[
%/8( %/8+26( -:DYHJXLGH
)DFLOLW\
6XSSO\
)DFLOLW\ $LU
5HWXUQ
6LJQDO%R[ *1'
*1' 6WXG
6WXG
56 - (*1' 5)&RPPRQ
0*1'
)- &$7- (*1' *URXQG6WXG
( -)/7(03 *51
)- 5(' 3(1
><HOORZ@ 3DQHO
( - - ,QWHUIDFH
-
7R6LWH ( - 021 *1'
)SRZHU
*1'SRZHU
L%XWWRQ
&DEOH
&XVWRPHU 75''
6XSSOLHG 3RZHU - ( &)%
)LOWHU
2XWOHW --
-- 0
3,5'
*1' --
5(' 5('
6WXG
-- 0
- *51 *51 -
-
3*5 - (
&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG ( 0
&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG
- - -
( - >5HG@ - ( - - 0
86% - ( - 0
(
+XE - 0
; - 0
(*1'
&%
< - 0

*3(
= - 0
3+36
0'3 (*1'
(*1' ([FLWHU
(* 1' - - 0
- - 0
*1' - &DELQHW 0
-
(&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG
6WXG
(&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG
- (+HDG7[ ,QWHUIDFH -

7% - (%RG\7[
,&( - - 6SOLWWHU
&% - - ()2 - -
- ( - - - 0
(&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG
--
&% &%
3DWLHQW$OHUW
7R2:3'0-
&RQWURO%R[
-- 3)2
-
3)2
- 0)2
5(95
- ()2 - )2:DYHJXLGH

- ( -
- ( - H6536
6HQVRU - ( - -
L%XWWRQ &DEOH -
- ((6WRS - - 0
3(0 - ( -
6\PERO/HJHQG - (%RG\75 -
- (+HDG75 -
%DOO9DOYH - ( -
&KHFN9DOYH
5HIHUWR,Q VWDOO)L EHU2SWLF&DEOHVVH FWLRQIR UGH WDL OLQVWUXFWLR QVRQ
)LUVW&KDUDFWHURQHGLJLWDOSKD
URXWLQJ DQ GFRQQ HFWLQJILEHURSWLFVLQFDE LQHWV

x [[[[ )LEHU2SWLFV
x [[[[ 6LJQDO 7KH*2&KXEVZLWFK LVRQO\LQ FOXG HGRQROGHU*2&V)RUQHZHU*2&V

',5(&7,21

RU&KDQQHO05Z7,QWHUFRQQHFW0DSZLWKH6536 ,5'±(TXLSPHQW &RQWURO5RRPV
2: &XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG
2:*2& 7R06058
(
6ZLWFK
+8% 5- 63:
(
02'(0 ( 56
2SWLRQ
3RUW
+267
3& ( - 0
86%56 ( - 0
&RQYHUWHU ( )- (
.(<%2$5' ( &5<
( >2UDQJH*UHHQ@ )
- - )
0QWU '9,' ( -5 -&
)
0286( 86% - ,5' - 6HQVRU&DEOH L%XWWRQ ( 3RZHU )
-
+267 ( 0QWU
3RUW%
*2&$$ ( )- (
:DWHU6XSSO\
/LQH,Q - -
( )- (
6&,0 ( - - ( - 0
*1' ( ; ; 0
6WXG 2:3'0 *UDGLHQW
( < )LOWHU < 0
6SDUH - - 6SDUH
(RU( = = 0
6SDUH - - 6SDUH
( - - *2&$$3RZHU
)URP3*5
0
8WLOLWLHV - -
&5<3ZU - 0
*5(< *5<+26(
,13ZU - 0
<(//2: <(/+26( - 0
3RZHU%R[
%/8( %/8+26( -:DYHJXLGH
)DFLOLW\
6XSSO\
)DFLOLW\ $LU
5HWXUQ
6LJQDO%R[ *1'
*1' 6WXG
6WXG
56 - (* 1' 5)&RPPRQ
0*1'
)- &$7- (*1' *URXQG6WXG
( -)/7(03 *51
)- 5(' 3(1
*1'SRZHU
3DQHO
)SRZHU
><HOORZ@
( - - ,QWHUIDFH
-
7R6LWH ( - 021 *1'
L%XWWRQ
&DEOH
&XVWRPHU 75''
3,5'

6XSSOLHG 3RZHU - (
)LOWHU
2XWOHW
&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG
&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG
-- 0
*1' --
5(' 6WXG
5(' -- 0
- *51 *51 -
-
3*5 - (
( -
( - >5HG@ - ( -
- (
- - 0
&%
*3(
(*1' ;
(&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG
< - 0

(&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG
= - 0
- 0
- 0
0'3 (*1'
- 0
(*1'
- 0
(*1'
3+36
-
*1' - &DELQHW
7% - 0
- (%RG\7[
- ()2&+ - - 0
&%
()2 - - 0
-
- 0
&RQWURO%R[
- 3)2&K2QO\
5(95

- 3)2
3)2
0)2
- ()2 -
- ( -
- H6536
6HQVRU ( -
L%XWWRQ - - -
&DEOH ( -
3(0 - ((6WRS - - 0
- ( -
6\PERO/HJHQG - (%RG\75 -
- (+HDG75 -
%DOO9DOYH - ( -
&KHFN9DOYH
5HIHUWR,Q VWDOO)L EHU2SWLF&DEOHVVH FWLRQIR UGH WDL OLQVWUXFWLR QVRQURXWLQJ
x ([[[[ 5XQVLQ(TXLSPHQW5RRPRU&RQWURO5RRP DQG FRQQH FWLQJIL EHURSWLFVLQFDE LQHWV
',5(&7,21

x 2QV\VWHPVZLWK;* R QO\FRQ QHFWWKHL %XWWRQ WRWKHSUH YLRX VO\
x [[[[ &RD[5)
x [[[[ )LEHU2SWLFV
x [[[[ 6LJQDO
RU&KDQQHO05Z7,QWHUFRQQHFW0DSZLWK6536 ,5'±(TXLSPHQW &RQWURO5RRPV
2: &XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG
2:*2& 7R06058
(
6ZLWFK
+8% 5- 63:
(
02'(0 ( 56 3RUW (WKHUQHW $:RSWLRQ 0
--
2SWLRQ 3RUW
+267
3& ( - 0
( )- ( ( - 0
86%56
&RQYHUWHU &5<
.(<%2$5' ( ( >2UDQJH*UHHQ@ )
0QWU '9,' )
- - ( -5 -&
86% )
0286( - ,5' - 6HQVRU&DEOH L%XWWRQ ( 3RZHU )
- -:DYHJXLGH
+267 ( 0QWU
*DV6XSSO\
3RUW%
*2&$$ ( )- (
/LQH, Q
:DWHU6XSSO\
- -
( )- (
6&,0 ( - ( - 0
-
*1' ( ; ; 0

6WXG 2:3'0 *UDGLHQW
( < )LOWHU < 0
6SDUH - - 6SDUH
(RU( = = 0
6SDUH - - 6SDUH
( - - *2&$$3RZHU
)URP3*5
0

8WLOLWLHV - -
&5<3ZU - 0
*5(< *5<+2 6(
,13ZU - 0
<(/+26( - 0
<(//2:
3RZHU%R[
%/8( %/8+26( -:DYHJXLGH
)DFLOLW\
6XSSO\
)DFLOLW\ $LU
5HWXUQ
6LJQDO%R[ *1'
*1' 6WXG
6WXG
56 - (*1' 5)&RPPRQ
0*1'
)- &$7- (*1' *URXQG6WXG
( -)/7(03 *51
)- 5(' 3(1
><HOORZ@ 3DQHO
( - - ,QWHUIDFH
-
7R6LWH ( - 021 *1'
)SRZHU
*1'SRZHU
L%XWWRQ
&DEOH
&XVWRPHU 75''
6XSSOLHG 3RZHU - (
)LOWHU
2XWOHW
-- 0
3,5'
*1' --
5(' 5('
6WXG
-- 0
- *51 *51 -
-
3*5 - (
(
&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG
&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG
-
( - >5HG@ - ( -
- (
- - 0

(*1' ;
- 0
&%
<
*3(
- 0
=
- 0
- 0
0'3 (*1'
- 0
(*1'
- 0
(* 1'
3+36
-
(&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG
*1' - &DELQHW

(&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG

- 0
7% - (%RG\7[
- 0
- ()2&+ -
- 0
&% - ()2 -
- 0
&RQWURO%R[
- 3)2&K2QO\

- 3)2
3)2
0)2
5(95
- ()2 -
- ( - 6536
6HQVRU
- ( - - 0
L%XWWRQ &DEOH - - ( - - 0
3(0 - ((6WRS - - 0
- ( - - 0
6\PERO/HJHQG - (%RG\75 - - 0

- (+HDG75 - - 0
%DOO9DOYH - ( -
-
&KHFN9DOYH
,QWHUFRQQHFWV1XPEHULQJ/HJHQG 7HUPLQDWRUDSSOLH GD W- R I3HQH WUDWLRQ 3D QHO
)LUVW&KDUDFWHURQHGLJLWDOSKD 5HIHUWR,Q VWDOO)L EHU2SWLF&DEOHVVH FWLRQIR UGH WDL OLQVWUXFWLR QVRQ
x ([[[[ 5XQVLQ(TXLSPHQW5RRPRU&RQWURO5RRP URXWLQJ DQ GFRQQ HFWLQJILEHURSWLFVLQFDE LQHWV

x [[[[ )LEHU2SWLFV
x [[[[ 6LJQDO 7KH*2&KXEVZLWFK LVRQO\LQ FOXG HGRQROGHU*2&V)RUQHZHU*2&V

',5(&7,21

RU&KDQQHO05Z7,QWHUFRQQHFW0DSZLWKH6536 ,5' ,&(±(TXLSPHQW &RQWURO5RRPV
2: &XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG
2:*2& 7R06058
(
6ZLWFK
+8% 5-
63:
(
02'(0 ( 56 3RUW (WKHUQHW $:RSWLRQ -- 0
2SWLRQ 3RUW
+267
3& ( - 0
.(<%2$5' ( ( - 0
86%56
&RQYHUWHU ( )- (
&5<
0286( ( >2UDQJH*UHHQ@ )
- - )
0QWU '9,' ( -5 -&
)
+267 ( 0QWU 86% - ,5' - 6HQVRU&DEOH L%XWWRQ ( 3RZHU )
',63/$<
-
3RUW% *DV6XSSO\ -:DYHJXLGH
*2&$$ ( )- (
:DWHU6XSSO\
/LQH,Q - -
( )- (
6&,0 ( - - ( - 0
*1' ( ; ; 0
6WXG 2:3'0 *UDGLHQW
( < )LOWHU < 0
6SDUH - - 6SDUH
(RU( = = 0
6SDUH - - 6SDUH
( - - *2&$$3RZHU
)URP3*5
0
8WLOLWLHV - -
&5<3ZU - 0
*5(< *5<+26(
,13ZU - 0
<(//2: <(/+26( - 0
3RZHU%R[
%/8( %/8+26( -:DYHJXLGH
)DFLOLW\
6XSSO\
)DFLOLW\ $LU
5HWXUQ
6LJQDO%R[ *1'
*1' 6WXG
6WXG
56 - (* 1' 5)&RPPRQ
0*1'
)- &$7- (*1' *URXQG6WXG
( -)/7(03 *51
)- 5(' 3(1
*1'SRZHU
3DQHO
)SRZHU
><HOORZ@
( - - ,QWHUIDFH
-
7R6LWH ( - 021 *1'
L%XWWRQ
&DEOH
&XVWRPHU 75''
3RZHU - &)%
3,5'
6XSSOLHG (
)LOWHU
2XWOHW --
&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG
&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG
-- 0
*1' --
5(' 6WXG
5(' -- 0
- *51 *51 -
-
3*5 - (
( -
>5HG@ - ( - - - 0
( 86%
+XE - ( - 0
( - - 0
&%
*3(
(*1' ; - 0

(&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG
< - 0

(&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG
= - 0
- 0
0'3 (*1' 3+36
(*1'
(*1' ([FLWHU
- - - 0
*1' - &DELQHW
6WXG - 0
- (+HDG7[ ,QWHUIDFH - 0
7% - (%RG\7[ -
- ()2&+ -
&% - ()2 - 6SOLWWHU
- - -
&% (&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG &% ,&( - (
- 0
-
3DWLHQW$OHUW -
5(95
--
7R2:3'0-
&RQWURO%R[
-
-- - 3)2
3)2
0)2
- ()2 -
- )2:DYHJXLGH
( -
6HQVRU -
L%XWWRQ &DEOH - ( -
- ( -
3(0
- ((6WRS -
- ( - H6536
- (%RG\75 - -
- (+HDG75 - - 0
- ( -
)LUVW&KDUDFWHURQHGLJLWDOSKD %DOO9DOYH
',5(&7,21
6XEVHTXHQW&KDUDFWHUV
5HIHUWR,Q VWDOO)L EHU2SWLF&DEOHVVH FWLRQIR UGH WDL OLQVWUXFWLR QVRQURXWLQJ
x [[[[ $&3RZHU *URXQG
DQG FRQQH FWLQJIL EHURSWLFVLQFDE LQHWV
x [[[[ &RD[5)
x [[[[ )LEHU2SWLFV
x [[[[ 6LJQDO WKH(WK HUQHWS RUWRQ WKH+R VW3 &LVD YDLO DEOHIR UGL UHFWFR QQHFWLR QWR
x [[[[ 2WKHU VHUYLFH ODS WRS VL WHQHWZRUN$:R SWLR QRUFXVWRPHUVXSSOLHG VZLWFKLI
&KDQQHO05Z7,QWHUFRQQHFW0DSZLWKH6536 /(''LVSOD\±0DJQHW5RRP
)DFLOLW\3RZHU)LOWHUV 06 0DJQHW
&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG 06$$
(58058 06
058 (QFORVXUH
%XOE
33*
(&*
5HVS
0 7HUPLQDO%R[
3
6THH]H
&KLPQH\ 0DJQHW 3*DWLQJ
63: (2II >%OXH@ 0*7%
06$$
><HOORZ*UHHQ@ 3UHVVXUH 5HHG6ZLWFK
( -- 0 7UDQVGXFHU
( 3UH$PS -3$&2QO\
- 0 -
( - 0 )- - -
0& -
) - 0$*3$&
) 0*1' 0$**URXQG6WXG
)
) 3RZHU &ROGKHDG 0$*%25(
-:DYHJXLGH 06$ 6OHYH
6XSSO\
&ROGKHDG ;50%
-:DYHJXLGH 5HWXUQ
0 *UDG7HPS
*UDG%XVV%DU
( ; *UDGLHQW ; 0 ; ;
( < )LOWHU < 0 < <
( = = 0RU0 = =
3DWLHQW$OHUW7XEH
%/8 -:DYHJXLGH %/8 0$**UDG&RLO
%/. - :DYHJXLGH %/. 0$**UDG&RLO
$,5+26( -:DYHJXLGH $,5 *UDGLHQW&RLO$LU
$,5+26(
$,5 *UDGLHQW&RLO$LU
$,5+26( -:DYHJXLGH
( - 0 - - 0 -

0 - 0$*+<% - 0 -
0
-
12- 0
- - ,1 0$*$03 287
1& - 0
( - 0

5)&RLO
- 0 -5HDU
0 - 0
- -)URQW
0$* -
''63/,7 - 57&17/
( -
- /)7&17/ $LU7HPS
6HQVRU
5)&RPPRQ*URXQG6WXG
- /(' - 0
0
3(1 0 - - 0 %RUH7HPS6HQVRU
><HOORZ@ 0 -
0$* - 0 %RUH/LJKW)URQW
75'')LOWHU 0DJ,2 %RUH/LJKW5HDU
>%OXH@ 0$*65,
--
- 0 %RUH3$/
-- 0 - 0 -
-- - $LUIORZ6HQVRU
- 0 )URQW0LFURSKRQH
--
0 - - 0
--
0 - - 0 0 6SHDNHU
0$ $,5 3DWLHQW$LU
--
0% -- - 0
- 0 -
- 02 SWLRQ -
- 0 - -
0 - 0 -
- -
- 0 - 0 -
- - 0$* 'RFN

'&.B/ >%OXH
*UHHQ@
-
)2:DYHJXLGH
-
-
3)2 -
)2,
)2,) 0 - 5; - 0
0)2 -- - 0
-
0 -
0$*7'0
- -
- 0 - 0
5(95
-
-
-
- 0
- 0
$,5+26(
%ORZHU
$,5+26(
))))
))) 3('+8%
6ORW- -
6ORW- -
6ORW- -
6ORW- -
0 6ORW-
3('
0' 6ORW- $QWHQQD
- 0 6ORW-
- 0 6ORW-
- 0 6ORW- 3('075
0 6ORW- -
0 6ORW- -
0 6ORW- 0
- 0 6ORW-
3('7,) -
- 0
',5(&7,21
- 0
-
0 6ORW%
5HDU3HGHVWDO$LU /3&$
,QWHUFRQQHFWV1XPEHULQJ/HJHQG 5HDU0LFURSKRQH
)LUVW&KDUDFWHURQHGLJLWDOSKD 0 -WR33RUW 3('

x ([[[[ 5XQVLQ(TXLSPHQW5RRPRU&RQWURO5RRP 0
5HDU3HGHVWDO
-WR$3RUW ,2
x 0[[[[ 5XQVHQWLUHO\LQWKH0DJQHW5RRP >%OXH5HG@
x [[[[ &RD[5)
x [[[[ )LEHU2SWLFV
x [[[[ 6LJQDO 6\PERO/HJHQG
x [[[[ 2WKHU ( -
--Dotted lines for module outlines or cables indicate an option - %DOO9DOYH &KHFN9DOYH
&KDQQHO05Z7,QWHUFRQQHFW0DSZLWK6536 /(''LVSOD\±0DJQHW5RRP
3*DWLQJ
06 0DJQHW
6THH]H
5HVS
(&*
33*
&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG 06
%XOE
058 (QFORVXUH 06$$

(58058
0 7HUPLQDO%R[
3 0DJQHW
&KLPQH\
63: (2II >%OXH@ 0*7%
06$$
( -- 0 7UDQVGXFHU
3UH$PS -3$&2QO\
( - 0 -
( - 0 )- - - -
0&
) - 0$*3$&
)
6XSSO\
&ROGKHDG ;50%
-:DYHJXLGH 5HWXUQ
0 *UDG7HPS
*UDG%XVV%DU
( ; *UDGLHQW ; 0 ; ;
( < )LOWHU < 0 < <
( = = 0RU0 = =
3DWLHQW$OHUW7XEH
%/. -:DYHJXLGH %/. 0$**UDG&RLO
$,5+26(
$,5 *UDGLHQW&RLO$LU
$,5+26( -:DYHJXLGH
( - 0 - - 0 -
0 - 0$*+<% - 0 -
0
-
12- 0
- - ,1 0$*$03 287
1& - 0
( - 0
5)&RLO
- 0 -5HDU
0 - - 0 -)URQW
0$* -
''63/,7 - 57&17/
( -
- /)7&17/ $LU7HPS
6HQVRU
5)&RPPRQ*URXQG6WXG
- /(' - 0
0
3(1 0 - - 0 %RUH7HPS6HQVRU
><HOORZ@ 0$* 0 - - 0 %RUH/LJKW)URQW
>%OXH@ 0$*65,
--
-- - - 0 %RUH3$/
0 0 -
-- - $LUIORZ6HQVRU
-- - 0 )URQW0LFURSKRQH
-- 0 - - 0
0 - - 0 0 6SHDNHU
0$ -- $,5 3DWLHQW$LU
- 0% -- - 0
- 0
- 0 - - 02SWLRQ -
- -
- 0 - - 0
- 0 - 0 -
- - 0$* 'RFN
'&.B/ >%OXH
*UHHQ@
-
)2:DYHJXLGH
-
-
3)2 -
)2,
)2,) 0 - 5; - 0
0)2 -- - 0
-
0 -
5(95
0$*7'0
- -
- 0 - - 0
- 0 -
- 0 -
- 0
- 0
$,5+26(
%ORZHU
$,5+26(
))))
))) 3('+8%
6ORW- -
6ORW- -
6ORW- -
6ORW- -
0 6ORW-
6ORW- 3('
0' $QWHQQD
',5(&7,21
- 0 6ORW-

- 0 6ORW-
- 0 6ORW- 3('075
0 6ORW- -
- 0 6ORW- -
- 0 6ORW- 0
- 0 6ORW- 3('7,) -
- 0 6ORW- - 0
6ORW- - 0
- -
0 6ORW%
5HDU3HGHVWDO
-WR$3RUW ,2
x [[[[ &RD[5)
x [[[[ )LEHU2SWLFV 6KXQWLVLQVWDOOHGIRU &KDQQHOV\VWHPV
x [[[[ 2WKHU ( -
7HUPLQDWRUDSSOLHGDW-RI3HQHWUDWLRQ3DQHO
&KDQQHO05Z7,QWHUFRQQHFW0DSZLWKH6536 ,5'±0DJQHW5RRP
(58058 06
058 (QFORVXUH
%XOE
33*
(&*
5HVS
0 7HUPLQDO%R[

6THH]H
3 0DJQHW
3*DWLQJ
&KLPQH\
63: (2II >%OXH@ 0*7%
06$$
( -- 0 7UDQVGXFHU
( - 3UH$PS -3$&2QO\
( - 0 )- - - 0 -
) 0& - 0$*3$&
) 0*1' 0$**URXQG6WXG -
)
6XSSO\
&ROGKHDG ;50%
-:DYHJXLGH 5HWXUQ
0 *UDG7HPS
*UDG%XVV%DU
( ; *UDGLHQW ; 0 ; ;
( < )LOWHU < 0 < <
( = = 0RU0 = =
3DWLHQW$OHUW7XEH
%/8 - :DYHJXLGH %/8 0$**UDG&RLO
$,5+26(
$,5 *UDGLHQW&RLO$LU
$,5+26( -:DYHJXLGH
( - 0 - - 0 -

0 - 0$*+<% - 0 -
0
-
12- 0
- - ,1 0$*$03 287
1& - 0
( - 0
5)&RLO
- 0 -5HDU
( 0 - 0
- - -)URQW
0$* -
''63/,7 $LU7HPS
5)&RPPRQ*URXQG6WXG 6HQVRU
0
3(1 - - 0 %RUH7HPS6HQVRU
><HOORZ@ 0$* - 0 %RUH/LJKW)URQW
>%OXH@ 0$*65,
--
- 0 %RUH3$/
-- 0 - 0 -
-- - $LUIORZ6HQVRU
- 0 )URQW0LFURSKRQH
--
-- 0 - - 0
0 - - 0 0 6SHDNHU
0$ - 0 $,5 3DWLHQW$LU
--
0% -- - 0
- 0 -
- 0 2 SWLRQ -
- 0 - -
0 - 0 -
- -
- 0 - 0 -
- 0 - 0 - 0$* 'RFN

,5' '&.B/ >%OXH
)2
*UHHQ@
0$* /'3
3)2,5' - 7UDFNEDOO -
0$* 5'3
3)2 7UDFNEDOO -
)2:DYHJXLGH
-
-
3)2 -
)2,
)2,) 0 - 5; - 0
0)2 -- - 0
-
0 -
0$*7'0
- -
- 0 - - 0
-
5(95
-
- 0
- 0
$,5+26(
%ORZHU
$,5+26(
))))
))) 3('+8%
6ORW- -
6ORW- -
6ORW- -
6ORW- -
0 6ORW-
3('
0' 6ORW- $QWHQQD
- 0 6ORW-
- 0 6ORW-
- 0 6ORW- 3('075
0 6ORW- -
0 6ORW- -
0 6ORW- 0
- 0 6ORW- 3('7,) -
- 0
0
',5(&7,21
-
-
0 6ORW%
5HDU3HGHVWDO
-WR$3RUW ,2
x [[[[ &RD[5)
x [[[[ )LEHU2SWLFV
x [[[[ 2WKHU ( -
&KDQQHO05Z7,QWHUFRQQHFW0DSZLWK6536 ,5'±0DJQHW5RRP
3*DWLQJ
06 0DJQHW
6THH]H
5HVS
(&*
33*
&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG 06
%XOE
058 (QFORVXUH 06$$

(58058
0 7HUPLQDO%R[
3 0DJQHW
&KLPQH\
63: (2II >%OXH@ 0*7%
06$$
( -- 0 7UDQVGXFHU
( - 3UH$PS -3$&2QO\
( - 0 )- - - 0 -
) 0& - 0$*3$&
) 0*1' 0$**URXQG6WXG -
)
6XSSO\
&ROGKHDG ;50%
-:DYHJXLGH 5HWXUQ
0 *UDG7HPS
*UDG%XVV%DU
( ; *UDGLHQW ; 0 ; ;
( < )LOWHU < 0 < <
( = = 0RU0 = =
3DWLHQW$OHUW7XEH
$,5+26( - :DYHJXLGH $,5 *UDGLHQW&RLO$LU
$,5+26(
$,5 *UDGLHQW&RLO$LU
$,5+26( - :DYHJXLGH
( - 0 - - 0 -
0 - 0$*+<% - 0 -
0
-
12- 0
- - ,1 0$*$03 287
1& - 0
( - 0
5)&RLO
- 0 -5HDU
( - 0 - - 0 -)URQW
0$* -
''63/,7 $LU7HPS
0
>%OXH@ 0$*65,
--
-- - - 0 %RUH3$/
0 0 -
-- - $LUIORZ6HQVRU
-- 0 - - 0
0 - - 0 0 6SHDNHU
0$ -- - 0 $,5 3DWLHQW$LU
- 0% -- - 0
- 0
- 0 - - 0 2 SWLRQ -
- -
- 0 - - 0
- 0 - 0 -
- 0 - 0 - 0$* 'RFN
)2
,5' '&.B/ >%OXH
*UHHQ@
0$* /'3
0$* 5'3
3)2 -
)2:DYHJXLGH 7UDFNEDOO
-
-
3)2 -
)2,
)2,) 0 - 5; - 0
0)2 -- - 0
-
0 -
0$*7'0
5(95
- -
- 0 - - 0
- 0 -
- 0 -
- 0
- 0
$,5+26(
%ORZHU
$,5+26(
))))
))) 3('+8%
6ORW- -
6ORW- -
6ORW- -
6ORW- -
0 6ORW-
6ORW- 3('
0' $QWHQQD
- 0 6ORW-
',5(&7,21
- 0 6ORW-

- 0 6ORW- 3('075
0 6ORW- -
- 0 6ORW- -
- 0 6ORW- 0
- 0 6ORW- 3('7,) -
- 0 6ORW- - 0
6ORW- - 0
- -
0 6ORW%
5HDU3HGHVWDO
-WR$3RUW ,2
x [[[[ &RD[5)
x [[[[ 2WKHU ( -
7HUPLQDWRUDSSOLHGDW-RI3HQHWUDWLRQ3DQHO
&KDQQHO05Z7,QWHUFRQQHFW0DSZLWKH6536 ,5' ,&(±0DJQHW5RRP
(58058 06
058 (QFORVXUH
%XOE
33*
(&*
5HVS
0 7HUPLQDO%R[

6THH]H
3 0DJQHW
3*DWLQJ
&KLPQH\
63: (2II >%OXH@ 0*7%
06$$
( -- 0 7UDQVGXFHU
( - 3UH$PS -3$&2QO\
( - 0 )- - - 0 -
) 0& - 0$*3$&
) 0*1' 0$**URXQG6WXG -
)
6XSSO\
&ROGKHDG ;50%
-:DYHJXLGH 5HWXUQ
0 *UDG7HPS
*UDG%XVV%DU
( ; *UDGLHQW ; 0 ; ;
( < )LOWHU < 0 < <
( = = 0RU0 = =
3DWLHQW$OHUW7XEH
$,5+26(
$,5 *UDGLHQW&RLO$LU
$,5+26( -:DYHJXLGH
( - 0 - - 0 -

0 - 0$*+<% - 0 -
0
-
12- 0
- - ,1 0$*$03 287
1& - 0
( - 0
5)&RLO
- 0 -5HDU
( 0 - 0
- - -)URQW
0$* -
''63/,7 $LU7HPS
0
>%OXH@ 0$*65,
--
- 0 %RUH3$/
-- 0 - 0 -
-- - $LUIORZ6HQVRU
- 0 )URQW0LFURSKRQH
--
-- 0 - - 0
0 - - 0 0 6SHDNHU
0$ - 0 $,5 3DWLHQW$LU
--
0% -- - 0
- 0 -
- 0 2 SWLRQ -
- 0 - -
0 - 0 -
- -
- 0 - 0 -
- 0 - 0 - 0$* 'RFN

,5' '&.B/ >%OXH
)2
*UHHQ@
0$* /'3
0$* 5'3
3)2 7UDFNEDOO -
)2:DYHJXLGH
-
-
3)2 -
)2,
)2,) 0 - 5; - 0
0)2 - - 0
- QRWXVHG -
0 -
0$*7'0
- -
- 0 - - 0
-
5(95
-
- 0
- 0
$,5+26(
%ORZHU
$,5+26(
))))
))) 3('+8%
6ORW- -
6ORW- -
6ORW- -
6ORW- -
0 6ORW-
3('
0' 6ORW- $QWHQQD
- 0 6ORW-
- 0 6ORW-
- 0 6ORW- 3('075
0 6ORW- -
0 6ORW- -
0 6ORW- 0
- 0 6ORW- 3('7,) -
- 0
0
',5(&7,21
-
-
0 6ORW%
5HDU3HGHVWDO
-WR$3RUW ,2
x [[[[ &RD[5)
x [[[[ )LEHU2SWLFV
x [[[[ 2WKHU ( -
&KDQQHO05Z7,QWHUFRQQHFW0DSZLWKH6536 ,5'±0DJQHW5RRP
3*DWLQJ
06 0DJQHW
6THH]H
5HVS
(&*
33*
&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG 06
%XOE
058 (QFORVXUH 06$$

(58058
0 7HUPLQDO%R[
3 0DJQHW
&KLPQH\
63: (2II >%OXH@ 0*7%
06$$
( -- 0 7UDQVGXFHU
( - 3UH$PS -3$&2QO\
( - 0 )- - - 0 -
) 0& - 0$*3$&
) 0*1' 0$**URXQG6WXG -
)
6XSSO\
&ROGKHDG ;50%
-:DYHJXLGH 5HWXUQ
0 *UDG7HPS
*UDG%XVV%DU
( ; *UDGLHQW ; 0 ; ;
( < )LOWHU < 0 < <
( = = 0RU0 = =
3DWLHQW$OHUW7XEH
$,5+26(
$,5
*UDGLHQW&RLO$LU
$,5+26( - :DYHJXLGH
( - 0 - - 0 -
0 - 0$*+<% - 0 -
0
-
12- 0
- - ,1 0$*$03 287
1& - 0
( - 0
5)&RLO
- 0 -5HDU
0 -
- 0 -)URQW
( - 0$* -
''63/,7
$LU7HPS
0
>%OXH@ 0$*65,
--
-- - 0 %RUH3$/
0 - 0 -
-- - $LUIORZ6HQVRU
-- 0 - - 0
0 - - 0 0 6SHDNHU
0$ -- - 0 $,5 3DWLHQW$LU
- 0% -- - 0
- 0
- 0 - - 0 2 SWLRQ -
- -
- 0 - - 0
- 0 - 0 -
- 0 - 0 - 0$* 'RFN
)2
,5' '&.B/ >%OXH
*UHHQ@
0$* /'3
0$* 5'3
3)2 -
-
3)2&K2QO\ - -- 5; -
&+
3)2 - -
2SWLRQ -
)2,
)2,) 0 - 5; - 0
0)2 -- - 0
-
0 -
0$*7'0
5(95
- - 0
- 0 - - 0
-
-
- 0
- 0
$,5+26(
%ORZHU $,5+26(
))))
))) 3('+8%
6ORW- -
6ORW- -
6ORW- - 0
6ORW- - 0
0 6ORW-
6ORW- 3('
0' $QWHQQD
- 0 6ORW-
',5(&7,21
- 0 6ORW-

- 0 6ORW- 3('075
0 6ORW- -
0 6ORW- -
0 6ORW- 0
- 0 6ORW- 3('7,) -
- 0
- 0
-
0 6ORW%
5HDU3HGHVWDO
-WR$3RUW ,2
x [[[[ &RD[5)
x [[[[ )LEHU2SWLFV
x [[[[ 2WKHU ( -
&KDQQHO05Z7,QWHUFRQQHFW0DSZLWK6536 ,5'±0DJQHW5RRP
(58058 06
058 (QFORVXUH
%XOE
33*
(&*
5HVS
0 7HUPLQDO%R[

3
6THH]H
0DJQHW
3*DWLQJ
&KLPQH\
63: (2II >%OXH@ 0*7%
06$$
( -- 0 7UDQVGXFHU
( - 3UH$PS -3$&2QO\
- 0 )- - - 0 -
(
) 0& - 0$*3$&
) 0*1' 0$**URXQG6WXG -
)
6XSSO\
&ROGKHDG ;50%
-:DYHJXLGH 5HWXUQ
0 *UDG7HPS
*UDG%XVV%DU
( ; *UDGLHQW ; 0 ; ;
( < )LOWHU < 0 < <
( = = 0RU0 = =
3DWLHQW$OHUW7XEH
$,5+26(
$,5
*UDGLHQW&RLO$LU
$,5+26( -:DYHJXLGH
( - 0 - - 0 -

0 - 0$*+<% - 0 -
0
-
12- 0
- - ,1 0$*$03 287
1& - 0
( - 0
5)&RLO
- 0 -5HDU
0 -
- 0 -)URQW
( - 0$* -
''63/,7
$LU7HPS
0
>%OXH@ 0$*65,
--
- 0 %RUH3$/
-- 0 - 0 -
-- - $LUIORZ6HQVRU
- 0 )URQW0LFURSKRQH
--
0 - - 0
--
0 - - 0 0 6SHDNHU
0$ - 0 $,5 3DWLHQW$LU
--
0% -- - 0
- 0 -
- 0 2 SWLRQ -
- 0 - -
0 - 0 -
- -
- 0 - 0 -
- 0 - 0 - 0$* 'RFN

,5' '&.B/ >%OXH
)2
*UHHQ@
0$* /'3
0$* 5'3
3)2 7UDFNEDOO -
)2:DYHJXLGH
-
3)2&K2QO\ - -- 5; -
&+
3)2 - -
2SWLRQ -
)2,
)2,) 0 - 5; - 0
0)2 -- - 0
-
0 -
0$*7'0
- - 0
- 0 - - 0
- 0 -
5(95
- 0 -

- 0
- 0
$,5+26(
%ORZHU $,5+26(
))))
))) 3('+8%
6ORW- -
6ORW- -
6ORW- - 0
6ORW- - 0
0 6ORW-
3('
0' 6ORW- $QWHQQD
- 0 6ORW-
- 0 6ORW-
- 0 6ORW- 3('075
0 6ORW- -
- 0 6ORW- -
- 0 6ORW- 0
- 0 6ORW- 3('7,) -
- 0 6ORW- - 0
0
',5(&7,21
6ORW- -
- -
0 6ORW%
5HDU3HGHVWDO
-WR$3RUW ,2
x [[[[ &RD[5)
6\PERO/HJHQG
x [[[[ 6LJQDO
x [[[[ 2WKHU - 7HUPLQDWRUDSSOLHGDW-RI3HQHWUDWLRQ3DQHO
(
&KDQQHO05Z7,QWHUFRQQHFW0DSZLWKH6536 ,5' ,&(±0DJQHW5RRP
3*DWLQJ
06 0DJQHW
6THH]H
5HVS
(&*
33*
&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG 06
%XOE
058 (QFORVXUH 06$$

(58058
0 7HUPLQDO%R[
3 0DJQHW
&KLPQH\
63: (2II >%OXH@ 0*7%
06$$
( -- 0 7UDQVGXFHU
( - 3UH$PS -3$&2QO\
( - 0 )- - - 0 -
) 0& - 0$*3$&
) 0*1' 0$**URXQG6WXG -
)
6XSSO\
&ROGKHDG ;50%
-:DYHJXLGH 5HWXUQ
0 *UDG7HPS
*UDG%XVV%DU
( ; *UDGLHQW ; 0 ; ;
( < )LOWHU < 0 < <
( = = 0RU0 = =
3DWLHQW$OHUW7XEH
$,5+26(
$,5
*UDGLHQW&RLO$LU
$,5+26( - :DYHJXLGH
( - 0 - - 0 -
0 - 0$*+<% - 0 -
0
-
12- 0
- - ,1 0$*$03 287
1& - 0
( - 0
5)&RLO
- 0 -5HDU
0 -
- 0 -)URQW
( - 0$* -
''63/,7
$LU7HPS
0
>%OXH@ 0$*65,
--
-- - 0 %RUH3$/
0 - 0 -
-- - $LUIORZ6HQVRU
-- 0 - - 0
0 - - 0 0 6SHDNHU
0$ -- - 0 $,5 3DWLHQW$LU
-QRWXVHG
- 0% -- - 0
- 0
- 0 - - 0 2 SWLRQ -
- -
- 0 - - 0
- 0 - 0 -
- 0 - 0 - 0$* 'RFN
)2
,5' '&.B/ >%OXH
*UHHQ@
0$* /'3
0$* 5'3
3)2 -
- -QRW 5;
XVHG -
&+
3)2 - - -
2SWLRQ -
)2,
)2,) 0 - 5; - 0
0)2 - - 0
- QRWXVHG-
0 -
0$*7'0
5(95
- - 0
- 0 - - 0
-
-
- 0
- 0
$,5+26(
%ORZHU $,5+26(
))))
))) 3('+8%
6ORW- -
6ORW- -
6ORW- - 0
6ORW- - 0
0 6ORW-
6ORW- 3('
0' $QWHQQD
- 0 6ORW-
',5(&7,21
- 0 6ORW-

- 0 6ORW- 3('075
0 6ORW- -
0 6ORW- -
0 6ORW- 0
- 0 6ORW- 3('7,) -
- 0
- 0
-
0 6ORW%
5HDU3HGHVWDO
-WR$3RUW ,2
x [[[[ &RD[5)
x [[[[ )LEHU2SWLFV
x [[[[ 2WKHU ( -
&KDQQHO05Z7,QWHUFRQQHFW0DSZLWKH6536,5' 3SRUWV±0DJQHW5RRP
&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG (QFORVXUH 06$$
(58058 06
058
%XOE
33*
(&*
5HVS
0 7HUPLQDO%R[

3
6THH]H
0DJQHW
3*DWLQJ
&KLPQH\
63: (2II >%OXH@ 0*7%
06$$
( -- 0 7UDQVGXFHU
( - 3UH$PS -3$&2QO\
- 0 )- - - 0 -
(
) 0& - 0$*3$&
) 0*1' 0$**URXQG6WXG -
)
6XSSO\
&ROGKHDG ;50%
-:DYHJXLGH 5HWXUQ
0 *UDG7HPS
*UDG%XVV%DU
( ; *UDGLHQW ; 0 ; ;
( < )LOWHU < 0 < <
( = = 0RU0 = =
3DWLHQW$OHUW7XEH
$,5+2 6( -:DYHJXLGH $,5 *UDGLHQW&RLO$LU
$,5+26(
$,5 *UDGLHQW&RLO$LU
$,5+26( -:DYHJXLGH
( - 0 - - 0 -

0 - 0$*+<% - 0 -
0
-
12- 0
- - ,1 0$*$03 287
1& - 0
( - 0
5)&RLO
- 0 -5HDU
0 -
- 0 -)URQW
0$* -
( -
''63/,7
$LU7HPS
6HQVRU
5)&RPPRQ*URXQG6WXG 0

>%OXH@ 0$*65,
--
- 0 %RUH3$/
-- 0 - 0 -
-- - $LUIORZ6HQVRU
- 0 )URQW0LFURSKRQH
--
0 - - 0
--
0 - - 0 0 6SHDNHU
0$ - 0 $,5 3DWLHQW$LU
--
0% -- - 0
- 0 -
- 0 -
- 0 - -
0 - 0 -
- -
- 0 - 0 -
0$*
'RFN
- 0 - 0 -
,5' '&.B/ >%OXH
)2 *UHHQ@
0$* /'3
0$* 5'3
3)2 7UDFNEDOO -
)2:DYHJXLGH
-
3)2&K2QO\ - -- 5; -
&+
3)2 - -
2SWLRQ -
)2,
)2,) 0 - 5; - 0
0)2 -- - 0
-
0 -
0$*7'0
- - 0
- 0 - - 0
-
-
5(95
- 0
- 0
$,5+26(
%ORZHU $,5+26( 0
0
))))
))) 3('+8%
6ORW- -
6ORW- -
6ORW- - 0
6ORW- - 0
0 6ORW-
3('
0' 6ORW- $QWHQQD
- 0 6ORW-
- 0 6ORW-
- 0 6ORW- 3('075
0 6ORW- -
0 6ORW- -
0 6ORW- 0
- 0 6ORW- 3('7,) -
- 0
0
',5(&7,21
-
6ORW% -
5HDU3HGHVWDO$LU
0 - 3$ 0
0 - 3% 0
,QWHUFRQQHFWV1XPEHULQJ/HJHQG 3$ 0
3(' 3% 0
)LUVW&KDUDFWHURQHGLJLWDOSKD 5%2; - 0
x 0[[[[ 5XQVHQWLUHO\LQWKH0DJQHW5RRP 0
/3&$
-WR33RUW 3(' 5HDU0LFURSKRQH
x 3[[[[ 5XQVWKURXJK3(1RU63:DQGURXWHGLQ0DJQHWDQG(TXLSPHQW5RRP 0 -WR$3RUW ,2
6XEVHTXHQW&KDUDFWHUV 5HDU3HGHVWDO
x [[[[ $&3RZHU *URXQG >%OXH5HG@
x [[[[ &RD[5)
x [[[[ )LEHU2SWLFV
x [[[[ 2WKHU ( -
&KDQQHO05Z7,QWHUFRQQHFW0DSZLWK6536,5' 3SRUWV±0DJQHW5RRP
)DFLOLW\3RZHU)LOWHUV 0DJQHW
3*DWLQJ
06
6THH]H
5HVS
(&*
33*
&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG 06
%XOE
058 (QFORVXUH 06$$

(58058
0 7HUPLQDO%R[
3 0DJQHW
&KLPQH\
63: (2II >%OXH@ 0*7%
06$$
( -- 0 7UDQVGXFHU
( - 3UH$PS -3$&2QO\
( - 0 )- - - 0 -
) 0& - 0$*3$&
) 0*1' 0$**URXQG6WXG -
)
6XSSO\
&ROGKHDG ;50%
-:DYHJXLGH 5HWXUQ
0 *UDG7HPS
*UDG%XVV%DU
( ; *UDGLHQW ; 0 ; ;
( < )LOWHU < 0 < <
( = = 0RU0 = =
3DWLHQW$OHUW7XEH
$,5+26( $,5
*UDGLHQW&RLO$LU
$,5+26( -:DYHJXLGH
( - 0 - - 0 -
0 - 0$*+<% - 0 -
0
-
12- 0
- - ,1 0$*$03 287
1& - 0
( - 0
5)&RLO
- 0 -5HDU
0 -
- 0 -)URQW
0$* -
( -
''63/,7
$LU7HPS
6HQVRU
>%OXH@ 0$*65,
--
-- - 0 %RUH3$/
0 - 0 -
-- - $LUIORZ6HQVRU
-- 0 - - 0
0 - - 0 0 6SHDNHU
0$ -- - 0 $,5 3DWLHQW$LU
- 0% -- - 0
- 0
- 0 - - 0 -
- -
- 0 - - 0
- 0 - 0 -
0$*
'RFN
- 0 - 0 - >%OXH
,5' '&.B/
)2 *UHHQ@
0$* /'3
0$* 5'3
3)2 -
-
3)2&K2QO\ - -- 5; -
&+
3)2 - -
2SWLRQ -
)2,
)2,) 0 - 5; - 0
0)2 -- - 0
-
0 -
0$*7'0
- - 0
5(95
- 0 - - 0

- 0 -
- 0 -
- 0
- 0
$,5+26(
%ORZHU $,5+26( 0
0
))))
))) 3('+8%
6ORW- -
6ORW- -
6ORW- - 0
6ORW- - 0
0 6ORW-
6ORW- 3('
0' $QWHQQD
- 0 6ORW-
',5(&7,21
- 0 6ORW-

- 0 6ORW- 3('075
0 6ORW- -
- 0 6ORW- -
- 0 6ORW- 0
- 0 6ORW- 3('7,) -
- 0 6ORW- - 0
6ORW- - 0
- -
5HDU3HGHVWDO$LU
0 - 3$ 0
0 - 3% 0
3(' 3% 0
x 0[[[[ 5XQVHQWLUHO\LQWKH0DJQHW5RRP /3&$
0 -WR33RUW 3(' 5HDU0LFURSKRQH
x [[[[ &RD[5)
x [[[[ 2WKHU ( - 7HUPLQDWRUDSSOLHGDW-RI3HQHWUDWLRQ3DQHO
&KDQQHO05Z7,QWHUFRQQHFW0DSZLWKH6536,5' 3SRUWV ,&(±0DJQHW5RRP
&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG (QFORVXUH 06$$
(58058 06
058
%XOE
33*
(&*
5HVS
0 7HUPLQDO%R[

3
6THH]H
0DJQHW
3*DWLQJ
&KLPQH\
63: (2II >%OXH@ 0*7%
06$$
( -- 0 7UDQVGXFHU
( - 3UH$PS -3$&2QO\
- 0 )- - - 0 -
(
) 0& - 0$*3$&
) 0*1' 0$**URXQG6WXG -
)
6XSSO\
&ROGKHDG ;50%
-:DYHJXLGH 5HWXUQ
0 *UDG7HPS
*UDG%XVV%DU
( ; *UDGLHQW ; 0 ; ;
( < )LOWHU < 0 < <
( = = 0RU0 = =
3DWLHQW$OHUW7XEH
$,5+26(
$,5 *UDGLHQW&RLO$LU
$,5+26( -:DYHJXLGH
( - 0 - - 0 -

0 - 0$*+<% - 0 -
0
-
12- 0
- - ,1 0$*$03 287
1& - 0
( - 0
5)&RLO
- 0 -5HDU
0 -
- 0 -)URQW
0$* -
( -
''63/,7
$LU7HPS
6HQVRU

>%OXH@ 0$*65,
--
- 0 %RUH3$/
-- 0 - 0 -
-- - $LUIORZ6HQVRU
- 0 )URQW0LFURSKRQH
--
0 - - 0
--
0 - - 0 0 6SHDNHU
0$ - 0 $,5 3DWLHQW$LU
-QRWXVHG --
0% -- - 0
- 0 -
- 0 -
- 0 - -
0 - 0 -
- -
- 0 - 0 -
0$*
'RFN
- 0 - 0 -
,5' '&.B/ >%OXH
)2 *UHHQ@
0$* /'3
0$* 5'3
3)2 7UDFNEDOO -
)2:DYHJXLGH
- -QRW 5;
- XVHG -
&+
3)2 - - -
2SWLRQ -
)2,
)2,) 0 - 5; - 0
0)2 - - 0
-
0 - QRWXVHG-
0$*7'0
- - 0
- 0 - - 0
-
-
5(95
- 0
- 0
$,5+26(
%ORZHU $,5+26( 0
0
))))
))) 3('+8%
6ORW- -
6ORW- -
6ORW- - 0
6ORW- - 0
0 6ORW-
3('
0' 6ORW- $QWHQQD
- 0 6ORW-
- 0 6ORW-
- 0 6ORW- 3('075
0 6ORW- -
0 6ORW- -
0 6ORW- 0
- 0 6ORW- 3('7,) -
- 0
0
',5(&7,21
-
-
5HDU3HGHVWDO$LU
0 - 3$ 0
0 - 3% 0
3(' 3% 0
/3&$
-WR33RUW 3(' 5HDU0LFURSKRQH
x [[[[ &RD[5)
x [[[[ )LEHU2SWLFV
x [[[[ 2WKHU ( -
&KDQQHO05Z*(07,QVWDOODWLRQ,QWHUFRQQHFW0DSZLWKH6536±(TXLSPHQW &RQWURO5RRPV
2: (2II &XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG
(
2:*2& 6ZLWFK 7R06058
>%URZQ@ 2OGHU*2&VRQO\
5)'RRU 63:
+8% 5- (
6ZLWFK
3RUW$ (WKHUQHW 3RU W 3RU W (WKHUQHW 3RUW 6HUYLFH/DSWRS ><HOORZ*UHHQ@
3RU W (WKHUQHW 6LWH1HWZRUN
02'(0 ( 56
3RU W (WKHUQHW $:RSWLRQ -- 0
2SWLRQ 3RU W
+267
3& ( - 0
86%56 ( - 0
&RQYHUWHU
( )- (
.(<%2$5' ( &5<
>2UDQJH*UHHQ@ )
0QWU - - ( -5 -&
)

0286( - ,5'& - 6HQVRU&DEOH L%XWWRQ )
( 3RZHU )
-
+267 (
0QWU
3RUW%
*2&$$ ( )- (
:DWHU6XSSO\
/LQH,Q - -
/LQH2 XW - :DWHU5HWXUQ
( )- (
6&,0 ( - - ( - 0
*1' ( ; ; 0
6WXG 2:3'0 *UDGLHQW
( < )LOWHU < 0
6SDUH - - 6SDUH ( = = 0
0RGHP3RZHU - - 6SDUH
6SDUH - - 6SDUH
( - - *2&$$3RZHU
)URP3*5
0
- 0
)DFLOLW\ - -
+(&>*UHHQ@ - 0
8WLOLWLHV
&5<3ZU - 0
,13ZU *5(< *5<+26( - 0
<(/+26(
<(//2:
3RZHU%R[
%/8( %/8+26( -:DYHJXLGH
)DFLOLW\
6XSSO\
)DFLOLW\ $LU
:DWHU )DFLOLW\5HWXUQ 5HWXUQ $,5+2 6( -:DYHJXLGH
)LOWHU
5HWXUQ
6LJQDO%R[ *1'
*1' 6WXG
6WXG
56 - (*1' 5)&RPPRQ
&$7- 0 *1'
)- (*1' *URXQG6WXG
( -)/7(03 *51
)- 5(' 3(1
*1'SRZHU
3DQHO
)SRZHU
0
><HOORZ@
( - - ,QWHUIDFH
-
7R6LWH ( - 021 *1'
(WKHUQHW >*UHHQ5HG@ 6WXG
6HQVRU
3,5'&
L%XWWRQ &DEOH
&XVWRPHU 75''
6XSSOLHG 3RZHU - (
)LOWHU
2XWOHW
&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG
&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG
*1' -- 0

6WXG
5(' 5(' -- 0
- *51 *51 -
( - - ( -
( - - ( -
- (
&%
*3(
(*1' ;
(&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG
< - - 0

(&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG
= - 0
- 0
- 0
0'3 (*1'
- 0
(* 1'
(*1' -
- &DELQHW 3+36 0
*1' - ,QWHUIDFH
6WXG - (+HDG7[ ([FLWHU
(%RG\7[
7% - &+ - 0
- 0
&% - ()2&+ - - 0
- ()2 - - 0
3*5 3DWLHQW$OHUW -
&% (&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG &% 7R2:3'0-
>5HG@ &RQWURO%R[ )2:DYHJXLGH
0)2
- 3)2&+
5(95
- 3)2
- ()2 -
- (&$1 -
L%XWWRQ
6HQVRU
- - (+$57 - H6536
&DEOH
- (81%/$1. - - 0
3(0 - ((6WRS - - 0
- (%RG\7[ -
- (%RG\75 -
- (+HDG75 -
- (3RZHU -
',5(&7,21
%DOO9DOYH
SURFHG XUHV
x [[[[ 2WKHU
&KDQQHO05Z*(07,QVWDOODWLRQ,QWHUFRQQHFW0DSZLWK6536±(TXLSPHQW &RQWURO5RRPV
(
2:*2& 6ZLWFK 7R06058
5)'RRU 63:
+8% 5- (
(WKHUQHW 3RU W
6ZLWFK
3RUW$ 3RU W (WKHUQHW 3RUW 6HUYLFH/DSWRS ><HOORZ*UHHQ@
02'(0 ( 56 0
3RU W (WKHUQHW $:RSWLRQ --
2SWLRQ 3RU W
+267
3& ( - 0
86%56 ( - 0

( )- (
&RQYHUWHU &5<
.(<%2$5' (
>2UDQJH*UHHQ@ )
0QWU - - )
( -5 -&
0286( - 6HQVRU&DEOH L%XWWRQ )
,5'& - ( 3RZHU )
-
+267 ( 0QWU
3RUW%
*2&$$ ( )- (
/LQH,Q
:DWHU6XSSO\
- -
( )- (
6&,0 ( - ( - 0
-
*1' ( ; ; 0

6WXG 2:3'0 *UDGLHQW
( < )LOWHU < 0
6SDUH - - 6SDUH ( = = 0
6SDUH - - 6SDUH
( - - *2&$$3RZHU
)URP3*5
0
- 0
)DFLOLW\ - -

+(&>*UHHQ@ - 0
8WLOLWLHV
&5<3ZU - 0
*5(< *5<+26( - 0

,13ZU
<(/+26(
<(//2:
3RZHU%R[
%/8( %/8+26( -:DYHJXLGH
)DFLOLW\
6XSSO\
)DFLOLW\ $LU
)LOWHU
5HWXUQ
6LJQDO%R[ *1'
*1' 6WXG
6WXG
56 - (*1' 5)&RPPRQ
&$7- 0*1'
)- (*1' *URXQG6WXG
( -)/7(03 *51
)- 5(' 3(1
3DQHO 0
><HOORZ@
( - - ,QWHUIDFH
-
7R6LWH ( - 021 *1'
)SRZHU
*1'SRZHU
6HQVRU
L%XWWRQ &DEOH
&XVWRPHU 75''
3RZHU - (
6XSSOLHG )LOWHU
2XWOHW
3,5'&
-- 0
*1'
6WXG
5(' 5(' -- 0
- *51 *51 -
( - - (
&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG
&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG
-
( - - ( - 0
0
-
- (
(*1' ;
- 0
&%
< -
*3(
- 0
=
- 0
- 0
0'3 (*1'
- 0
(* 1'
(*1' -
- &DELQHW 3+36 0
(&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG
*1' - ,QWHUIDFH

(&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG
6WXG - (+HDG7[ ([FLWHU

(%RG\7[
7% - &+ - 0
- 0
- ()2&+ - - 0
&% ()2
- - - 0
3*5 3DWLHQW$OHUW -

&% (&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG &% 7R2:3'0-
>5HG@ &RQWURO%R[ )2:DYHJXLGH
0)2
- 3)2&+
- 3)2
- ()2 -
(&$1 -
5(95
-
6HQVRU (+$57
6536
L%XWWRQ - - -
&DEOH - 0
- (81%/$1. -
3(0 - ((6WRS - - 0
- (%RG\7[ - - 0
- 0
- (%RG\75 - - 0
- (+HDG75 - - 0
- (3RZHU -
-
)LUVW&KDUDFWHURQHGLJLWDOSKD %DOO9DOYH 7HUPLQDWRUDSSOLH GD W- R I3HQH WUDWLRQ 3D QHO
x ([[[[ 5XQVLQ(TXLSPHQW5RRPRU&RQWURO5RRP &KHFN9DOYH 'HSHQ GHQWRQ V\VWHPG HOLYHUHGWR VLWHFRPSOHWHR QHRIWKHIROOR ZLQ J
x 0[[[[ 5XQVHQWLUHO\LQWKH0DJQHW5RRP SURFHG XUHV
x 3[[[[ 5XQVWKURXJK3(1RU63:DQGURXWHGLQ0DJQHWDQG(TXLSPHQW5RRP x 2QV\VWHPVZLWK;* 'RQO\WKHL%XWWR QD QGWKH 6H QVR U&DEOH
6XEVHTXHQW&KDUDFWHUV DUHWRE HL QVWDOOHG DQ GFRQQ HFWHG WR- RQ3+36 PRGX OH
x [[[[ $&3RZHU *URXQG x 2QV\VWHPVZLWK;* R QO\FRQ QHFWWKHL %XWWRQ WRWKHSUH YLRX VO\
x [[[[ &RD[5) LQVWDOOHGVHQVRUFDEO HFRQQ HFWHGWR-RQWK H3 (0PRGX OH
x [[[[ )LEHU2SWLFV
',5(&7,21
7KH*2&KXEVZLWFK LVRQO\LQ FOXG HGRQROGHU*2&V)RUQHZHU

x [[[[ 6LJQDO
x [[[[ 2WKHU FRQQHFWLRQWR VHUYLFH OD SWR SVLWHQHWZRUN$:R SWL RQRUFXVWRPHU
VXSSOLH GVZLWFKLIPXOWLSOHFRQQHFWLRQVD UHU HTXLUH G
&K05Z*(07,QVWDOODWLRQ,QWHUFRQQHFW0DSZLWKH6536 ,&($UWLVW7±(TXLSPHQW &RQWURO5RRPV
(
2:*2& 6ZLWFK 7R06058
5)'RRU 63:
+8% 5- (
6ZLWFK
3RUW$ (WKHUQHW 3RU W 3RU W (WKHUQHW 3RUW 6HUYLFH/DSWRS ><HOORZ*UHHQ@
02'(0 ( 56
-- 0
3RU W (WKHUQHW $:RSWLRQ
2SWLRQ 3RU W
+267
3& ( - 0
.(<%2$5' 86%56 ( - 0
&RQYHUWHU
( )- (
( &5<
>2UDQJH*UHHQ@ )
0286(
0QWU - - ( -5 -&
)

- ,5'& - 6HQVRU&DEOH L%XWWRQ )
+267 ( 0QWU ( 3RZHU )
',63/$< -
*2&$$ ( )- (
:DWHU6XSSO\
/LQH,Q - -
( )- (
6&,0 ( - - ( - 0
*1' ( ; ; 0
6WXG 2:3'0 *UDGLHQW
( < )LOWHU < 0
6SDUH - - 6SDUH ( = = 0
6SDUH - - 6SDUH
( - - *2&$$3RZHU
)URP3*5
0
- 0
)DFLOLW\ - -
+(&>*UHHQ@ - 0
8WLOLWLHV
&5<3ZU - 0
,13ZU *5(< *5<+26( - 0
<(/+26(
<(//2:
3RZHU%R[
%/8( %/8+26( -:DYHJXLGH
)DFLOLW\
6XSSO\
)DFLOLW\ $LU
)LOWHU
5HWXUQ
6LJQDO%R[ *1'
*1' 6WXG
6WXG
56 - (*1' 5)&RPPRQ
&$7- 0*1'
)- (*1' *URXQG6WXG
( -)/7(03 *51
)- 5(' 3(1
*1'SRZHU
3DQHO
)SRZHU
0
><HOORZ@
( - - ,QWHUIDFH
-
7R6LWH ( - 021 *1'
6HQVRU
L%XWWRQ
3,5'&
&DEOH
&XVWRPHU 75''
6XSSOLHG 3RZHU - ( &)%
)LOWHU
2XWOHW --
&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG
&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG
-- 0
*1'
5(' 6WXG
3*5 5(' -- 0
- *51 *51 -
-
>5HG@ - (
( -
( 86% - ( - - - 0
+XE - (
- 0
( - - 0
- 0
&%
*3(
(*1' ;
-
(&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG
0
<
(&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG
-
=
3+36 0
0'3 (*1'
([FLWHU
(* 1'
(*1' - - 0
- &DELQHW - 0
*1' - ,QWHUIDFH - 0
6WXG - (+HDG7[ -
7% - (%RG\7[&+
- ()2&+ -
- ()2 - 6SOLWWHU
&% -
- ( - -
- 0
&% (&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG &% ,&(
- 3DWLHQW$OHUW -
7R2:3'0-
-- &RQWURO%R[ 0)2
-
5(95
-- - 3)2

)2:DYHJXLGH
- ()2 -
6HQVRU
L%XWWRQ &DEOH - - (&$1 -
- (+$57 -
3(0 H6536
- (81%/$1. -
- ((6WRS - - 0
- (%RG\7[ - - 0
- (%RG\75 -
- (+HDG75 -
- (3RZHU -
',5(&7,21
%DOO9DOYH
x ([[[[ 5XQVLQ(TXLSPHQW5RRPRU&RQWURO5RRP 7KH*2&KXEVZLWFK LVRQO\LQ FOXG HGRQROGHU*2&V)RU
&KHFN9DOYH
QHZHU*2 &VWKH(WKHUQHWSRUWRQ WKH+RVW3&LVD YD LODEOHIR U
x 0[[[[ 5XQVHQWLUHO\LQWKH0DJQHW5RRP GLUH FWFRQQ HFWLRQ WRVHUYLFHODSWRSVLWHQ HWZRUN$ :RSWLRQRU
x 3[[[[ 5XQVWKURXJK3(1RU63:DQGURXWHGLQ0DJQHWDQG(TXLSPHQW5RRP FXVWRPHUVXSSOLH GVZLWFKLIPXOWLSOHFRQQHFWLRQVD UH
6XEVHTXHQW&KDUDFWHUV UHTX LUHG
x [[[[ &RD[5)
x [[[[ )LEHU2SWLFV
x [[[[ 6LJQDO
x [[[[ 2WKHU
6,*1$$UWLVW,QVWDOODWLRQ,QWHUFRQQHFW0DS±(TXLSPHQW &RQWURO5RRPV7
(
2:*2& 6ZLWFK 7R06058
>%URZQ@
5)'RRU
( 63:
3RUW$ 6HUYLFH/DSWRS
6ZLWFK
><HOORZ*UHHQ@
6LWH1HWZRUN
02'(0 ( 56 $:RSWLRQ -- 0
2SWLRQ
+267
3& ( - 0
.(<%2$5' 86%56 ( - 0
( )- (
&RQYHUWHU
( &5<
>2UDQJH*UHHQ@ )
0286(
0QWU - - )
( -5 -&
- 6HQVRU&DEOH L%XWWRQ )
,5'& - (
+267 ( 0QWU 3RZHU )
',63/$< -

*2&$$ ( )- (
/LQH,Q
:DWHU6XSSO\
- -
( )- (
6&,0 ( - ( - 0
-
*1' ( ; ; 0

6WXG 2:3'0 *UDGLHQW
( < )LOWHU < 0
,5'&3RZHU - - 6SDUH ( = = 0
6SDUH - - 6SDUH
(+RVW'LVSOD\ - - 6SDUH
( - - *2&$$3RZHU
)URP3*5
)DFLOLW\ +(&>*UHHQ@
8WLOLWLHV
&5<3ZU - 0
*5(< *5<+26( - 0
,13ZU
<(/+26(
<(//2:
3RZHU%R[
%/8( %/8+26( -:DYHJXLGH
)DFLOLW\
6XSSO\
)DFLOLW\ $LU
:DWHU )DFLOLW\5HWXUQ 5HWXUQ $,5+26( -:DYHJXLGH
)LOWHU
5HWXUQ
6LJQDO%R[ *1'
*1' 6WXG
6WXG
56- (*1' 5)&RPPRQ
&$7- 0*1'
)- (*1' *URXQG6WXG
( -)/7(03 *51
)- 5(' 3(1
3DQHO 0
><HOORZ@
( - - ,QWHUIDFH
-
7R6LWH ( - 021 *1'
)SRZHU
*1'SRZHU
&XVWRPHU 75''
3RZHU - (
6XSSOLHG )LOWHU
2XWOHW -- 0
3,5'&
*1' -- 0

5(' 5('
6WXG
- *51 *51
3+36
- - 0
( - - (
&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG
&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG 86% - - 0

-
( - ( -
+XE - 0
- ( - 0
( - - 0
(*1' ; - 0
&%
3*5 <
*3(
$ --
>5HG@ =
% --
0'3 (*1'
& --
(*1' &)%
(*1'
' --
- --
&DELQHW
(&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG
*1' - ,QWHUIDFH

(&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG
6WXG - (+HDG7[ /DWHU6\VWHPV

- (%RG\7[&+
7%
,&( ([FLWHU
- - 3)2 - - - 0
&%
-- - ( - - -
- 0
&% (&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG &%
3DWLHQW$OHUW -
7R2:3'0- &RQWURO%R[ 0)2

--- - 3)2
--- - 3)2
--- 3)2
-
)2:DYHJXLGH
5(95
- (&$1 -
- (+$57 -
H6536 - 0
6HQVRU 0
L%XWWRQ - - (81%/$1. - -
&DEOH
- ((6WRS -
3(0 'ULYHU -
- (%RG\7[ -
6\PERO/HJHQG 0RGXOH
- (%RG\75 -
%DOO9DOYH (+HDG75 - 0(06 - - 0
-
- (3RZHU - - - 0
&KHFN9DOYH
- ( - 0
5HIHUWR)LEHU2SWLFVVHFWLRQIRUGHWDLOHGLQVWUXFWLRQV
)LUVW&KDUDFWHURQHGLJLWDOSKD IRUURXWLQJDQGFRQQHFWLQJILEHURSWLFVLQFDELQHWV 7R&)% (DUO\6\VWHPV
-- :LWK6SOLWWHU
x 0[[[[ 5XQVHQWLUHO\LQWKH0DJQHW5RRP $VPDOOQXPEHURIHDUO\V\VWHPVLQFOXGHDVSOLWWHU
x 3[[[[ 5XQVWKURXJK3(1RU63:DQGURXWHGLQ0DJQHWDQG(TXLSPHQW5RRP DQGGLIIHUHQWH[FLWHUFRQQHFWLRQVDVVKRZQ0RVW ([FLWHU
6XEVHTXHQW&KDUDFWHUV V\VWHPVXVHWKHODWHUFRQILJXUDWLRQ
- 0
x [[[[ &RD[5) 7KH*2&KXEVZLWFKLVRQO\LQFOXGHGRQROGHU -
*2&V)RUQHZHU*2&VWKH(WKHUQHWSRUWRQWKH - -
x [[[[ )LEHU2SWLFV
',5(&7,21
x [[[[ 6LJQDO +RVW3&LVDYDLODEOHIRUGLUHFWFRQQHFWLRQWRVHUYLFH

6SOLWWHU
x [[[[ 2WKHU ODSWRSVLWHQHWZRUN$:RSWLRQRUFXVWRPHU 7R- -
VXSSOLHGVZLWFKLIPXOWLSOHFRQQHFWLRQVDUHUHTXLUHG 7R- - - 0
&KDQQHO05Z*(07,QVWDOODWLRQ,QWHUFRQQHFW0DSZLWKH6536±0DJQHW5RRP
)DFLOLW\3RZHU)LOWHUV 06
3*DWLQJ
0DJQHW
6THH]H
(QFORVXUH
5HVS
(&*
6ZLWFK
33*
%XOE
&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG 058 06$$ 06

/('
(QFORVXUH
7HUPLQDO%R[
3 0DJQHW
&KLPQH\ 0
63: (2II >%OXH@ 0*7%
06$$
><HOORZ*UHHQ@ 3UHVVXUH 5HHG6ZLWFK 0$*3$&,)
( - 0 7UDQVGXFHU
0
( - 3UH$PS
( - 0 )- - - $LU7XEH
) 0 - 0$*3$&
-
)
) 0& -
3RZHU &ROGKHDG
6XSSO\
&ROGKHDG 0$*%25(
-:DYHJXLGH 5HWXUQ
;50
3DWLHQW$OHUW7XEH 0 *UDG7HPS
( ; *UDGLHQW ; 0 ; ;
( < )LOWHU < 0 < <
( = = 0 = =
*UDGLHQW
%XVV%DU
$,5+26( -:DYHJXLGH $,5+26( $,5 *UDGLHQW&RLO$LU
$,5 *UDGLHQW&RLO$LU
$,5+2 6( -:DYHJXLGH
(%RG\7[&+ - 0 - - 0 -
0 - 0$*+<% - 0 -
0
-
12- 0
- - ,1 0$*$03 287 0
1&- 0 5)&RLO
- 0 -5HDU
( - 0 0 -
- 0 -)URQW
0$*
''63/,7 %RUH/LJKW)URQW
- 0 %RUH/LJKW5HDU
- - 0 %RUH7HPS6HQVRU
- 0 %RUH3$/
( - 0 - 0 -
- $LUIORZ6HQVRU
- 0 -
- - 0 )URQW0LFURSKRQH
0 -
5)&RPPRQ*URXQG6WXG - 0 0 6SHDNHU
$,5 3DWLHQW$LU
0$*65, -
3(1 0$*
><HOORZ@ 0$ -- - 0
0DJ,2 0% -- -
75'')LOWHU >%OXH@ - 0/DQGPDUN -
-- - 0'RFN&QWUO -
-- - 0 -
- - 0
0$*
- 0 '&./
- 0
- 0'2&.3RZHU
3DUHQ WKHVLV 3DUHQ WKHVLV
- 0 /LJKW5 /LJKW/
- 0
0 0
- - - 'RFN
- 0 - 0 >%OXH
0$*䚷䚷/'3 *UHHQ@
0 7UDFNEDOO -
- 0,5'& - ,5' 0$*䚷䚷5'3 *(0'2&
7UDFNEDOO - &RQQHFWRU
- 0
- 0
3 3 3
0
-
0$*7'0
- 0 - - 0
- - 0
- -
3)2 0 - -
- 0
- 0
- 0
-
3)2,5'&
5(95
-
3)2&+ - -- 5; - 0
- 0
3)2 -
-
0)2 )2, 0 - 5;
- 0
-
)2:DYHJXLGH )2,) --
0
-
$,5+26(
%ORZHU $,5+26(
-
3('+8%
$QWHQQD
0'&$1
)))) -
3('
-
06WUREH
))) 5)&%6ORW -
-
- -
- -
- -
-
',5(&7,21
0 -
-
3(' -
-
075 -
- 0
- 3(' -
-
- 7,) - 0
- -
6\PERO/HJHQG
- -
%DOO9DOYH &KHFN9DOYH - 5)6 % %RG\
6ORW 3
- 3
,QWHUFRQQHFWV1XPEHULQJ/HJHQG 3
3
$
3'%6ORW
)LUVW&KDUDFWHURQHGLJLWDOSKD 0 -
%RG\
x ([[[[ 5XQVLQ(TXLSPHQW5RRPRU&RQWURO5RRP 0 - 5)6 %
- 6ORW 3
3
x 3[[[[ 5XQVWKURXJK3(1RU63:DQGURXWHGLQ 3
$
0DJQHWDQG(TXLSPHQW5RRP
0 -
x [[[[ $&3RZHU *URXQG 0 -
x [[[[ &RD[5) 3(',2
x [[[[ )LEHU2SWLFV 5HDU0LFURSKRQH
5HDU3HGHVWDO$LU ---- /RDG$
x [[[[ 6LJQDO
x [[[[ 2WKHU 5HDU3HGHVWDO /3&$ 3 /RDG%
--Dotted lines for module outlines or cables indicate an option >%OXH5HG@
&KDQQHO05Z*(07,QVWDOODWLRQ,QWHUFRQQHFW0DSZLWK6536±0DJQHW5RRP
(QFORVXUH
%XOE
33*
(&*
/('
5HVS
6ZLWFK
7HUPLQDO%R[
6THH]H
0 3 0DJQHW
3*DWLQJ
(QFORVXUH
&KLPQH\
63: (2II >%OXH@ 0*7%
06$$
( - 0 7UDQVGXFHU
0
( - 3UH$PS
( - 0 )- - - $LU7XEH
) 0
)
- 0$*3$&
0*1' 0$**URXQG6WXG
) -
) 0& -
3RZHU &ROGKHDG
6XSSO\
&ROGKHDG 0$*%25(
-:DYHJXLGH 5HWXUQ
;50
( ; *UDGLHQW ; 0 ; ;
( < )LOWHU < 0 < <
( = = 0 = =
*UDGLHQW
%XVV%DU
$,5 *UDGLHQW&RLO$LU
$,5+2 6( -:DYHJXLGH
(%RG\7[&+ - 0 - - 0 -
0 - 0$*+<% - 0 -
0
-
12- 0
- - ,1 0$*$03 287 0
1&- 0 5)&RLO
- 0 -5HDU
( - 0 -
- 0 -)URQW
0$*
- 0 %RUH/LJKW5HDU
- 0 %RUH7HPS6HQVRU
-
( - 0 %RUH3$/
- 0 - 0 -
- $LUIORZ6HQVRU
- 0 -
- 0 )URQW0LFURSKRQH
- 0 -
$,5 3DWLHQW$LU
0$*65, -
3(1 0$* 0$ -- - 0
><HOORZ@
0DJ,2 0% -- -
-- - 0'RFN&QWUO -
- 0 -
--
- - 0
0$*
- 0 '&./
- 0'2&.3RZHU
- 0
- 0 /LJKW5 /LJKW/
- 0
0 0
- - - 'RFN
- 0 - 0 >%OXH
0$*䚷䚷/'3 *UHHQ@
0 7UDFNEDOO -
- 0,5'& - ,5' 0$*䚷䚷5'3 *(0'2&
- 0
- 0
3 3 3
0
-
0$*7'0
- 0 - - 0
- 0 - - 0
- 0 - -
3)2 0 - -
- 0
- 0
- 0
-
3)2,5'&
-
3)2&+ - - 0
5(95
-- 5;
- 0
3)2 -
0)2 - - 0
)2, 0 - 5; - 0
)2:DYHJXLGH )2,) --
-
$,5+26(
%ORZHU $,5+26(
-
)))) 3('+8% -
-
3('
))) 5)&%6ORW -

$QWHQQD
-
- -
- 0 - -
0'&$1
- 0 - -

06WUREH
- 0 -
- 0 -
3(' -
-
075 -
- 0
-
- 3(' -
-
- 7,) - 0
- -
6\PERO/HJHQG
- -
%DOO9DOYH &KHFN9DOYH %RG\
',5(&7,21
- 5)6 %
3
- 6ORW 3
3
$
3'%6ORW
)LUVW&KDUDFWHURQHGLJLWDOSKD -
%RG\
x ([[[[ 5XQVLQ(TXLSPHQW5RRPRU&RQWURO5RRP - 5)6 %
- 6ORW 3
- 3
x 3[[[[ 5XQVWKURXJK3(1RU63:DQGURXWHGLQ - 3
$
0 -
x [[[[ &RD[5) 3(',2
x [[[[ 6LJQDO 6KXQWLVLQVWDOOHGIRU&KDQQHOV\VWHPV
--Dotted lines for module outlines or cables indicate an option 7HUPLQDWRUDSSOLHGDW-RI3HQHWUDWLRQSDQHO >%OXH5HG@
&KDQQHO05Z*(07,QVWDOODWLRQ,QWHUFRQQHFW0DSZLWKH6536 ,&($UWLVW7±0DJQHW5RRP
)DFLOLW\3RZHU)LOWHUV 06
3*DWLQJ
0DJQHW
6THH]H
(QFORVXUH
5HVS
(&*
6ZLWFK
33*
%XOE

/('
(QFORVXUH
7HUPLQDO%R[
3 0DJQHW
&KLPQH\ 0
63: (2II >%OXH@ 0*7%
06$$
( - 0 7UDQVGXFHU
0
( - 3UH$PS
( - 0 )- - - $LU7XEH
) 0 - 0$*3$&
-
)
) 0& -
3RZHU &ROGKHDG
6XSSO\
&ROGKHDG 0$*%25(
-:DYHJXLGH 5HWXUQ
;50
( ; *UDGLHQW ; 0 ; ;
( < )LOWHU < 0 < <
( = = 0 = =
*UDGLHQW
%XVV%DU
$,5 *UDGLHQW&RLO$LU
$,5+2 6( -:DYHJXLGH
(%RG\7[&+ - 0 - - 0 -
0 - 0$*+<% - 0 -
0
-
12- 0
- - ,1 0$*$03 287 0
1&- 0 5)&RLO
- 0 -5HDU
( - 0 0 -
- 0 -)URQW
0$*
- 0 %RUH/LJKW5HDU
- - 0 %RUH7HPS6HQVRU
- 0 %RUH3$/
( - 0 - 0 -
- $LUIORZ6HQVRU
- 0 -
- - 0 )URQW0LFURSKRQH
0 -
$,5 3DWLHQW$LU
0$*65, -
3(1 0$*
><HOORZ@ 0$ -- - 0
0DJ,2 0% -- -
-- - 0'RFN&QWUO -
-- - 0 -
- - 0
0$*
- 0 '&./
- 0
- 0'2&.3RZHU
- 0 /LJKW5 /LJKW/
- 0
0 0
- - - 'RFN
- 0 - 0 >%OXH
0$*䚷䚷/'3 *UHHQ@
0 7UDFNEDOO -
- 0,5'& - ,5' 0$*䚷䚷5'3 *(0'2&
- 0
- 0
3 3 3
0
-
0$*7'0
- 0 - - 0
- - 0
- -
3)2 0 - -
- 0
- 0
- 0
-
3)2,5'&
5(95
-
3)2 - - 5; - 0
- QRWXVHG - 0
-
0)2 )2, 0 - 5;
- 0
-
)2:DYHJXLGH )2,) -
QRWXVHG-
0
-
$,5+26(
%ORZHU $,5+26(
-
3('+8%
$QWHQQD
0'&$1
)))) -
3('
-
06WUREH
))) 5)&%6ORW -
-
- -
- -
- -
-
',5(&7,21
0 -
-
3(' -
-
075 -
- 0
- 3(' -
-
- 7,) - 0
- -
6\PERO/HJHQG
- -
%DOO9DOYH &KHFN9DOYH - 5)6 % %RG\
6ORW 3
- 3
3
$
3'%6ORW
%RG\
x ([[[[ 5XQVLQ(TXLSPHQW5RRPRU&RQWURO5RRP 0 - 5)6 %
- 6ORW 3
3
x 3[[[[ 5XQVWKURXJK3(1RU63:DQGURXWHGLQ 3
$
0 -
x [[[[ &RD[5) 3(',2
x [[[[ 6LJQDO
--Dotted lines for module outlines or cables indicate an option >%OXH5HG@
6,*1$$UWLVW&KDQG$UWLVW;7&K,QVWDOODWLRQ,QWHUFRQQHFW0DS±0DJQHW5RRP
(QFORVXUH
%XOE
33*
(&*
/('
5HVS
6ZLWFK
7HUPLQDO%R[
6THH]H
0 3 0DJQHW
3*DWLQJ
(QFORVXUH
&KLPQH\
63: (2II >%OXH@ 0*7%
06$$
( - 0 7UDQVGXFHU
0
( - 3UH$PS
( - 0 )- - - $LU7XEH
) 0
)
- 0$*3$&
0*1' 0$**URXQG6WXG
) -
) 0& -
3RZHU &ROGKHDG
6XSSO\
&ROGKHDG 0$*%25(
-:DYHJXLGH 5HWXUQ
;50
( ; *UDGLHQW ; 0 ; ;
( < )LOWHU < 0 < <
( = = 0 = =
*UDGLHQW
%XVV%DU
$,5 *UDGLHQW&RLO$LU
$,5+2 6( -:DYHJXLGH
(%RG\7[&+ - 0 - - 0 -
0 - 0$*+<% - 0 -
-
,1 0$*$03 287 0
( - 0
5)&RLO
- 0 -5HDU
0 -
- 0 -)URQW
0$*
- 0 %RUH/LJKW5HDU
- 0 %RUH7HPS6HQVRU
-
( 0
- 0 %RUH3$/
- - 0 -
- $LUIORZ6HQVRU
- 0 -
- 0 )URQW0LFURSKRQH
- 0 -
$,5 3DWLHQW$LU
0$*65, -
3(1 0$* 0$ -- - 0
><HOORZ@
0DJ,2 0% -- -
-- - 0'RFN&QWUO -
- 0 -
--
- 0
0$*
- 0 '&./
- 0'2&.3RZHU
- 0
- 0 /LJKW5 /LJKW/
- 0
0 0
- - - 'RFN
- 0 - 0 >%OXH
0$*䚷䚷/'3 *UHHQ@
0 7UDFNEDOO -
- 0,5'& - ,5' 0$*䚷䚷5'3 *(0'2&
- 0
- 0
3 3 3
)) -
)))
$,5+26(
%ORZHU
- 5;',67
- 0 - -
- 0 - -
- 0 -
- -
- 0 -
- 0 -
-
3)2 -
-
- -
- - 0
0
0
0
0
5(95
3)2,5'& - '33 -

-
3)2 - - -
3)2 - -
3)2 -
- '33 -
0)2 )2, -
)2,) - -
)2:DYHJXLGH -
- '33 -
-
- -
-
- '33 -
-
- -
-
- 0
6SDUH
6\PERO/HJHQG
&KHFN9DOYH 716
%DOO9DOYH
',5(&7,21
$QWHQQD
3(' -
0
3(' -
x 0[[[[ 5XQVHQWLUHO\LQWKH0DJQHW5RRP -
7,) - 0
x 3[[[[ 5XQVWKURXJK3(1RU63:DQGURXWHGLQ
-
0DJQHWDQG(TXLSPHQW5RRP -
0 -
x [[[[ &RD[5) 3(',2
x [[[[ 6LJQDO -
x [[[[ 2WKHU 3 /RDG%
--Dotted lines for module outlines or cables indicate an option 5HDU3HGHVWDO
/3&$ -
>%OXH5HG@
6,*1$$UWLVW,QVWDOODWLRQ,QWHUFRQQHFW0DS±(TXLSPHQW &RQWURO5RRPV7
(
2:*2& 6ZLWFK 7R06058
>%URZQ@
5)'RRU
( 63:
6ZLWFK
3RUW$ 6HUYLFH/DSWRS
><HOORZ*UHHQ@
6LWH1HWZRUN
02'(0 ( 56 $:RSWLRQ -- 0
2SWLRQ
+267
3& ( - 0
.(<%2$5' 86%56 ( - 0
( )- (
&RQYHUWHU
( &5<
>2UDQJH*UHHQ@ )
0286(
0QWU - - ( -5 -&
)

- ,5'& - 6HQVRU&DEOH L%XWWRQ )
+267 ( 0QWU ( 3RZHU )
',63/$< -
*2&$$ ( )- (
:DWHU6XSSO\
/LQH,Q - -
( )- (
6&,0 ( - - ( - 0
*1' ( ; ; 0
6WXG 2:3'0 *UDGLHQW
( < )LOWHU < 0
,5'&3RZHU - - 6SDUH ( = = 0
6SDUH - - 6SDUH
(+RVW'LVSOD\ - - 6SDUH
( - - *2&$$3RZHU
)URP3*5
)DFLOLW\ +(&>*UHHQ@
8WLOLWLHV
&5<3ZU - 0
*5(< *5<+26( - 0
,13ZU
<(/+26(
<(//2:
3RZHU%R[
%/8( %/8+26( -:DYHJXLGH
)DFLOLW\
6XSSO\
)DFLOLW\ $LU
:DWHU )DFLOLW\5HWXUQ 5HWXUQ $,5+26( -:DYHJXLGH
)LOWHU
5HWXUQ
6LJQDO%R[ *1'
*1' 6WXG
6WXG
56- (*1' 5)&RPPRQ
&$7- 0*1'
)- (*1' *URXQG6WXG
( -)/7(03 *51
)- 5(' 3(1
*1'SRZHU
3DQHO
)SRZHU
0
><HOORZ@
( - - ,QWHUIDFH
-
7R6LWH ( - 021 *1'
3,5'&
&XVWRPHU 75''
6XSSOLHG 3RZHU - (
)LOWHU
2XWOHW
&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG
&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG
-- 0
*1' -- 0
5(' 5('
6WXG
- *51 3+36
*51 - - 0
( - - ( - - 0
86% - (
-
( +XE - - 0
- ( - 0
( - - 0
*3(
&%
(*1' ; - 0

3*5
(&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG
< --
(&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG
$
>5HG@ =
% --
0'3 (*1'
& --
(*1' &)%
(*1'
' --
- --
&DELQHW
*1' - ,QWHUIDFH
6WXG - (+HDG7[ /DWHU6\VWHPV
7% - (%RG\7[&+

,&( ([FLWHU
- - 3)2 - - - 0
&%
-- - ( - - - 0
- 0
&% (&XVWRPHU6XSSOLHG &%
3DWLHQW$OHUW -
7R2:3'0- &RQWURO%R[ 0)2

--- - 3)2
5(95
--- - 3)2
--- 3)2
-
)2:DYHJXLGH
- (&$1 -
- (+$57 -
H6536 - 0
6HQVRU
L%XWWRQ &DEOH - - (81%/$1. - - 0
- ((6WRS -
3(0 'ULYHU -
- (%RG\7[ -
6\PERO/HJHQG 0RGXOH
- (%RG\75 -
%DOO9DOYH - (+HDG75 - 0(06 - - 0
&KHFN9DOYH - (3RZHU - - - 0
- ( - 0
5HIHUWR)LEHU2SWLFVVHFWLRQIRUGHWDLOHGLQVWUXFWLRQV
)LUVW&KDUDFWHURQHGLJLWDOSKD IRUURXWLQJDQGFRQQHFWLQJILEHURSWLFVLQFDELQHWV 7R&)% (DUO\6\VWHPV
',5(&7,21
-- :LWK6SOLWWHU
x 0[[[[ 5XQVHQWLUHO\LQWKH0DJQHW5RRP $VPDOOQXPEHURIHDUO\V\VWHPVLQFOXGHDVSOLWWHU
x 3[[[[ 5XQVWKURXJK3(1RU63:DQGURXWHGLQ0DJQHWDQG(TXLSPHQW5RRP DQGGLIIHUHQWH[FLWHUFRQQHFWLRQVDVVKRZQ0RVW ([FLWHU
6XEVHTXHQW&KDUDFWHUV V\VWHPVXVHWKHODWHUFRQILJXUDWLRQ
x [[[[ $&3RZHU *URXQG - 0
x [[[[ &RD[5) 7KH*2&KXEVZLWFKLVRQO\LQFOXGHGRQROGHU - 0
*2&V)RUQHZHU*2&VWKH(WKHUQHWSRUWRQWKH - -
x [[[[ )LEHU2SWLFV
x [[[[ 6LJQDO +RVW3&LVDYDLODEOHIRUGLUHFWFRQQHFWLRQWRVHUYLFH
6SOLWWHU
x [[[[ 2WKHU ODSWRSVLWHQHWZRUN$:RSWLRQRUFXVWRPHU 7R- -
VXSSOLHGVZLWFKLIPXOWLSOHFRQQHFWLRQVDUHUHTXLUHG 7R- - - 0
Installation Manual 6.3 Sorting and routing cables
6.3 Sorting and routing cables

Sorting cables
CAUTION
POSSIBLE LACERATIONS
Failure to trim tie-wraps can result in numerous laceration hazards when servicing the
equipment.
Tie-wraps must be cut flush with no protruding sharp edges or points.
Move lean cable carts into assigned room. System power, ground, and data cables are color coded at
each end by destination per colors shown on cable map.
1. Sort cables by destination. Normally, it is best to sort cables originating from the farthest cabinet or
component from the PDU first. This will make it easier to pull cables through the overhead cable
trays.
NOTE
Carefully review architectural drawings to make sure that all ducts are properly installed
and that all signal and power cables are accounted for before starting to route cable
runs.
2. Unroll coiled cables to insure that they will route freely without twists or kinks. Route cables in
accordance with the applicable Installation Interconnect Diagram.
3. Most of the cables are easily identifiable from the lean carts and from the different system
hardware sub-assemblies as explained in Product Delivery Instructions on page 38.
Routing cables
The following cables are grouped together in the overhead cable trays, as indicated in Cable Locations in
Equipment Room Overhead Cable Trays on page 113 and Cable Locations in Magnet Room Overhead
Cable Trays on page 116.
Equipment room cable runs
• PGR to PEN:
• E3002, E3006, E3008, E3009
• E1005, E0004, E4002, E4005 (GND wall stud)
• E1003, E1004
• E1307 (systems with ICE), E3391 (Artist and Artist XT)
• PGR to SPW: E1001, E1002
• PGR to OW: E3037 (Artist/T/XT), E0003, E3011, E3015, E4008
• PGR to HEC: E3013, E3028, E4007
• OW to PEN: E3017, E3018
• MagMon to SPW & PEN: E3020, E3022, E3023
Magnet room cable runs
• PEN & SPW to MAG I/O M3031, M3302, M3303, M3312, M3313, M3314 (IRD option)
Installation Manual 6.4 Storage of excess cable length
• PEN to REAR PED (MR450w, MR450w GEM, Artist T): M1303 and M1304
• PEN to REAR PED: M3301, M3304, M3306, M3308, M3310 (SRPS only) or M3375 (eSRPS only)
• PEN to REAR PED: M3311, M3315, M3316
• SPW to REAR PED: M1306 (MR450w, MR450w GEM, Artist T), M1305
• SPW to REAR PED (MR450w, MR450w GEM, Artist T): M3309
• SPW & PEN to MAG HYB: M1001, M1312
• REAR PED to MAG-TDM (MR450w and MR450w GEM with eSRPS, Artist T): M3376, M3377
• PEN to MAG-TDM: (M3300, M3301 SRPS only), M1302 (MR450w, MR450w GEM, Artist T)
• PEN to MAG components: M1310, M3378
Any cables not listed above should be routed through the overhead cable trays separately.
6.4 Storage of excess cable length

Coiling excess cable length
The type of coiling used to store excess length of cables depends on the type of cable. Data cables are
coiled differently than fiber optic cables. Only the gradient cable will be cut to length.
• Data cables - Excess length of cables must be coiled in a “Figure Eight” pattern. DO NOT COIL IN
CIRCLES!
• Fiber optic cables - Excess length of cables must be coiled in a circle pattern. DO NOT COIL IN A
“FIGURE EIGHT” PATTERN!
Figure 6-2 Proper coiling of excess cables
1. Excess data cable to be stored in overhead cable trays or penetration panel closet must be routed in
a figure eight pattern as shown.
NOTICE
The minimum bend radius of any cable must not be violated no matter how the
excess cable is coiled.
Installation Manual 6.5 Rear magnet enclosure cable cover test-fit
2. For smaller figure eight patterns, dress and tie-wrap middle of looped cables.
3. For longer figure eight patterns, dress and tie-wrap ends of looped cables
4. Excess data cable to be stored in overhead cable trays, penetration panel closet, or in magnet
enclosure area must be routed in a circular pattern as shown.
5. Refer to Cables Installed on Site table in Cable Specification on page 327 for information on
minimum bend radius for each cable.
6. Repeat as necessary for cables in magnet or equipment room.
Equipment room storage
1. Route cables in provided overhead cable trays, conduit, or ducts. Leave sufficient slack for later
connection when cabinets are in final position according to site architectural plans.
2. Excess cable length will be stored in overhead cable trays.
Magnet room storage
1. Route cables inside magnet room through overhead cable trays, conduit, or ducts to rear of magnet
area with sufficient length remaining to complete routing and connecting within magnet enclosure.
2. Excess cable length can be stored in penetration panel closet. Excess fiber optic cable wires can also
be stored under magnet.
6.5 Rear magnet enclosure cable cover test-fit

Before routing any cables in the magnet room, refer to the following illustration(s). Routed cables can
not touch the rear cable cover when cover is installed at the back of the magnet.
Installation Manual 6.5 Rear magnet enclosure cable cover test-fit
Non-GEM style enclosure

Figure 6-3 Cable routing area at rear non-GEM style cable cover
1. The two dimensions provided, 290 mm and 630 mm, are measured from the center of the magnet.
2. The top of the Rear Magnet Cover measures approximately 785 mm from the top of the rear
endbell.
3. Observe the relationship between the end of the overhead cable tray and the area where the cables
are to be routed through. IMPORTANT! Make sure the cables will not touch the top of the covers
when routing of cables is complete.
4. View of rear magnet covers and cable cover after installation.
Installation Manual 6.6 Cable locations in equipment room overhead cable trays
GEM style enclosure

Figure 6-4 Cable routing area at rear GEM style cable cover
1. The two dimensions provided, 290 mm and 500 mm, are measured from the center of the magnet.
2. The top of the rear magnet cover measures approximately 785 mm from the top of the rear endbell.
3. Observe the relationship between the end of the overhead cable tray and the area where the cables
are to be routed through. IMPORTANT! Make sure the cables will not touch the top of the covers
when routing of cables is complete.
4. View of rear magnet covers and cable cover after installation.
6.6 Cable locations in equipment room overhead cable

trays
Front, rear, left, and right, as used in this section, are defined as follows: the patient entrance end of the
magnet is the front; the opposite end is the rear; left and right are in respect to a person’s left and right
while facing the patient entrance end of the magnet.
DANGER
FERROUS MATERIAL HAZARD

If the magnet is energized, the crimp tool, blower box, and other tools and parts required
for this installation that contain ferrous material will be strongly attracted to the magnet
and may become dangerous projectiles.
Keep all ferrous tools at least 10 ft away from the magnet.
DANGER

Lethal voltages are present in the PGR PDU/gradient cabinet.
Lock out and tag out the power at the main disconnect before proceeding.
All cables routed between cabinets and the penetration panels must use the overhead cable routing
mechanisms or cable trays. For simplicity, in this manual, overhead cable routing mechanisms are
referred to as overhead cable trays.
CAUTION
MUSCLE STRAIN
Awkward body positioning and / or working from a ladder may cause strain while installing
cables.
Take breaks as necessary to prevent personal harm.
NOTICE
When working in the ceiling area, confirm with the site that no unforeseen hazards exist.
NOTE
The cables must be routed in their designated areas. There are two options for these areas:
• The designated areas are partitioned within one large cable tray (As shown below in the
left tray)
• The designated areas are made up of four individual cable trays or other routing
mechanisms
The following illustration indicates where the cables, per their Run numbers, are to be routed in a
partitioned cable tray. Refer to site architectural drawings and local codes for additional specific
guidelines.
Figure 6-5 Equipment room overhead cable assignments
The following illustration shows the two different types of overhead cable tray layouts that can be
installed at sites. The views below show the ends of the trays as viewed at the rear of the magnet.
• If the stacked layout is installed at site, the power, data, and gradient cables MUST ALWAYS be
routed in the top cable tray. The water, gas, and air hoses must always be routed in the lower tray.
• In the side-by-side layout, the power, data, and gradient cables should be routed in the left tray.
Figure 6-6 Cable tray layout configurations
Either layouts can be installed in the equipment room.
Installation Manual 6.7 Cable locations in magnet room overhead cable trays
6.7 Cable locations in magnet room overhead cable trays

Front, rear, left, and right, as used in this section, are defined as follows: the patient entrance end of the
magnet is the front; the opposite end is the rear; left and right are in respect to a person’s left and right
while facing the patient entrance end of the magnet.
DANGER

If the magnet is energized, the crimp tool, blower box, and other tools and parts required
for this installation that contain ferrous material will be strongly attracted to the magnet
and may become dangerous projectiles.
Keep all ferrous tools at least 10 ft away from the magnet.
DANGER

Lethal voltages are present in the PGR PDU/gradient cabinet.
Lock out and tag out the power at the main disconnect before proceeding.
The magnet room may have a ceiling constructed of tiled panels. These panels will have to be carefully
removed for access to overhead cable trays.
• Carefully remove and store ceiling tiles for re-installation after cables are installed.
• All excess cable will be coiled and stored in the Pen panel closet.
• All cables routed between magnet and the penetration panels must use the overhead cable trays.
NOTICE
When working in the ceiling area, confirm with the site that no unforeseen hazards exist.
CAUTION
MUSCLE STRAIN
cables.
NOTE
The cables in the cable trays must be routed in their designated areas. There are two options
for these areas:
• The designated areas are partitioned within one large cable tray (As shown below in the
left tray)
• The designated areas are made up of four individual cable trays or other routing
mechanisms
Installation Manual 6.7 Cable locations in magnet room overhead cable trays
The following illustration (typical view) indicates where the cables, per their Run numbers, are to be
routed in the partitioned cable trays, as seen from the magnet end of trays as viewed from the front of
the magnet. Refer to site architectural drawings and local codes for additional specific guidelines.
Figure 6-7 Magnet room overhead cable assignments
The following illustration shows the two different types of overhead cable tray layouts that can be
installed at sites. The views below show the ends of the trays as viewed at the rear of the magnet.
• If the stacked layout is installed at site, the power, data, and gradient cables MUST ALWAYS be
routed in the top cable tray. The water, gas, and air hoses must always be routed in the lower tray.
• In the side-by-side layout, the power, data, and gradient cables should be routed in the left tray.
Figure 6-8 Overhead cable tray configurations
Either layout can be installed in the magnet room.
Installation Manual 6.8 Cryogen line positioning on magnet
6.8 Cryogen line positioning on magnet

Cryogen lines should have been routed in the correct overhead tray and connected to the shield cooler
during magnet installation.
Figure 6-9 Routing of cryogen lines
1. Make sure that cryogen lines have been routed around vent stack as shown in the illustration.
2. Make sure that there is enough slack in the lines to avoid interference with final installation of all
magnet enclosure covers.
NOTE
When routing remainder of cable, make sure to not route any cables in indicated area
(number 3 above). This area on the magnet needs to be clear so that service ladder cover can
be placed over modules attached to side of magnet.
NOTE
While routing the orange cryogen line, stay clear of the service turret so that it does not
interfere with insertion of the current probes when ramping the magnet. Also make sure that
the cryogen line remains out of the way from the fill port.
6.9 Gradient cable installation
Installation Manual 6.9 Gradient cable installation
Equipment room gradient cables

The equipment room gradient cables (runs E3317, E3318, and E3419) are delivered to site pre-
terminated at both ends for connection to the PGR cabinet and to the gradient filter on the Secondary
Pen Wall (SPW).
If the equipment room gradient cables are pre-terminated only on the PGR end, follow the termination
procedure in Stripping and crimping gradient cables on page 341, depending on the gradient filter
supplied.
NOTICE
Gradient Cables are heavy, use two or more people when lifting cables.
CAUTION
MUSCLE STRAIN
cables.
Route gradient cables in overhead cable tray

It is recommended that the three gradient cables be routed through the overhead cable trough before
any of the other cables are routed.
CAUTION
DAMAGE TO OVERHEAD CABLE ROUTING MECHANISMS/TRAYS

Horizontal movement of cable trays while routing cables can damage cable tray rods
attached to ceiling.
Do not pull on cables at end of cable trays. Route cables in trays by lifting and moving
cables to connection points in overhead cable trays.
Figure 6-10 Routing of gradient cables in equipment room
1. It is recommended that the three gradient cables be routed through the overhead cable trough
before any of the other cables are routed.
2. Make sure all non-magnetic tools, ropes, and/or ladders that may be required for routing of cables
are assembled and ready for use.
3. Starting at the SPW end of the cable tray, route the pre-terminated end of each cable through the
designated overhead cable tray towards the PGR Cabinet.
• Position in the cable tray as shown in section titled Cable Locations in Equipment Room
Overhead Cable Trays on page 113.
• Gradient cables MUST lay in a single layer next to each other.
4. Route the pre-terminated ends of each gradient cable to the top/front of the PGR cabinet for
connection to terminals.
Replace gradient cable bracket and clamps at PGR (if required)

This procedure may not be required if the cable bracket and clamps already installed at the top of the
cabinet are the same as described in the following steps. Check to see that the cable clamp for the Z-
cable is larger than the other two clamps. If this is the case, then the cable bracket and clamps do not
need to be replaced.
1. Remove safety shield at top of PGR cabinet to allow easier access to gradient cable clamps.
2. If attached, remove the ground wire from the ground stud on the cable support bracket.
Figure 6-11 PGR cable bracket and clamps
3. Remove screws that fasten the cable clamps to the cable support bracket.
4. Remove screws that secure the cable support bracket to the PGR cabinet. Discard all three clamps
and the cable support bracket.
5. Install the new equipment room cable support bracket included in the hardware kit that came with
the gradient cables per the table below.
Figure 6-12 Cable bracket and clamp identification
NOTE
The support bracket has one cable slot with a larger diameter than the other two. Be
sure to install the support bracket so this larger slot is on the right side when viewed
from the front of the PGR cabinet. This larger slot is sized to fit the Z-cable.
6. Refer to the above illustration to determine proper clamps to attach to the support bracket.
7. Loosely attach the appropriate clamps and with the screws provided. Cables will be installed in the
next procedure.
Connect gradient cable to PGR cabinet

The steps for this procedure install just one of the gradient cables. Repeat the steps below for
installation and connection of the remaining gradient cables and the ground wires.
NOTE
If the gradient cable clamp bracket was removed in the earlier cabinet positioning
procedures, reattach using the removed screws.
Figure 6-13 PGR cabinet gradient cables
1. If installed, remove cover at top of cabinet to access gradient cable clamps.

2. Position the braided area of the cable in the clamp at the top of the cabinet.
3. Close clamp around cable, but do not tighten completely. Adjustment may be necessary as the
terminated ends of wires are attached.
4. Position the two black wires on the right stud of the terminal block. Install flat washers then install
split lock washers. Fasten with nuts.
5. Position the two red wires on left stud of the terminal block. Install flat washers then install split
lock washers. Fasten with nuts.
6. Attach the ground wire on the ground stud. Install flat washers then install split lock washers.
Fasten with nut.
7. Reinstall the safety shield at top of PGR cabinet.
8. Reinstall the cover at top of PGR cabinet.
Installing gradient cables to the gradient filter

Install the gradient cables using the procedure for the gradient filter you have.
• 6.9.1 Installing the cables to the GFA1 (1st generation gradient filter) on page 129
• 6.9.2 Installing gradient cables to the GFA2 scan room (2nd generation gradient filter) on page 142
• 6.9.3 Installing gradient cables to the GFA2 equipment room (2nd generation gradient
filter) on page 145
Magnet room gradient cables

The magnet room gradient cables, Runs M3317, M3318, and M3419 are delivered to site pre-terminated
at both ends for connection to the rear of the magnet and to the gradient filter on the SPW.
If the equipment room gradient cables are pre-terminated only on the bus bar end, follow the
termination procedure in Stripping and crimping gradient cables on page 341, depending on the gradient
filter supplied.
Route gradient cables in overhead cable tray

Figure 6-14 Magnet room gradient cables
2. Starting at the SPW end of the cable tray in the Pen Panel Closet, route the pre-terminated end of
each cable through the designated overhead cable tray towards the rear of the Magnet.
• Make sure they are positioned in the cable tray as shown in section titled Cable Locations in
Magnet Room Overhead Cable Trays on page 116
• Gradient cables MUST lay in a single layer next to each other
3. Route the pre-terminated ends of each gradient cable to the rear of the magnet for connection to
terminals as shown in Connect gradient cables at back of magnet on page 126.
Replace gradient cable bracket and clamps at rear of magnet (if required)
1. Remove safety shield from gradient cable lead board.
2. Remove screws that fasten the cable clamps to the gradient cable lead board.
Figure 6-15 Magnet cable bracket and clamps
3. Remove screws that secure the cable support bracket to the gradient cable lead board. Discard all
three clamps and the cable support bracket.
4. Install the new magnet room cable support bracket included in the hardware kit that came with the
gradient cables.
Figure 6-16 Cable bracket and clamp identification
NOTE
The support bracket has one cable slot with a larger diameter than the other two. Be
sure to install the support bracket so this larger slot is in the middle when viewed from
the front the rear of the magnet. This larger slot is sized to fit the Z-cable.
5. Refer to the above illustration to determine proper clamps to attach to the support bracket.
6. Loosely attach the appropriate clamps and with the screws provided. Cables will be installed in the
next procedure.
Connect gradient cables at back of magnet

Install gradient wires and ground cables to the busbar terminals as specified in this procedure. The
correct torque and installation order of hardware is necessary for long-term stability of the gradient
subsystem.
NOTICE
Cables must be installed in the correct order as indicated in the Figure 6-17 Gradient cable
connections (back of magnet, safety shield removed) on page 126. As viewed from the rear
of the magnet, install “Y” on the left, “Z” in the middle, and “X” on the right side of the back
of the magnet. Red cables are installed on “+” terminals. Black cables are installed on “-
“ terminals.
Figure 6-17 Gradient cable connections (back of magnet, safety shield removed)
Item Description
1 Gradient cable
2 Gradient cable clamps
3 Red (+) and black (-) gradient wires
4 Busbar terminal connections (lug, Nord-Lock washer, and brass nut)
5 Ground stud
1. Remove the safety shield covering the busbar terminals on the back of the magnet.
2. Position the braided shielding of the gradient cable in the clamp.
3. Install the clamp around the cable shielding, but do not tighten completely. Adjustment may be
necessary as the terminal ends of the wires are attached.
NOTE
Nord-Lock washers must be used as shown in the following illustrations during the
installation.
• The Nord-Lock washer consists of two washers with teeth facing inwards. Do not
take the washers apart.
• If the Nord-Lock washers are separated, or the nuts are untightened, discard the
washers and replace them with new Nord-Lock washers only. If new Nord-Lock
washers are not available, contact the online center for further instructions.
Figure 6-18 Nord-Lock washer
Item Description
1 Wrong (do not use separated washers)
2 Correct
4. If any hardware is present on the busbar studs, remove it before installing cables. The cable
connection must be in direct contact with the busbar terminal.
NOTE
In the following steps, install the cable lugs and hardware to the busbar studs in the
order shown in the following illustrations. Make sure the lug is installed first and the
Nord-Lock washer is installed between the lug and brass nut as shown.
Figure 6-19 Order of installation
1 Incorrect installation
2 Correct installation
3 Gradient cable
4 Nord-lock washer
5 Brass nut
5. Position lugs on the appropriate studs as marked. Place red wires on “+” studs and black wires on “-
“ studs for the “Y”, “Z”, and “X” gradient cables as marked on the busbar assembly.
Figure 6-20 Proper installation of gradient wire to busbar stud
Item Description
1 Lug
2 Nord-Lock washer
3 Brass nut
6. Install Nord-Lock washers over the lugs.

7. Torque a brass nut on each stud to 25 ft lbs (34 Nm) with an adjustable nonmagnetic torque wrench
(part number 5534134 or 5534134-2 ). When torqued, the stud must extend beyond the end of the
nut.
8. Install the ground wire for each gradient cable to the ground studs as shown in Figure 6-20 Proper
installation of gradient wire to busbar stud on page 129. The “Y” ground wire is installed on the left
ground stud. The “Z” and “X” ground wires are connected together on the right ground stud, back to
back.
9. Install the safety shield over the busbar terminals.
6.9.1 Installing the cables to the GFA1 (1st generation gradient

filter)
Remove gradient filter safety shields on gradient filter

Figure 6-21 Remove safety shields
Item Description
1 Front safety shield
2/3 Side safety shield
4 The gradient cable installation after connection of the cables and prior to re-installa-
tion of the front safety cover.
1. Unfasten three screws and remove the front safety shield. Save for re-installation after cables are
attached.
NOTE
The side safety shield may or may not be removed. It is required to be in place after
completion of gradient cable installation. Keeping this shield attached to gradient filter
during gradient cable installation will make sure that the cables will have enough length
to attach to the studs at the bottom of the gradient filter.
2. If it is necessary to remove the safety shield, unfasten three screws and remove the side safety
shield. Save for re-installation after cables are attached.
Cut gradient cable to length at SPW

The following steps will provide instructions for exposing the cable braid, cutting to length and
terminating the red and black wires for connection to the studs on the bottom of the Gradient Filter.
NOTE
Allow for some slack in the cables before cutting to length. Slack will allow for re-termination
if required.
Figure 6-22 Trimming gradient cables
1. Position cables at U-bolt clamp at side of SPW (Secondary Pen Wall) and mark each cable.
2. From the mark on each cable, measure and cut each cable according to Table 6-1 Gradient cable
length on page 131.
Table 6-1 Gradient cable length
X Y Z
Cut to Length from 20 Inches (508 mm) 22 Inches (559 mm) 25 Inches (635 mm)
Mark
3. To expose the braid, remove the outer cable jacket to the mark created in Step 2.
a. Before cutting the outer jacket, place the large hook onto the stripper. While pushing up on the
small hook, push the large hook into the hook release until a click is heard. Remove the small
hook. Slide the large hook into the stripper until a click is heard.
Figure 6-23 Large hook installation
Item Description
1 Push up on small hook
2 Hook release
b. Position the wire stripper around the outer jacket of the gradient cable and adjust the blade
depth to the minimum thickness of the outer insulation (do not cut through the braid).
Figure 6-24 Blade depth adjustment
Item Description
1 Blade
2 Outer Insulation
c. Turn the blade to the (--) mark. lift the spring-loaded hook and position the stripper onto the
desired mark made in Step 1. Rotate the stripper clockwise around the outer jacket. Keep the
stripper on the jacket at the desired mark, pull back on the handle to remove the blade from
the jacket material, and rotate the blade 90 degrees (turn the handle from ' -- ' mark to ' | '
mark). Then allow the tool to re-enter the material and strip the jacket lengthwise to remove
the outer jacket.
Figure 6-25 Rotate Tool
Item Description
1 Rotate the Tool around the jacket
2 rotate the blade 90 degrees
3 Cut the jacket lengthwise
d. Remove the foil shield exposing the braid shield.

Figure 6-26 Foil shield and braid shield
Item Description
1 Foil shield
2 Braid shield
4. Measure and mark 3.5 inches (90 mm) from the edge of the outer cable jacket.
a. Push the braid up to the 3.5 inch mark to form a safe area. Cut the shield using a diagonal head
semi-flush or shear wire cutter. Do not use a knife, this may cut into the 1 AWG wires.
Figure 6-27 Cutting the braid shield
b. Remove the white gradient cable packing to the end of the braided shield.
• (For the X or Y axis) Expose the 4 conductor 1 AWG and the single 6 AWG ground.
• (For the Z axis) Expose the 4 conductor 2/0 AWG and the single 6 AWG ground.
Figure 6-28 Cable packing
5. On the end of each cable jacket, apply the provided yellow and green tape as shown in Figure
6-22 Trimming gradient cables on page 131. Also apply the applicable cable label for each Run: RUN
E3317 = FILT X, RUN E3318 = FILT Y, RUN E3419 = FILT Z.
6. Apply electrical tape around the edge of the braid to prevent braid unravestepng. Do not apply tape
over gradient lug. Gradient lug must be available for inspection.
Figure 6-29 Taping braid
7. Measure the excess cut cable. Inform the GE Field Engineer the length of the excess cut cable. The
data will be used for future gradient cable design.
8. Discard the remaining cable.
Connect gradient cable wires to gradient filter

Figure 6-30 Gradient cables connection information
1. Remove the plastic shield.

2. Position the X, Y, and Z gradient cables on bracket and tighten U-bolts around braided section of
each cable.
CAUTION
DAMAGE TO GRADIENT CABLES

Over-tightening of U-bolts in mounting bracket can damage gradient cables.
Do not over-tighten U-bolts.
3. Terminal attachment locations: Black wires = X-, Y-, Z-. Red wires = X+, Y+, Z+.
4. Note the back-to-back position of the terminals attached to studs. Before crimping terminals onto
wires, position and mark the cables as to alignment of terminals for ease of fastening crimped
terminals to studs.
NOTE
See Cut gradient cable to length at SPW on page 131 for the order of installation of
cables on studs. Adjustment to the lengths of any of the red or black wires may be
necessary to accommodate connections to the studs.
5. Use the lug to determine the strip length. Mark the cable strip location.
Figure 6-31 Determine length
6. Strip the wires using the Greenlee 1903 wire stripper supplied in the GEHC Gradient Cable Tool Kit
5790054.
a. Replace the large hook, used on the outer jacket, with the small hook.
b. Position the stripper over the end of the cable. Rotate the silver blade head in a clockwise or
counter clockwise direction to decrease or increase the top blade cutting depth. Determine the
blade depth to avoid gradient cable strand damage.
NOTE
Do not touch the wire strands with the blade.
Figure 6-32 Setting blade depth
c. Turn the blade to the ( -- ) mark. lift the spring-loaded hook and position the stripper on the
cable mark. Rotate the Tool clockwise around the cable until adequate penetration of the
insulation is achieved.
Figure 6-33 Tool position
d. While the stripper is still on the wire, turn the blade 90 degrees to the ( | ) mark. Cut lengthwise
to remove the insulation.
Figure 6-34 Insulation removal
7. Label each of the five wires in each gradient cable wire per table in Figure 6-30 Gradient cables
connection information on page 136. Red wires are “+”, Black wires are “-”.
8. Make sure terminals are positioned correctly as shown in Figure 6-35 Final connection of magnet
room gradient cables on page 140.
Figure 6-35 Final connection of magnet room gradient cables
9. Route and cut ground wires to length. Strip length determined by holding the lug on the end of the
cable. See Figure 6-31 Determine length on page 137. Crimp a furnished T & B 54105 terminal on
each ground wire. Connect wires as indicated.
NOTE
Do not over tighten GND studs.
10. Using the two-wrench method, hold the ground stud with one wrench and tighten the hex nut with
the other wrench until tight.
NOTICE
In the next step, make sure the terminals are positioned correctly before crimping.
NOTE
All the wire strands from the gradient leads are required for a secure crimp.
NOTE
To ensure the lugs remain flat when they are placed back-to-back, position the crimp
Tool so that the flat side of the crimp on the top lug is flush with the flat side of the
bottom lug.
11. Use only the TBM5 or the TBM5-S supplied in GEHC Gradient Cable Tool Kit 5790054 and the
furnished T&B lugs (54155-TB pink lug for X and Y gradient cable, 54165-TB orange lug for Z gradient
cable, and 54105 for GND gradient cable). Position the lug in die grooves of the Tool so the die is
between the outer color-coded marks. Crimp the terminals on the wires.
Figure 6-36 Lug placement on crimp Tool
Item Description
1 Wire
2 Die
3 Lug
4 Crimp Tool
12. Place lugs into position on the gradient filter.

13. Using the 2 wrench method, hold the hex nut with one wrench and tighten the Spiralock hex nut
with the other wrench until tight. Repeat for all lugs.
Figure 6-37 Tighten lugs
Item Description
1 Hex nut
2 Spiralock nut
14. Install the plastic safety shield.
Install safety cover(s)

Figure 6-38 Gradient filter safety covers
1. If removed, re-attach the Side Safety Shield using the three previously removed screws.
2. Re-attach the Front Safety Shield with the three previously removed screws.
6.9.2 Installing gradient cables to the GFA2 scan room (2nd

generation gradient filter)
Attach and secure the X & Y axis (pink lugs) and the Z axis (orange lugs) to the corresponding posts,
single post positive and double post negative. Torque each SHCS (socket head cap screw) to 45 Nm,
using the 3/8 in. hex adapter. Attach the three ground cables (blue lugs) to the ground pegs and secure
with a nut.
Figure 6-39 GEN2 gradient filter, scan room side
1 Outer insulation
2 Upper clamp
3 Lower clamp
4 Negative wires
5 Positive wires
1. Position the gradient cables on the corresponding clamps on the gradient filter. The black insulation
should be under the top clamp, braid under the bottom clamp. Loosely secure the cables with the
clamps.
NOTE
The lower clamps are reversible to provide a uniform contact surface around the braid for
EMC. The smaller side of the clamps (1 AWG) should face inward the X and Y (1 AWG)
cables. The larger side of the clamp should face inward on the Z (2/0 AWG) cable. The
upper clamps are used as a strain relief and are sized to work with either cable.
Figure 6-40 GEN2 gradient filter, scan room side
1 Run M3419 = FILT Z, left side

2 Run M3318 = FILT Y, middle
3 Run M3317 = FILT X, right side
4 Ground cable attachment locations
2. Connect each ground cable to the gradient filter. Do not over tighten GND studs.
3. Attach and secure the lugs to the corresponding posts with a screw. Torque each bolt to 45 N m.
NOTE
Red wires are positive (+). Black wires are negative (-).
4. Tighten the upper and lower clamps until each gradient cable is secured. Do not pinch or compress
the gradient cable.
NOTE
5. Install the scan room side gradient filter cover.
6.9.3 Installing gradient cables to the GFA2 equipment room

(2nd generation gradient filter)
Attach and secure the X & Y axis (pink lugs) and the Z axis (orange lugs) to the corresponding posts,
single post positive and double post negative. Torque each SHCS (socket head cap screw) to 45 Nm,
using the 3/8 in. hex adapter. Attach the three ground cables (blue lugs) to the ground pegs and secure
with a nut.
Figure 6-41 Gen2 gradient filter, equipment room side
1 Outer insulation
2 Upper clamp
3 Lower clamp
4 Negative wires
5 Positive wires
clamps.
NOTE
Figure 6-42 GEN2 gradient filter, equipment room side
1 Run E3317 = FILT X, left side

2 Run E3318 = FILT Y, middle
3 Run E3419 = FILT Z, right side
2. Connect each ground cable to the gradient filter. Do not over tighten GND studs.
NOTE
the gradient cable.
NOTE
5. Install the equipment room side gradient filter cover.
6.9.4 Storage Requirements for Excess Gradient Cable

1. Excess gradient cable must be stored on a wall hook inside the penetration closet in the Magnet
Room and on a hook anchored into the Equipment Room wall. GE supplies one hook per cable.
2. Supports and anchorage must be able to hold up to 22.7 kg (50 lb.) of weight per cable.
3. Excess gradient cable can be stored in a single loop (no more than one loop per cable) with a
minimum bend radius of 330 mm (13 in.).
4. Supports for the 1 AWG (X and Y axis) cables shall be anchored no more than 2591 mm (102 in.)
above the floor and no more than 2133 mm (84 in.) above the floor for the 2/0 AWG (Z axis) cable.
5. The Z-gradient cable is heavier than the X or Y gradient cable and must be positioned lower, as
shown in Figure 6-45 Gradient Cable Storage Horizontal Layout (Example) on page 149.
Figure 6-43 Gradient Cable Mounting Hook Mounting Detail
NOTE
The examples below are representative of possible cable layout or configuration. Layout may
vary depending on size, shape and configuration of the pen wall closet. Configure cables to
best suit the install configuration without violating the requirements above.
Figure 6-44 Gradient Cable Storage Vertical Layout (Example)
Item Description Item Description

1 GE-supplied gradient cable mounting hooks 3 Finished floor
2 Cable tray
Figure 6-45 Gradient Cable Storage Horizontal Layout (Example)
Item Description Item Description

1 GE-supplied gradient cable mounting hooks 3 Finished floor
2 Cable tray
Installation Manual 6.10 Connect magnet ground, Run M4005
6.10 Connect magnet ground, Run M4005

Make sure magnet ground cable, Run M4005, is connected to GND stud at back of magnet. Other end of
ground cable is routed through overhead cable trays and connected to RF Screen Room common
ground. Refer to cable map.
NOTE
If ground stud on back magnet flange is not available, route Run M4005 to either rear magnet
leg. Connect to ground stud on inside of leg.
Figure 6-46 Connect magnet ground (typical magnet shown)
6.11 Position rear pedestal

The rear pedestal has been delivered to site with instructions on how to unload it from the shipping
pallet. After unloading the rear pedestal, move it to rear of magnet.
The rear pedestal should initially positioned about 18 inches (458mm) from the installed position - the
distance between the front and rear split bridge - when connected to magnet. All cables and hoses will
be connected to rear pedestal in this position. This will provide a service loop for any future
maintenance or other service procedures.
Hoses routed to the rear end bell will also be connected before Rear Pedestal is moved to its final
position and attached to the magnet.
Installation Manual 6.12 RF transmit cable installation
Figure 6-47 Initial position of rear pedestal (MR450w, MR450w GEM, Artist T shown)
NOTE
For Artist and Artist XT systems, the Rear Pedestal does not include the RF Hub shown in the
illustration.
1. Position the front surface of the bridge on the Rear Pedestal about 18 inches (458 mm) from the
normally installed position.
2. Lower the four leveling feet until wheels of front and rear shipping brackets are not touching the
floor.
3. Remove front and rear wheeled shipping brackets.
4. IMPORTANT! The I and Q cables from the Hybrid Splitter are routed, connected, insulated, and tie-
wrapped in place. DO NOT cut tie-wraps or alter routed path.
6.12 RF transmit cable installation

Route and connect in equipment room
It is recommended that the RF Transmit cables be routed through the overhead cable tray after the
gradient cables have been routed and before any of the other cables are installed.
NOTE
The equipment room RF transmit cables, Runs E1001 and E1002 are delivered to site pre-
terminated and must not be cut to length.
Figure 6-48 Equipment room RF cable routing
2. Starting at the SPW end of the cable tray, route the had and body cables marked for connection to
the PGR cabinet through the designated overhead cable tray towards the PGR cabinet. Position in
the cable tray as shown in Cable Locations in Equipment Room Overhead Cable Trays on page 113.
3. Route the ends of the cable to the top of the PGR cabinet and connect as marked to J18 and J19.
4. Connect other ends of RF Transmit cables as marked to J128 (MR450w, MR450w GEM, Artist) and
J106 on SPW.
5. Coil and store excess cable length in overhead cable tray.
Route and connect in magnet room
It is recommended that the RF transmit cables be routed thru the overhead cable tray after the gradient
cables have been routed and before any of the other cables are installed.
NOTE
The magnet room RF transmit cables, Runs M1306 (MR450w, MR450w GEM, Artist T), M1001
and M1305 are delivered to site pre-terminated and MUST NOT BE CUT TO LENGTH.
2. Starting at the SPW end of the cable tray, route body cable M1001 and Head cables M1306
(MR450w, MR450w GEM, Artist T) and M1305 through the designated overhead cable tray towards
the rear of the magnet. Position in the cable tray as shown in Cable Locations in Magnet Room
Overhead Cable Trays on page 116.
Figure 6-49 Magnet room RF cable connections
3. Route Run M1001 along outside of right-rear flange of magnet, tie-wrap in place, and connect as
marked to J1 on MAG-HYB.
4. Route Runs M1306 (MR450w, MR450w GEM, Artist T) and M1305 along outside of right-rear flange
of magnet, towards the I/O bracket on the rear pedestal, and tie-wrap in place.
5. Connect Run M1305 to J1 on rear pedestal I/O panel.
6. (For MR450w, MR450w GEM, Artist T) Connect Run M1306 to J2 on rear pedestal I/O panel.
Figure 6-50 Connect RF cables to SPW
7. Connect Run M1001 to J106 on SPW. Two people, one on each side of SPW, are needed to connect
M1001 and E1001 to SPW.
Installation Manual 6.13 Route and connect ground cables
NOTICE
Do NOT install O-Ring or Grease that may be provided with Cable Termination Kit.
Installation of these parts will prevent the ground from making contact resulting in RF
leaks.
8. Insert interface pin into one of the connectors. At J106, align connectors on each side of
penetration panel and push together. Fasten together using three of each of the following:
• 1/4-20 x 1.25 hex head bolt (brass)
• 1/4 screw size lock washer (phos bronze)
• 1/4-20, 7/16 inch hex x 3/16 inch thk nut (brass)
NOTE
The flat washer provided with the termination kit may be discarded to facilitate
installation of connectors to Penetration Panel.
9. Connect M1305 and M1306 as applicable.
a. (For MR450w, MR450w GEM, Artist T) Connect Run M1305 to J122 (N.O.) and Run M1306 to
J120 (N.C.) on the transmit switch.
b. (For Artist and Artist XT) Connect Run M1305 to J128 on the SPW.
10. Coil and store excess cable length of M1001, M1305, and M1306 (as applicable) on cable hooks in
penetration panel closet.
NOTE
The coil radius must be greater than the minimum bend radius for these cables. The
minimum bend radii for these cables, which can also be found in the Cable Specification
table in Appendix on page 327 are:
• M1001 = 9 inches (229 mm)
• M1305 = 6 inches (152 mm)
• M1306 = 6 inches (152 mm)
6.13 Route and connect ground cables

PGR cabinet ground cables
The following ground cables are routed from the operator workspace, HEC cabinet, PEN cabinet, and RF
common ground stud.
Installation Manual 6.13 Route and connect ground cables
Figure 6-51 PGR cabinet ground connections
1. Route E4005 from RF common ground stud on screen room and connect to ground stud in PGR
cabinet.
2. Route and connect the following to the PGR ground terminal as shown below:
• E4002 from PEN cabinet.
• E4007 from HEC cabinet.
• E4008 from OW.
Penetration panel and SPW ground cables
The ground cables in the following two steps are installed on the equipment room side of the panels.
Installation Manual 6.14 Route and connect equipment room power cables
Figure 6-52 Pen panel and SPW ground connections
1. Route and connect E4010 from RF common ground stud on screen room to ground stud in
penetration panel.
2. Route and connect E4009 from RF common ground stud on screen room to ground stud at bottom
of SPW.
3. Route and connect E4005 from RF common ground stud on screen room to ground stud in PGR
cabinet.
6.14 Route and connect equipment room power cables

To complete the grounding and leakage current checks procedure, only the power and ground cables can
be connected. The test must be completed before any of the data cables can be connected.
NOTE
For efficiency purposes, all the cables can be routed through the overhead cable trays but
only the power and ground can be connected for this test.
Installation Manual 6.15 Route and connect equipment room data cables
NOTICE
Do not connect data cables until the grounding and leakage test has been completed.
Ground cables were routed and connected in Route and Connect Ground Cables on page 154. Connect
the following power cables.
• E0003, PGR J102 to OW-PDM J1
• E0004, PGR J16 to PEN J1
• E0009, HEC CRY power to CRY power
• MagMon3 power cable to HEC
Make sure the following has been completed.
• Customer-supplied power from MDP CB2 to PGR CB1
• Customer-supplied power from MDP CB3 to HEC power
(For Artist and Artist XT systems) Route MEMS DC power cable (5748797) from MEMS-J2 in the PEN
cabinet to J57 on the PEN wall. Mate the cable end at J57 through the opening to M3392 in the magnet
room.
Software version DV29.1 and later introduces support for a non-MEMS system configuration. Existing or
upgraded systems will continue to use the MEMS power supply. Newly installed or upgraded systems
may not have the MEMS power supply. Identify the presence or absence of MEMS on your system by
looking for the MEMS DC Power Supply Assembly (part number 6859128) in the power supply rack of the
ISC.
Figure 6-53 MEMS DC power cable at J57, mated to M3392 (Artist and Artist XT)
NOTE
The Route and Connect Equipment Room Data Cables on page 157 section provides
instructions on routing and connecting all cables in the equipment room.
The Operator Workspace on page 305 section provides instructions on routing and
connecting all cables in the operator workspace.
6.15 Route and connect equipment room data cables

Refer to Cable Locations in Equipment Room Overhead Cable Trays on page 113 for positioning of cables
and hoses routed in equipment room in the overhead cable routing mechanisms. Make sure cables are
in their designated areas.
PGR cabinet cables

Figure 6-54 PGR cable connections
1. Route the cables through the assigned channel in the 24-inch overhead cable routing mechanism
(cable tray) to the cables final connection point.
2. Refer to cable map and connect remainder of data cables to top of PGR Cabinet after Grounding
and Leakage test has been completed. Some cables are pre-connected to the PGR cabinet as
explained in Product Delivery Instructions on page 38
3. Refer to Storage of Excess Cable Length on page 110 for coiling of any excess cable in the overhead
cable trays.
4. At J16 and J102, install connector bracket (5314434) on mounting standoffs to hold power cable
Runs E0004 and E0003 in place. Bracket is part of Desktop Collector (2321156-26).
HEC cabinet cables
Make sure that LOTO has been applied to HEC circuit breakers before installing and connecting any HEC
cables or hoses. Refer to the Lock Out Tag Out (LOTO) section in Chapter 1.
Refer to cable map and route remainder of cables to HEC cabinet. Connect data cables after grounding
and leakage test has been completed.
Figure 6-55 HEC cable connections
1. Connect the ground wire E4007 from the PGR cabinet to ground stud at top of cabinet.
NOTE
If ground wire is difficult to attach at location indicated in illustration, then connect
E4007 to ground stud on opposite wall of cabinet. For proper ground, make sure the
ground wire contacts bare metal.
2. Connect Run E3013 to J12 CAT5.
3. Connect Run E3028 to J11 RS232.
4. Run E3026 should have already been connected to J24 CRY CPRSR FL & TEMP.
5. Magnet Monitor power cable, Run E3006, should have already been connected to the customer
supplied power outlet.
PEN cabinet cables
Refer to cable map and route cables to PEN cabinet. Connect after ground resistance test has been
completed. Some cables are pre-connected to the PEN cabinet as explained in Product Delivery
Instructions on page 38, those cables need to be routed from PEN to the appropriate location through
the cable tray.
NOTICE
FOR SYSTEM WITH SRPS ONLY - Before connecting cables, make sure that the SRPS
Dongle (5172838-2) has been connected to J50 on either the PEN Panel or the back of the
PEN Panel.
Figure 6-56 PEN cable connections
1. Route Runs E3017 and E3018 from OW and connect to J10 and J12 as marked.
2. Route Runs E3020 from MagMon and connect to J13 as marked.
3. Route Power cable Run E0004 from PGR cabinet and connect to J1. Install Connector Bracket
(5314434) on mounting standoffs to hold E0004 in place. Bracket is part of Desktop Collector
(2321156-26).
4. Route fiber optic cable runs to the magnet.
a. (For MR450w, MR450w GEM) Route fiber optic cable Runs P2004 (32 channel) and P2003
through J20 and through wave guide in Pen panel to magnet.
b. (For Artist T) Route fiber optic cable Run P2003 through J20 and through wave guide in Pen
Panel to magnet.
c. (For Artist and Artist XT) Route fiber optic cable Runs P2003, P2004, and P2006 through J20 and
through wave guide in Pen panel to magnet.
5. Route fiber optic cable Runs E2020 and E2023 through J17, and J18 as marked. For XGD only (not
XG2), route fiber optic cable Run E2002 through J19. Refer to Install Fiber Optic Cables on page 209
for connection of fiber optic wires inside of PEN cabinet.
6. Route Coax/RF Runs E1003, E1004, and E1005 from PGR cabinet and connect to J5, J6, and J15.
7. Route signal cable Runs E3002, E3006, E3008 and E3009 from PGR cabinet and connect to J11, J14,
J9, & J3.
8. Route and connect GND cable Run E4002 to ground stud.
9. For systems with ICE, route coax/RF Run E1307 from PGR cabinet and connect to J23.
10. (For Artist and Artist XT) Route the MEMS inhibit cable (5748796) from MEMS-J3 in the PEN cabinet
to PEN wall J56. Mate the cable end through the opening at J56 to M3316 in the magnet room.
11. (For Artist and Artist XT) Route Run E3391 from PGR-J30 to PEN wall J55. Mate the cable end
through the opening at J55 to M3391 in the magnet room.
Figure 6-57 PEN wall J55 and J56 (Artist and Artist XT, shown from equipment room)
1 PEN-J56 (mate MEMS inhibit cable to M3316)

2 PEN-J55 (mate E3391 to M3391)
Secondary Pen Wall (SPW) cables

The SPW was delivered to site and installed prior to magnet delivery.
• The gas lines, Runs 621 and 622, were routed through the J110 and J111 waveguides when the
magnet was installed.
• The gradient cables were routed and connected to the gradient filter in a previous procedure in the
section.
• The coolant lines have been routed through J100 and J101 waveguides.
• The 4 inch air hose from the PGR cabinet has been routed to J104 waveguide.
Refer to cable map and connect remaining cables to SPW after grounding and leakage test has been
completed.
Installation Manual 6.16 Install temperature/humidity sensor components in equipment room
Figure 6-58 SPW cable connections
1. Run E1001, Body TX, should have already been routed and connected to J106.
2. Route and connect Run E1002, Head TX, to J128
3. Route and connect Runs E3022 and E3023 from MagMon to J116 and J117.
4. Route and connect Run E3030 from E-Off Switch to J115.
5. Route and connect Run E3031 from GOC to J118.
6. Remove safety cover. Route and connect Run 623 to F1 and F3. Replace safety cover.
6.16 Install temperature/humidity sensor components

in equipment room
Dependent on configuration delivered to the site, the iButton can be installed on the PEN or PGR
cabinets.
• On systems with XGD only, the iButton and the sensor cable are to be installed and connected to
J43 on PHPS2 module.
• On systems with XG2 only, connect the iButton to the previously installed sensor cable connected
to J3 on the PEM module.
Select the applicable installation instruction from the following two procedures.
Installation Manual 6.16 Install temperature/humidity sensor components in equipment room
PEN cabinet installation

Figure 6-59 Component installation
1. Retrieve the iButton sensor (5317298) from the Desktop Collector kit (2321156-26) and attach to
top of PEN cabinet using dual locking tape.
2. Connect RJ11 sensor cable (5317299) to iButton and route to rear of PHPS2 module in PEN cabinet.
3. At J43 on rear of PHPS2 module, install DB9 to RJ11 adapter (5318097).
4. Connect end of RJ11 sensor cable to RJ11 adapter.
Installation Manual 6.17 Install RF door switch Run E3014
PGR cabinet installation

Figure 6-60 PGR cabinet iButton installation
1. Pre-installed sensor cable routed and connected to J3 on PEM module.

2. Retrieve the iButton sensor (5317298) from the Desktop Collector kit (2321156-26) and connect to
sensor cable at top of PGR cabinet using dual locking tape.
6.17 Install RF door switch Run E3014

Run E3014 is a 100 ft cable with a 9-pin sub-miniature D plug on one end. The other end is cut off with
the black and red leads from pair #1 dressed for connecting to a switch. Should it be desired to cut off
excess length, make sure that the black and red leads have continuity to pins 1 and 6 on the 9 pin sub-
miniature D plug.
1. Connect Run E3014 to J20 on PGR cabinet and route to RF door switch.
2. Connect black lead on Run E3014 to RF door switch COM (common) contact.
3. If RF door switch is normally open, proceed to step 4. If normally closed, proceed to step 5.
4. Connect red lead on Run E3014 to RF door switch N.O. (normally open) contact.
5. If RF door switch is not normally open, connect red lead on Run E3014 to RF door switch N.C.
(normally closed) contact.
6.18 Install blower box on penetration panel

NOTE
The blower box can be installed later in the installation process. Make sure that the area
where the blower box is to be installed will stay clear of any routed cables and hoses. Note
that the blower box is delivered in the magnet room lean cart.
Installation Manual 6.18 Install blower box on penetration panel
NOTE
If slot on mounting flange does not provide enough clearance for placement over existing
flange studs, remove mounting screws in step 1, position blower box on SPW, and attach with
removed screws. At least two people are required for this procedure.
1. Loosen, but do not remove, four screws securing top of Pen panel.
Figure 6-61 Blower box installation
2. Lift and slide Blower Box (5213397 for MR450w, MR450w GEM, Artist T systems; or 5213397-200
newer Artist/XT systems) mounting holes over loosened screws. Tighten the four screws to secure
blower box to Pen panel frame.
NOTE
Figure 6-61 Blower box installation on page 165 shows Blower Box 5213397. The newer
Artist/XT blower box only has one blower output for patient air. It does not include an
output for the rear pedestal.
3. Route power cord to bottom of Pen panel and remove safety power cover.
4. Connect power cord wires as marked to the connection points. For Artist/XT, do not connect F5 or
F6 wires. Bend these wires back against the length of the power cable jacket. Secure the wires by
wrapping electrical tape around the eyelet terminals to prevent electrical contact with the AC
power filter connections.
Installation Manual 6.19 Install air and water hoses
Figure 6-62 F5 and F6 wires secured with electrical tape (Artist and Artist XT only)
5. Re-attach safety power cover making sure that power cord is routed through access hole.
6.19 Install air and water hoses

Refer to Section Cable Locations in Equipment Room Overhead Cable Trays on page 113 for the position
of cables and hoses routed in Equipment Room in the overhead cable trays. Make sure cables are in their
designated areas of the trays.
Hose and fitting installation notes:
• To prevent cracking of fittings, hold fittings in the HEC stationary with wrench while flare
connections are being made.
• Trim extra length off of hose clamps after applying clamp to the hoses. Smooth rough edges.
• DO NOT use Teflon tape on threads that have a flare fitting (female and flare).
Figure 6-63 Flare fitting assembly
• A small amount of water may be applied to push-lok barbs to facilitate insertion into hoses.
NOTICE
For hoses requiring insulation - if preferable, the insulation sections can be installed
around the hoses and seams between sections secured with black duct tape before
routing in overhead cable trays.
Figure 6-64 Air and water hose installation schematic
NOTICE
Make sure that LOTO has been applied to HEC circuit breakers before installing and
connecting any HEC cables or hoses. Refer to Lock Out Tag Out (LOTO) Section in
Chapter 1.
Route and connect coolant hoses between PGR and HEC

Refer to Figure 6-64 Air and water hose installation schematic on page 167 for part numbers and
description of hose hardware.
Figure 6-65 Hoses between PGR and HEC
1. Route RED (5264033) and GREEN (5264066) coolant hoses from HEC cabinet thru the designated
overhead cable tray to PGR cabinet.
2. Cut to length.
NOTE
At each cabinet, ball and check valves are to be installed in each hose at a location of 1 to
3 feet (300 to 900 mm) outside the cabinet. Make sure the distance measured is outside
the perimeter of the top of the cabinet.
3. Cut each hose at the appropriate 1 to 3 foot mark outside the cabinet, as mentioned above.
4. At PGR, install 1 inch ball valve assembly (5338544).
5. At HEC cabinet, install 1 inch check valve assembly (5338545). Make sure valves are installed in
the correct directions.
6. Insert 1 inch flare to Push-Lok connector (5263572) at ends of each hose. DO NOT use Teflon tape
on threads.
NOTE
To prevent cracking of fittings when attaching flare connectors to cabinet connection
points, hold fittings in the HEC stationary with wrench while flare connections are being
made.
7. Connect RED and GREEN hoses to top of PGR and HEC cabinets as marked.
8. Check for leaks.
Route and connect coolant hoses between cryogen compressor and HEC
The installation procedures for installing the hoses, barbs, and the insulation sleeves between the
cryogen compressor and the HEC was part of Direction 5500097, Pre-Magnet Delivery System
Installation manual. Refer to Direction 5500097 for instructions, if needed.
Verify that insulation sleeves have been installed on each hose.
Figure 6-66 Hoses between cryogen compressor and HEC
Route and connect gradient coil water coolant hoses in equipment room
NOTE
To prevent cracking of fittings when attaching flare connectors to cabinet connection points,
hold fittings in the HEC stationary with wrench while flare connections are being made.
Figure 6-67 Gradient coil coolant hoses in equipment room
1. Route BLUE and BLACK coolant hoses from HEC Cabinet the designated overhead cable tray to
wave guides J100 and J101 in SPW. Route through wave guides to rear of magnet. Refer to Route
and connect gradient coil water coolant hoses in magnet room on page 170 for routing and
connection of Gradient Coil cooling water hoses in magnet room.
2. Cut coolant hoses to length at HEC cabinet.
3. At the HEC Cabinet, for both the BLUE and BLACK hoses, check valves are to be installed in each
hose at a location of 4,000 to 12,000 mm (13.12 to 39.37 feet) outside the cabinet. Make sure the
distance measured is outside the perimeter of the top of the cabinet. Cut each hose.
4. Install Check Valve assembly (5338545) for each hose between cut ends. Make sure valve is
installed in the correct direction.
5. At the end of each hose, install a 1 inch 37 degree Female Push-Lok Swivel fitting (5263572). DO
NOT use Teflon tape on threads.
6. Connect each hose to designated RETURN inlet (BLACK) and SUPPLY outlet (BLUE) at top of HEC
Cabinet.
7. Install insulation sleeves (5225968) around the 1 inch water coolant hoses in both the Magnet and
Equipment rooms. Using black duct tape, tape the seams between sections of insulation to prevent
gaps.
Route and connect gradient coil water coolant hoses in magnet room
One Inch Ball Valve assemblies (5338543) will be installed in each hose.
Figure 6-68 Gradient coil coolant hoses in magnet room
1. Hoses were routed in Route and connect gradient coil water coolant hoses in equipment
room on page 169 from HEC through SPW to rear of magnet and cut to length.
2. NOTE: It is important that the ball valve assembly with beaded hose barb and clamp (5338543) be
inserted and clamped to hose routed from the gradient coil. Orientation shown below.
3. Attach each ball valve and fitting assembly to BLACK and BLUE hoses as shown.
4. Install hose clamp on gradient coil hose below the ball valve on the BLACK and BLUE hoses.
5. Install insulation sleeves (5225968) around 1 inch water coolant hoses in both the Magnet and
Equipment rooms. Using black duct tape, tape the seams between sections of insulation to prevent
gaps.
NOTE
When handle is perpendicular to hose, ball valve is closed.
Apply insulation on fittings
NOTICE
Do not apply the cork/rubber insulation wrap until after all leak checks have been
completed by FE.
The Cork/Rubber Insulation Wrap (5268212) must be applied to all gradient coil and cryogen compressor
hose connection points.
Figure 6-69 Applying insulation
1. Apply and secure a length of insulation wrap to cover the BLUE hose connection.
2. Repeat process in Step 1 for the GREEN, BLACK, RED, GREY, and YELLOW hoses at the top of the
HEC cabinet.
3. Repeat process in Step 1 for the GREY and YELLOW hoses at the cryogen compressor.
4. Repeat process in Step 1 for the BLACK hose at the rear of the magnet connecting to the gradient
coil.
5. Repeat process in Step 1 for the BLUE hose at the rear of the magnet connecting to the gradient
coil.
Route and connect air coolant hoses between HEC and SPW
NOTE
Trim extra length off of hose clamps after applying clamp to the hoses. Smooth rough edges.
Figure 6-70 Air hoses between HEC and SPW
1. Route 4 inch SUPPLY air hose (46-282666Pxx) in the designated overhead cable tray from SPW to
the HEC.
2. Make sure there is enough length for insulation that will be applied around the hose in Step 9. Cut to
length.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for routing and cutting 4 inch RETURN air hose, with the exception of
insulation installation.
4. Remove and discard cap and install 3inch PVC Socket Connection (5267835).
5. Connect 4 inch SUPPLY air hose to top of HEC cabinet marked SUPPLY with 4 inch hose clamp
(5266749).
6. Connect 4 inch RETURN air hose to top of HEC cabinet marked RETURN with 4 inch hose clamp
(5266749).
7. Connect other end of 4 inch SUPPLY air hose to J104 on SPW and secure with 4 inch hose clamp
(5266749).
8. Connect other end of 4 inch RETURN air hose to J105 on SPW and secure with 4 inch hose clamp
(5266749).
9. Attach insulation sleeves (5225963) to SUPPLY 4 inch hose. Using black duct tape, tape the seams
between sections of insulation to prevent gaps. Insulation sleeve on RETURN is optional.
Route and connect air coolant hoses between SPW and body coil
NOTE
Figure 6-71 Air hoses between SPW and gradient coil
1. At rear of magnet, install two 1.5 inch, 6 meter long, Air Hoses (46-282666P18) on the two sockets.
Final position of hoses will be under bridge.
2. The Air Y-Fitting (5344836) can be positioned to within 2 feet (588mm) of the end of the overhead
cable trays close to the rear of the magnet. Route each 1 1/2 inch air hose into overhead cable trays,
cut to length if necessary, and attach to Air Y-Fitting with 1 1/2 inch hose clamp (5127523) on each
hose.
3. Secure each air hose to rear flange of magnet using provided tie-wraps.
4. Route 4 inch Air Hose (46-282666Pxx) in overhead cable tray and attach to Air Y-fitting with 4 inch
hose clamp (5266749).
5. At J104 waveguide on SPW, cut air hose to length and attach to waveguide with 4 inch hose clamp
(5266749).
6. Attach insulation sleeves (5345246) to 1 1/2 inch hose from end bell to Y-fitting. Using black duct
tape, tape the seams between sections of insulation to prevent gaps.
7. Attach insulation sleeves (5225963) to 4 inch hose from SPW to Y-fitting. Using black duct tape,
tape the seams between sections of insulation to prevent gaps.
8. Air Filter (5290917) should have been installed with SPW and attached with Hose Clamp
(5263772-3).
Route and connect air hose between blower box and rear endbell
This hose is installed to provide air for patient comfort.
NOTE
Figure 6-72 Installing patient comfort air hose
1. At rear of magnet, install 3 inch, 3 meter long, Patient Air Hose (5213158) on the top of the rear end
bell. Secure with 3 inch hose clamp (5265190).
2. Route entire length of 3 inch air hose into overhead cable trays and attach to PVC Reducer
(5198521) with 3 inch hose clamp (5265190).
3. Route 4 inch, 11 meter long, Air Hose (5199506-2) in overhead cable tray and attach to PVC reducer
with 4 inch hose clamp (5266749).
4. At the blower box, cut patient comfort air hose to length and attach to the left side flange labeled
Patient Air with 4 inch hose clamp (5266749).
Route and connect air hose between blower box and rear pedestal
NOTE
The rear pedestal air hose is only installed on MR450w, MR450w GEM, and Artist T systems.
Figure 6-73 Installing rear pedestal air hose
1. Route 4 inch, 14 meter long, RF HUB Air Hose (5199506-3) in overhead cable tray to rear pedestal.
2. Attach hose to socket on rear pedestal with 4 inch hose clamp (5266749).
3. Secure air hose to rear flange of magnet using provided tie-wraps.
4. At the Blower Box, cut rear pedestal air hose to length and attach to the right side flange labeled RF
HUB Air with 4 inch hose clamp (5266749).
Installation Manual 6.20 In-Room Display (IRD) installation - GEM style enclosure
6.20 In-Room Display (IRD) installation - GEM style

enclosure
This section provides installation procedures for installing the cables, brackets, and monitor for the GEM
system.
Table 6-2 Required Hardware
Step Part Number Description Quantity

1 2109873-14* M4 X 10 screw 1
3 2109867-15* M6 X 25 hex socket head 1
cap screw
7 * Brass M10 x 16 screw nut 1
2109878-4* M10 Flat Washer 1
9 1000-M6C040-31 M6 X 40 hex socket head 2
cap screw
3002-M6C-31 M6 hex nut 2
14 2109873-24 M6 X 12 screw 1
* Fastener comes pre-attached to referenced assembly
Figure 6-74 Install brackets and cables
1. Attach Cable Tie Mount base (46-208746P9) to plate with one (1) M4 X 10 screw (2109873-14)
Installation Manual 6.20 In-Room Display (IRD) installation - GEM style enclosure
2. Air sensor bracket should be attached to plate.

3. Attach Run M3366 to arm with one (1) M6 X 25 hex socket head cap screw (2109867-15). Do not
tighten at this time.
4. Route the ground wire and fiber optic cable adjacent to main cable, one on each side. Do not tie
wrap either one to the tie mount. Both are to remain free sliding.
5. Slide tie-wrap through the mount to hold cable in place. Do not tighten.
6. Route fiber optic cable to top of magnet and connect to J28 on the fiber optic I/O board.
7. Connect the monitor cable assembly ground wire to the front ground stud using one (1) Brass M10 x
16 screw nut and one (1) M10 Flat Washer (2109878-4).
8. Locate the IRD Pivot Assembly (5394815).
9. Attach the IRD Pivot Assembly to IRD mounting plate using two (2) M6 X 40 hex socket head cap
screws (1000-M6C040-31) and two (2) M6 hex nuts (3002-M6C-31).
10. Route cable marked MAG-TRACK BALL 1 to the left side of the front of magnet.
11. Route cable marked MAG-TRACK BALL 2 to the right side of the front of magnet
12. Route cable marked MAG-J2 to the top of the magnet and connect to J2 on the magnet I/O board.
Figure 6-75 Install IRD monitor
13. Remove cable clamp from Run M3366 cable assembly. Insert a small screwdriver into the side of the
clamp that says Open until clamp releases.
14. Attach the cable clamp to the pivot assembly with one (1) M6 X 12 screw (2109873-24).
15. Locate the IRD monitor. Loosen, but do not remove, the top two screws on back of monitor.
16. Remove the two bottom screws on the back of the monitor and position monitor on IRD monitor
mounting plate.
17. Apply Loctite 242 to mounting screws.
Installation Manual 6.21 In-Room Display (IRD) installation - MR450w
18. Fasten the two bottom screws and tighten the two top screws to secure monitor to mounting plate.
Tighten with hex wrench #3.
19. Secure cable assembly into cable clamp on top of bracket and close clamp to secure cable.
20. Connect the three Run M3366 cables: ground, fiber optic, and power, to the back of the monitor.
6.21 In-Room Display (IRD) installation - MR450w

For systems installed with In-Room Display (IRD), the IRD monitor, Operator Control Panels (OCP), and
Run M3366 need to be installed and connected to the pre-routed cables.
NOTE
Two people are required to perform this procedure.
Install IRD components
If magnet does not have ground stud available for connecting IRD ground wire, make sure to follow
alternate ground wire attachment step below.
Figure 6-76 Attach Run M3366
1. Attach Cable Tie Mount base (46-208746P9) to plate with M4 X 10 screw (2109873-14).
NOTE
The Mount should be angles at about 45 degrees as shown.
2. Attach Run M3366 to Arm with (1) M6 X 25 hex socket head cap screw (2109867-15). Do not tighten
at this time.
3. Route the ground wire and fiber optic cable adjacent to main cable, one on each side. Do not tie
wrap either one to the tie mount. Both are to remain free sliding.
4. Slide tie-wrap through the mount to hold cable in place. Do not tighten.
5. Remove Cable Clamp from Run M3366 cable assembly. Insert a small screwdriver into the side of
the clamp that says Open until clamp releases.
Figure 6-77 Attach IRD mounting brackets
6. Pass the A end of the pivot bracket through the Interface Cover (5182762). (CAUTION: Do not pass
the B end, it will tear)
7. Fasten with (4) M4 x 20mm screws (2109867-6) and (4) M4 washers (2109867-6). Add Loctite 242.
Using a number 3 Allen, tighten screws.
8. Attach the cable clamp to the IRD mount (5435410-3) with M6 X 12 screw (2109873-24).
Figure 6-78 Secure Run M3366 to flexible housing
9. On the monitor interface cover, carefully turn inside-out the flexible tube housing to the other side
of the cover.
NOTE
Take special care, the flexible tube housing material can tear easily.
10. Pass connectors and tubing of Run M3366, the Scan Room Monitor Control cable (5149629),
through the monitor interface cover. Fasten together with tie-wrap to secure the cable assembly to
the interface cover. Trim excess from tie-wrap
11. After securing cables to the monitor interface cover, carefully return the flexible tube housing to its
original position,
Figure 6-79 Secure Run M3366
12. Tighten screw holding cable block to arm assembly.

13. Secure the tie-wrap around the gray cable only (through cable tie mount) of the scan room monitor
control cable assembly, Run M3366.
Figure 6-80 Attach bracket
14. Snap cable assembly into cable clamp on top of bracket and close clamp to secure.
15. Fasten the interface cover to the monitor mount board with (4) M6 x 16 screws (2109867-13) and 4
nylon washers (2229794).
Figure 6-81 Install laser mounting bracket
NOTE
If previously removed, reinstall the laser-mounting bracket (5178328) to the ring arm
using (2) M6 nylon washers (2229794) and (2) M6 x 16 screws (2109867-13).
16. Start right screw and washer. Slide bracket over slot. Add left screw. Be careful of wire position
when adding screws so they aren’t crimped behind bracket.
17. Route cable under IRD interface cover and out through the slot in the interface cover.
18. Tighten bracket with #5 Allen wrench.
Figure 6-82 Connect ground wire
19. Connect the monitor cable assembly ground wire to the front ground stud using (1) Brass M10 x 16
screw nut & (1) M10 SS washer (2109878-4). Note: An alternate ground stud is located on other side
of IRD mounting brackets.
NOTE
If above ground block is not available, the ground wire can be attached to the alternate
ground connection point on the magnet mounting ring using a M10 x 12mm Socket Head
Cap Screw, as shown above, at time of passive shimming when the front end bell is
removed.
Figure 6-83 Run M3366 cable connections
20. Route cable marked MAG-J2 to the top of the magnet and connect to J2 on the magnet I/O board
21. Route fiber optic cable to top of magnet and connect to J28 on the fiber optic I/O board
22. Route cable marked MAG-TRACK BALL 1 to the left side of the front of magnet
23. Route cable marked MAG-TRACK BALL 2 to the right side of the front of magnet
24. Attach cables to the magnet using cable clamps to ensure proper placement on the magnet.
Install IRD monitor

Figure 6-84 Monitor components
1. Locate the IRD Monitor.

2. Remove the top cover on the back of the monitor by pushing in at the arrows and sliding upwards.
3. Remove the two bottom screws on the back of the monitor.
4. Loosen, but do not remove, the top two screws on back of monitor and position monitor on IRD
mount plate.
5. Apply Loctite 242 to mounting screws.
6. Fasten the two bottom screws and hand tighten the two top screws to secure monitor to mounting
plate. Tighten with hex wrench #3.
7. Hand tighten the two top screws, then tighten with hex wrench #3.
8. Connect the three Run M3366 cables: ground, fiber optic, and power, to the back of the Monitor.
9. Replace top cover on to monitor.
Install left and right operator control panels
NOTICE
Take special care in connecting Runs M3366 and Estop cable. Any reverse connection of
these 9-pin Sub-D connectors will mean at system power-on it will not be possible to
recover the system from E-Stop condition.
Figure 6-85 Control panel installation
1. Locate the first Operator Control Panel (OCP).

2. Fasten to right front cover using the provided five M4 screws and M4 washers.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for installing the second OCP to the left front cover.
4. Connect emergency stop cables to Estop connector on left and right front covers.
5. Run M3337 will be connected to left and right OCP marked J1.
6. Run M3366 will be connected to left and right OCP marked Trackball.
Installation Manual 6.22 LED display installation
Install front covers

Figure 6-86 Front covers components
1. Do not install washers when installing the four (4) M6 x 16 screws (2109867-13) that fasten the two
inside tabs of each front cover to the magnet.
2. Move Left Front Cover (5328961) to front of magnet and attach front cover to magnet using M10 x
25mm hex socket screws and M10 washers (46-294167P73) on all screws except the two that
attach the inside tabs as noted in Step 1.
3. Move Right Front Cover (5328960) to front of magnet and attach front cover to magnet using M10 x
4. Secure together left and right front covers at top and bottom of covers using M10 washers and M10
x 25mm screws.
5. Install vacuum port cover.
6. Attach left and right Front Trim Rings (5177586 & 5177586-2).
7. Install Front Bridge Cover (5328959) using provided fasteners.
8. The Laser Cover (5182894) will be installed, using the provided fasteners, after the dock is adjusted
and secured.
6.22 LED display installation

The LED display is only applicable to MR450w non-GEM installations.
For systems installed with LED display, the LED monitor and Operator Control Panels (OCP) need to be
installed and connected to the pre-routed cables.
NOTE
Two people are required to perform this procedure.
Remove monitor interface cover
Figure 6-87 Monitor interface cover
1. Unfasten the four screws attaching rubber interface cover to mounting plate.
2. Discard monitor interface cover and fasteners.
Install LED display
NOTE
Do NOT install any washers that may be supplied with the LED Display kit of components.
Figure 6-88 Display installation
1. Place the LED Display Bracket (5343349) over the mounting screws holes. Install, but do not tighten,
the upper two socket head cap screws.
2. Install the lower two socket head cap screws. Tighten all four socket head cap screws.
3. Attach Magnet Side LED Display Strap (5346326-2, 100vmm long) to mounting plate.
4. Route and connect Run M3349 to J4 and Run M3363 to J5 on back of LED Display Panel (5343350).
5. Attach LED display panel to bracket using four screws.
6. Attach Display Side LED Strap (5346326, 160mm long) to bezel using one screw.
7. If not already installed, attach Display Bezel Mounting Brace (5344837) to bezel using one screw.
8. Route Display Side Strap (5346326), that is attached to bezel, through hole in LED Display Panel
(5343350) and connect to magnet side strap.
NOTE
Complete the following two steps for fit and alignment. When complete, the bezel has to
be removed. It will be reinstalled after the front covers are installed later in this
procedure.
9. Attach Bezel (5346325) to LED Display Panel by carefully pressing and engaging the four poppers.
10. Fasten the Display Bezel Mounting Brace (5344837) to the magnet ring.
Install left and right OCPs
1. Locate the first OCP.
Figure 6-89 Control panel installation
2. Fasten to right front cover using the provided five M4 screws and M4 washers.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for installing the second OCP to the left front cover.
4. Connect emergency stop cables to Estop connector on left and right front covers.
5. Run M3337 will be connected to left and right OCP marked J1.
Install front covers
NOTICE
The front covers are heavy. Avoid awkward body positioning. Use proper lifting techniques
when handling covers.
Figure 6-90 Front cover components
1. Do not install washers when installing the four M10 x 25mm hex socket screws (2109867-13) that
fasten the two inside tabs of each front cover to the magnet.
2. Move Left Front Cover (5328961) to front of magnet and attach front cover to magnet using M10 x
3. Move Right Front Cover (5328960) to front of magnet and attach front cover to magnet using M10 x
4. Secure together left and right front covers at top and bottom of covers using M10 washers and M10
x 25mm screws.
5. Install LED display cover as instructed in the last two steps in Install LED display on page 188.
7. Attach left and right Front Trim Rings (5177586 & 5177586-2).
8. The Laser Cover (5182894) will be installed, using the provided fasteners, after the dock is adjusted
and secured.
Installation Manual 6.23 Dock installation
6.23 Dock installation

Removing bridge support shipping bracket
The yellow shipping bracket should have been removed from front of magnet prior to this. If still in place,
remove bracket.
Figure 6-91 Shipping bracket removal
Attach dock to magnet


1 1000-M10C020-33 M10 x 20 Socket Head 4
Screw
2000-M10-17 M10 Stainless Steel Wash- 4
ers
1000-M10C025-33 M10 x 25 Socket Head Cap 2
Screws
5372304 M10 Flat Side Washers 2
3 * 11mm washers 1
8 2109878-4* M10 Flat Washer 1
Figure 6-92 Dock installation preparation
1. Make sure dock mounting bracket is securely attached to the magnet legs.
Install the Bridge Support Magnet Mount Assembly (5337932-2) to bridge lower support, using four
(4) M10 x 20 Socket Head Screws (1000-M10C020-33) and M10 Stainless Steel Washers (2000-
M10-17).
And attach the assembly to magnet feet with two (2) M10 x 25 Socket Head Cap Screws (1000-
M10C025-33) and two (2) M10 Flat Side Washers (5372304).
Figure 6-93 Install Bridge Support Magnet Mount
NOTICE
Make sure that the bottom surface of the Dock Mounting Bracket, only by the magnet
feet, does not come in contact with the magnet room floor (recommend a 2 mm
minimum clearance).
2. If floor anchor stud was removed, reinstall in the floor.
3. Start with two (2) 11mm washers on each mounting stud, both sides, between dock and dock
support. If adjustment is required, add or remove washers until proper gap is achieved.
NOTE
Make sure that the left side cable mounting bracket is detached from cables before
routing the cables through the lower dock mounting bracket.
4. Cables will be routed through lower dock mounting bracket as dock is moved into place.
Figure 6-94 Install dock
5. Position dock in front of magnet and align Rubber Pad (2230001) under dock.
6. Move dock into position on studs and place the remaining washers equally on each of the four
mounting studs.
7. Fasten with provided nuts, one on each mounting stud.
8. Fasten Dock to floor anchor stud with pre-installed fastening hardware using the one (1) Dock
Clamp Plate (2178874) and one (1) M10 Flat Washer (2109878-4). Apply Loctite 242 as required.
NOTE
If adjustment is required for alignment of patient table, refer to calibration and setup
procedures on the Service Methods DVD until proper gap is achieved.
9. Important
The height of the floor anchor stud must not exceed 2 inches (50mm) from the top of the
dock clamp plate to the top of the anchor stud. If the height is exceeded, inform
customer so that the responsible RF room vendor returns to the site to make the
appropriate alterations to meet the requirements contained in the applicable Pre-
installation manual.
On each side, adjust brackets as needed and tighten screws.
Dock cable connections - left side
NOTE
Care should be taken to not pinch cables between dock assembly and magnet dock mounting
brackets.

1 46-318508P20* M10 x 25 screws 2
2109878-4* M10 Flat Washer 2
2109875-4* M10 Hexagon Nut 2
Figure 6-95 Left side cables (system with RRX shown)
NOTE
Systems with DPP receivers have a different bracket than shown.
1. Attach cable mounting bracket on magnet leg using two (2) M10 x 25 screws (46-318508P20), M10
Flat Washers (2109878-4) and M10 Hexagon Nuts (2109875-4). Cables from dock are pre-
connected to bracket.
2. Insert and loop excess cable length through hole at front of magnet leg.
3. Make sure cables are routed behind cover mounting bracket. This is required to install front skirt
cover.
NOTE
Refer to applicable cable map for routing and connecting of cables to left side cable
mounting bracket and cables routed along the right side to the rear pedestal. For Artist
and Artist XT systems, the Dock does not have cabling to the rear pedestal. Instead, dock
cables are connected to the DPP receivers and Rx distribution module according to the
cable map.
4. Make sure you can slide the dock away from the magnet with the routed and connected dock
cables.
Installation Manual 6.24 Route and connect cables in magnet room
5. From the SRI, route and connect Runs M3341 (for 32/32 systems only) to J1 (and J4 for GEM) and
Run M3370 to J2. Route and connect Run M3364 from J5 on the magnet I/O panel at top of magnet
to J3.
6. Dress and secure cables.
Dock cable routing - right side (systems with RRX receivers)
Refer to applicable cable map for cable connections to the rear pedestal.
NOTE
For Artist and Artist XT systems, the dock does not have cabling to the rear pedestal.
NOTE
Care should be taken to not pinch cables between dock assembly and magnet dock mounting
brackets.
Figure 6-96 Right side cables
1. For MR450w, MR450w GEM, and Artist T systems, route cables from dock through bottom opening
of Bridge Support Magnet Mount Assembly as shown.
2. Continue routing cable under magnet towards the rear pedestal.
• The non-GEM cable connections are described in the following section.
• For the GEM Dock cables are routed and connected as marked to RFSB1 (slot 1) and RFSB2 (slot
2).
6.24 Route and connect cables in magnet room

Route cables in overhead cable routing mechanisms
Front, rear, left, and right, as used in this section, are defined as follows:
• The patient entrance end of the magnet is the front
• The opposite end is the rear

• Left and right are in respect to a person’s left and right while facing the patient entrance end of the
magnet
Refer to applicable magnet room cable map for location and routing of the remaining cables.
Figure 6-97 Routing of cables in overhead trays
2. Route cables from pen panel closet towards magnet. Excess cable length will be stored in pen panel
closet.
3. Refer to the following sections for connections and routing of cables around the magnet.
Cable separation at rear pedestal connection
For optimal performance of system, the I and Q cables (Runs M1322 and M1323) must be spaced a
minimum of 75 mm (3 inches) from cables exiting the cable tracks from the LPCA and 30mm (1.2 inches)
from the temperature Sensor cable routed from the gradient coil and cable to which it attaches, Run
M3344.
To maintain this separation, the cables are wrapped in foam insulation, pre-routed, and connected.
Figure 6-98 I and Q cable separation
1. Maintain the loop as installed. Do not alter routing.

2. Confirm no cables are looped on or against foam-insulated I & Q cables. Proper separation must be
maintained between these cables and any other cable.
3. Do not cut any cable ties.
Connect Runs to magnet I/O panel and MAG-DDSPLIT
Hex nuts are attached to the cable I/O panel which are used to mount routed cables to the panel.
Figure 6-99 Magnet I/O cable connections
1. Route and connect Runs M3031, M3302, M3303, M3312, and M3313 to I/O panel as marked.
2. If IRD is installed, route and connect Run M3314 to J2.

3. If IRD is installed, fiber optic Run P2026 will be secured at J11 and connected to J28 at Fiber Optic
I/O Panel.
NOTE
Locate Run P2026 on position 3.
4. Route Run M1310 from PEN Panel J72 and connect to J9 on MAG-DDSPLIT module.
Route and connect cables to MAG-TDM (MR450w, MR450w GEM, Artist T)
Figure 6-100 TDM module cable connections
1. If Run M3368, TDM to receiver 2, is installed, make sure it is routed under the three cables
connected in the next step.
2. Refer to applicable cable map to route and connect the following Runs on the side of the magnet to
MAG-TDM: M1302 and either:
• (For SRPS only) Runs M3300 and M3301
• (For eSRPS only) Runs M3376 and M3377
3. Make sure cables are not pinched or subject to damage by sharp edges.
4. Route and connect Run M1315 to antenna in rear pedestal.
Route and connect cables to receivers (MR450w, MR450w GEM, Artist T)

Figure 6-101 RRX cable connections
1. Connect Runs M3320 and M3321 to RRX #1. Route other ends to rear pedestal PED-HUB.
2. Route Run M2300 to rear pedestal PED-HUB.
3. If system being installed is a 32 channel, connect Runs M3322 and M3323 to RRX#2. Route other
ends to rear pedestal PED-HUB.
Route and connect cables to Rx distribution module (Artist and Artist XT)
Figure 6-102 Rx distribution module
1. Route and connect Runs M1366, M1367, M1368, M1369, M1369, M3367, M3368 and M3470
between the Rx distribution and the DPP receivers as marked. Use the cable management rings and
tie wraps to secure cables together along the side of the magnet.
2. Route and connect Runs M1302, M1303, M1304, M3316, M3375 and M3391 between the Rx
distribution module and the PEN wall as marked.
3. Route and connect Run M1315 from Rx Dist-J11 to rear pedestal TNS antenna.
4. Connect fiber optic Run P2006 to Rx Dist-J16. This cable is routed to fiber optic I/O J23 on the top of
the magnet and through the fiber optic waveguide on the PEN wall.
Figure 6-103 Magnet fiber optic I/O
5. Route and connect Run M1335 from Rx Dist-J13 to MAG-AMP-J11.

6. Connect the M3355 Table Interface Cable (P/N 5759270) to Rx Dist-J57.
7. Route and connect the Dock P2 cable harness to the table interface cable as marked.
8. Route and connect M3355 from rear pedestal table interface J6 to the table interface cable as
marked.
Figure 6-104 M3355 Table Interface Cable (5759270)
1 Rx Distribution J57
2 PED-TIF J6
3 MAG-Table HART ID (DPP2-J1/J2/J3 and Dock P2)
9. Route and connect the M3380 cable harness from Rx Dist-J58 to MAG-BORE-J9, MAG-AMP-J9, and
MAG-DTRSW-J20.
Route and connect cables to DPP receivers (Artist and Artist XT Only)
Figure 6-105 DPP receivers
Figure 6-106 DPP cable connections
1. Connect fiber optic Run P2004 to DPP1–J6, DPP1–J9, and DPP2–J6. This cable is routed to fiber
optic I/O J21 on the top of the magnet and through the waveguide on the PEN wall.
2. Connect fiber optic Run P2005 to DPP2–J9, DPP3–J6, and DPP3–J9. This cable is routed to fiber
optic I/O J22 on top of the magnet and through the waveguide on the PEN wall.
3. Connect fiber optic Run P2006 to DPP4–J6 and DPP4–J9.
4. From the rear pedestal, route and connect the cable marked for DPP1–J1/J2/J3. Other ends connect
to rear pedestal I/O J1, LPCA P1, and Load B in the rear pedestal.
5. From the dock P2 cable harness, route and connect the cable marked for DPP2–J1/J2/J3.
8. Route M3392 from PEN wall J57 to the BNC connectors on the MEMS cable management panel on
the magnet. Connect M3392 to the blue BNC cables from dock cable bundles P3 and P4, and from
LPCA P1. Only three connections are used on this system.
Figure 6-107 MEMS cable management panel (for cable Run M3392)
Route and connect cables to MAG-HYB and MAG-DDSPLIT

Figure 6-108 MAG-HYB and MAG-DDSPLIT connections
1. Route and connect Run M1335 from OUT on pre-amp to either:

• (For MR450w systems)
• Slot 1 B1 on rear pedestal PED-HUB (for 16/0 or 32/0 systems)
• J7 on rear pedestal PED-RBOX (for 32/32 systems)
• (For MR450w GEM and Artist T systems) slot 1, RFSB2 - body
• (For Artist and Artist XT systems) RX DIST-J13.
2. Run M1312 was routed from PEN Panel J74. Connect to J6 on MAG-HYB.
3. Route Run M1001 from J106 on SPW and connect to J1 on MAG-HYB. Secure cable to rear magnet
surface with provided cable ties.
Route and connect cables to rear pedestal
NOTE
A minimum 18 inch (458 mm) service loop must be provided between the magnet and the
rear pedestal. This is required for service of the magnet.
Figure 6-109 Routing of cables at rear of magnet
NOTE
Artist and XT systems do not include an RF Hub in the rear pedestal. Connections to the RF
Hub are only made on MR450w, MR450w GEM, and Artist T systems.
1. (For SRPS only) Install Shunt Connector (5183786) to Slot 12 J3 before connecting any cables to rear
pedestal.
2. On the right side (as viewed from front of magnet) of rear flange route the following Runs. Tie-wrap
cables to pre-installed tie-wrap mounts located along outer edge of rear flange surface. Refer to
cable map for connection designations in rear pedestal.
• (For MR450w, MR450w GEM, and Artist T systems) M1001, M1303, M1304, M1305, M1306,
M3311, M3315, and M3316.
• (For Artist and XT systems) M1305, M3311, and M3315. Also secure M1001 to the rear flange
with tie-wraps.
3. (For MR450w, MR450w GEM, and Artist T systems) Route on left side (as viewed from front of
magnet) of rear flange the following Runs: M2025 and either:
• (For SRPS only) M3304, M3306, M3308, and M3310
• (For eSRPS only) M3375
4. Tie-wrap cables together as shown. Attach to pre-installed tie-wrap mounts located along outer
edge of rear flange surface.
NOTICE
Trim cable tie-wraps to prevent accidental cuts.

5. Make sure cables are routed between trim skirt mounting bracket and magnet.
Figure 6-110 Rear pedestal left side cable connections (MR450w, MR450w GEM, Artist T)
6. (For MR450w, MR450w GEM, Artist T) Refer to cable map to route and connect the following cables
to Slots 11 and 12 and either:
• (For SRPS only) M3304, M3306, M3308, and M3310,
• (For eSRPS only) M3375
and (For MR450w GEM and Artist T) Run 3354 connects to J8 on Slot 11
Secure cables with cable clamps on side of rear pedestal leg.
7. Route and connect Run M1315 to antenna.
8. If system being installed is a 32/32 channel, Route and connect Runs M3373 and M3354 to J9 and
J10 on PED-RBOX.
9. IMPORTANT! For 450w, 450w GEM, and Artist T, make sure that the 8w8 Port A cable is dressed
and routed between rear pedestal and magnet as shown. Do not route next to TDM antenna or in
close proximity to Run M1315 cable.
Figure 6-111 Rear pedestal right side cable connections (MR450w, MR450w GEM, and Artist
T shown)
10. (For MR450w only) If system being installed is a 32/32 channel, route and connect Runs M1330,
M1331, M1332, M1333, and M1335 to PED-RBOX as marked.
NOTE
If system being installed is a 32/0 or a 16/0, Run M1335 is connected Slot 1 B1 on PEN-
HUB.
11. Connect one end as marked of Run M3344 to gradient temperature cable. Connectors must be
covered with Velcro wrap. Insure adequate spacing from Runs M1322 and M1323 as described
previously in Cable separation at rear pedestal connection on page 197.
12. Route and connect RF cable Run M1305 to J1 on PED-I/O bracket. For MR450w, MR450w GEM, and
Artist T, also route and connect Run M1306 to J2 on PED-I/O bracket.
13. (For 450w, 450w GEM, Artist T) Route and connect Runs M3320 and M3321 to J101 and J102 on
PED-HUB.
14. (For 450w, 450w GEM, Artist T) If system being installed is a 32/32 channel, route and connect Runs
M3322 and M3323 to J103 and J104 on PEN-HUB.
Installation Manual 6.25 Install fiber optic cables
Route and connect Run M3354 (MR450w, MR450w GEM, Artist T only)
Figure 6-112 Installing Run M1354 (MR450w, MR450w GEM, Artist T only)
1. Connect to J9 located on RF Bias cable at front of magnet.

2. Route cable to rear pedestal and connect to Slot 11 J8 on PEN-HUB.
3. If 32/32-channel system is installed, connect remaining connector to J10 on PED-RBOX.
6.25 Install fiber optic cables

Figure 6-113 PGR cabinets on page 210 shows the different PGR cabinets that may be delivered to your
site, depending on your system.
Figure 6-113 PGR cabinets
• For the older style of cabinet which contains the XGD gradient amplifiers and the cronus module,
complete procedures in Equipment room fiber optic installation for systems with XGD on page 212,
then proceed to Magnet room fiber optic installation on page 225 for completion of fiber optic cable
installation in the magnet room.
• For the newer style of cabinet which contains the XG2 gradient amplifiers without the cronus
module, complete procedures in Equipment room fiber optic installation for systems with
XG2 on page 218, then proceed to Magnet room fiber optic installation on page 225 for completion
of fiber optic cable installation in the magnet room.
Refer to Cable Locations in Equipment Room Overhead Cable Trays on page 113 for location of cables
routed in equipment room and Cable Locations in Magnet Room Overhead Cable Trays on page 116 for
location of cables in magnet room in the overhead cable trays. Make sure cables are in their designated
areas of the trays.
WARNING
LASER RADIATION HAZARD

Invisible laser radiation can be emitted from disconnected fiber-optic cables or
connectors.
Do not stare into the beam, point the cable or connector ends at your eyes, or view
through optical instruments.
NOTICE
POTENTIAL COMPONENT DAMAGE

Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can cause permanent damage to electronic components.
Observe the following ESD precautions:
Work on a static-free mat.
Wear a static strap to ensure that any accumulated electrostatic charge is discharged
from your body to the ground.
Create a common ground for the equipment being worked on by connecting the
static-free mat, static strap, and peripheral units to that piece of equipment.
NOTICE
POTENTIAL COMPONENT DAMAGE

The SFP optical transceiver is very sensitive to ESD. SFP latent failures can occur, in dry
climates or low relative humidity, surpassing their ESD protection.
Contaminant failures can occur in SFP optics and exposed glass Rx and Tx cable ends. Do
not touch the exposed ends on fiber connectors. Leave the dust caps in place until you are
ready to install the SFP module. Use the Fiber Optics Cleaning Kit to clean both the SFP
and cable end every time they are replaced or swapped from one port to another, or when
using a loopback. When working with the SFP optical transceiver:
Always use ESD protection when handling the SFP optical transceiver to prevent early
failure.
Always keep a protective cap on unplugged fiber connections.
The SFP must be shipped in antistatic packaging. Discard any SFP shipped or stored
without proper ESD protection.
For more information on handling and cleaning the SFP transceiver refer to Fiber Optic
Cable Devices Installation and Replacement.
NOTICE
Fiber optic cables are easily damaged. Poorly routed cables cause intermittent system
problems. Handle and route fiber optic cables very carefully. Do not bend cables to radius
smaller than 7 inches (178 mm) or 14 inches in diameter (356 mm).
Equipment room fiber optic installation for systems with XGD

Figure 6-114 Fiber optic cable map (MR450w and MR450w GEM System with XGD)
Routing cables from magnet room

1. Route M2025 in overhead tray from top of magnet, through fiber optic waveguide in Pen panel to
Pen cabinet.
2. Route P2003 from J20 and P2004 (32 channel only) from J21 on fiber optic I/O panel on top of
magnet, through fiber optic waveguide in Pen panel, through J20 at top of Pen cabinet to PGR
cabinet.
3. Route P2026 (if IRD is installed) from J28 on fiber optic I/O panel on top of magnet, thru fiber optic
waveguide in Pen panel, through J20 at top of Pen cabinet to OW.
4. Route E2002, E2020, and E2023 from top of Pen cabinet to PGR cabinet.
Route and connect fiber optic cables to PGR cabinet

Figure 6-115 Top of PGR cabinet
1. Starting at the Pen cabinet, route fiber optic Runs P2003, P2004, E2002, E2020, and E2023 through
overhead cable trays to top of PGR cabinet.
2. Connect cables as marked to fiber optic connection panel at top of PGR cabinet.
3. Route fiber optic wires through opening as shown.
4. Secure in place with clamps.
Figure 6-116 Fiber optic connectors
5. Route fiber optic wires in PGR cabinet behind guides.

6. These fiber optic connections are installed by pressing on each side of connector, not the boot,
while inserting.
Figure 6-117 Connect fiber optics at front of cabinet
7. For connections that do not provide space for fingers on the side, place a flat blade screwdriver
between wire covers and insert using a small amount of force.
NOTE
Use caution as applying excessive force can sever glass fibres protruding from connect
ends.
Refer to fiber optic cable map at front of this section for remainder of steps.
8. Connect to GMC J7 as marked.
9. (For systems with CAM) Connections to ICN are at the back of the ICN module. Pull module forward
and connect applicable single fiber optic to J5 on each VRF card (two cards for 32 channel).
10. Connect double fiber optic cable to J1 on the back of ICN for each VRF card.
11. Connect applicable marked fiber optics to J8, J11, J13, and J14 to CAM slot 7F at front of CAM
module.
12. Connection for CAM slot 10R is at back of CAM module. Pull module forward and connect to J18/
J19.
Route and connect fiber optic cables in Pen cabinet

Route and connect fiber optic cables as shown below.
Figure 6-118 Top of Pen cabinet
1. Runs P2003, P2004, and P2026 routed through opening at top of cabinet.
2. Connect E2002, E2020, and E2023 to top of Pen cabinet as marked.
Figure 6-119 Secure fiber optic wires inside Pen cabinet
3. Route and secure with tie-wraps Run M2025 to side of cabinet.
4. Route and secure with tie-wraps Runs E2002, E2020, and 2023 to side of cabinet.
Figure 6-120 Connect fiber optic wires in Pen cabinet
5. Connect fiber optic wires as marked to the CFB module.

6. Connect fiber optic wires as marked to the Exciter module.
7. J37/J38 is located on the back of the PHPS module. Refer to next steps for access and connection of
wire.
8. On magnet room side of Pen panel, unfasten the 16 fasteners attaching the access plate to the Pen
panel.
NOTE
Cables are attached on the interior side of the access plate.
9. Remove access plate enough to reach in and connect M2025 wire to J37/J38.
10. Reattach access plate to Pen panel.
Route and connect fiber optic cable in operator workspace

NOTE
This cable is installed only if system has In-Room Display (IRD) as part of installation.
Figure 6-121 Cable connection in OW cabinet
1. Route and attach fiber optic connector to bracket at rear of GOC cabinet.
2. Route and connect P2026 wire to J3 on IRD module.
Equipment room fiber optic installation for systems with XG2

Figure 6-122 Fiber optic cable map (system with XG2 and CAM)
Figure 6-123 Fiber optic cable map (Artist T)
Figure 6-124 Fiber optic cable map (Artist and Artist XT)
Routing cables from magnet room

1. Route M2025 in overhead tray from top of magnet, through fiber optic waveguide in Pen panel to
Pen cabinet.
2. Route P2003 to Fiber Optic I/O panel J20 (MR450w, MR450w GEM, Artist T) or J21 (Artist/XT). on top
of the magnet. Route through the fiber optic waveguide in Pen panel, through J20 at top of Pen
cabinet to PGR cabinet.
3. Route P2004 to Fiber Optic I/O panel J21 (MR450w and MR450w GEM with 32 channels only) or J22
(Artist/XT) on top of the magnet. Route through the fiber optic waveguide in Pen panel, through J20
at top of Pen cabinet to PGR cabinet. Artist T systems do not have P2004.
4. (For Artist and Artist XT) Route P2006 to Fiber Optic I/O panel J23 on top of the magnet. Route
through the fiber optic waveguide in Pen panel, through J20 at top of Pen cabinet to PGR cabinet.
5. Route P2026 (if IRD is installed) from J28 on Fiber Optic I/O panel on top of magnet, through fiber
optic waveguide in Pen panel, through J20 at top of Pen cabinet to OW.
6. Route E2020 (MR450w, MR450w GEM) or P2020 (Artist/T/XT) from top of Pen cabinet to PGR
cabinet.
7. (For MR450w, MR450w GEM) Route E2023 from top of Pen cabinet to PGR cabinet.
Route and connect fiber optic cables to PGR cabinet

Figure 6-125 Top of PGR cabinet
1. Starting at the Pen cabinet, route fiber optic Runs P2003, P2004, P2006, E2020 or P2020, and E2023
(as applicable to the system) through overhead cable trays to top of PGR cabinet.
2. Connect cables as marked to fiber optic connection panel at top of PGR cabinet.
3. Route fiber optic wires through opening as shown.
4. Secure in place with clamps.
Figure 6-126 Fiber optic connectors
5. Route fiber optic wires in PGR cabinet behind guides.

6. These fiber optic connections are installed by pressing on each side of connector, not the boot,
while inserting.
Figure 6-127 Connect fiber optics at front of cabinet
7. For connections that do not provide space for fingers on the side, place a flat blade screwdriver
between wire covers and insert using a small amount of force.
NOTE
Use caution as applying excessive force can sever glass fibres protruding from connect
ends.
Refer to fiber optic cable map at front of this section for remainder of steps.
8. (For systems with CAM) Connections to ICN are at the back of the ICN module. Pull module forward
and connect applicable single fiber optic to J5 on each VRF card (two cards for 32 channel).
9. (For systems with CAM) Connect double fiber optic cable to J1 on the back of ICN for each VRF card.
10. (For systems with CAM) Connect remaining fiber optics to J8, J11, J13, and J14 in CAM Slot 7F at
front of CAM module.
11. (For systems with CAM) Connect double fiber optic cable to J10/J11 in CAM Slot 10F at front of
module.
12. (For systems with ICE) Connect P2003 fiber optic cable ends to ICE J1/J2/J5 as marked.
Route and connect fiber optic cables in Pen cabinet

Route and connect fiber optic cables as shown below.
Figure 6-128 Top of Pen cabinet
1. Runs P2003, P2004, and P2026 (as applicable to the system) routed thru opening at top of cabinet.
2. Connect E2020 and E2023 to top of Pen cabinet as marked.
Figure 6-129 Secure fiber optic wires inside Pen cabinet
3. Route and secure with tie-wraps Run M2025 to side of cabinet.

4. Route and secure with tie-wraps Runs E2020 and E2023 to side of cabinet.
Figure 6-130 Connect fiber optic wires in Pen cabinet
5. Connect fiber optic wires as marked to the CFB module.

6. Connect fiber optic wires as marked to the Exciter module.
7. J37/J38 is located on the back of the PHPS module. Refer to next steps for access and connection of
wire.
8. On magnet room side of Pen panel, unfasten the 16 fasteners attaching the access plate to the Pen
panel.
NOTE
Cables are attached on the interior side of the access plate.
9. Remove access plate enough to reach in and connect M2025 wire to J37/J38.
10. Reattach access plate to Pen panel.
Route and connect fiber optic cable in operator workspace

NOTE
This cable is installed only if system has In-Room Display (IRD) as part of installation.
Figure 6-131 Cable connection in OW cabinet
1. Route and attach fiber optic connector to bracket at rear of GOC cabinet.
2. Route and connect P2026 wire to J3 on IRD module.
Magnet room fiber optic installation

Figure 6-132 Top of magnet fiber optic cables
1. Route and attach Run P2003 fiber optic connector to J20 on Fiber Optic I/O bracket on magnet.
2. Route and attach Run P2004 fiber optic connector to J21 (as applicable to the system) on Fiber
Optic I/O bracket.
3. If IRD is installed, route and connect Run P2026 to fiber optic connector at J28 on I/O bracket. Run
P2026 should already been routed through J11 on magnet I/O bracket.
Figure 6-133 Connect fiber optics to PAC and rear pedestal
NOTICE
Fiber optic cables are easily damaged. Poorly routed cables cause intermittent system
problems. Handle and route fiber optic cables very carefully. Do not bend cables to
radius smaller than 7 Inches (178 mm) or 14 inches in diameter (356 mm).
4. Route M2025 at rear of magnet along side of cables routed on left side of rear magnet flange (as
viewed from front of magnet) to rear pedestal. Make sure conduit is routed behind skirt cover
bracket. For MR450w, MR450w GEM, and Artist T only, connect fiber optic cable M2025-D to PED
HUB SLOT 11 - J14/J15 as marked. For other systems (Artist and Artist XT), leave fiber optic cable
M2025-D unconnected and secured on the system.
NOTE
Secure in place with tie-wraps after all system cables have been connected and adjusted
for cable service loop to rear pedestal.
5. IMPORTANT! Do not route any cables on magnet in area indicated by diagonal shading. The service
ladder side shield needs this area clear when it is used for servicing the magnet.
6. Route and connect wire M2025-C to J1 on PAC.
7. Route P2003 fiber optic wires over top of magnet and connect to appropriate receivers as marked.
Installation Manual 6.26 Pneumatic patient alert installation
• RCVR #1 J4/J5 (MR450w, MR450w GEM)

• RCVR #1 J4 and RCVR #2 J4 (Artist T)
• DPP1–J6/J9 and DPP2–J6 (Artist and XT)
8. (For MR450w/MR450w GEM with 32 channels, Artist, and Artist XT) Route P2004 over top of magnet
and connect to appropriate receivers as marked.
• RCVR #2 J4/J5 (MR450w and MR450w GEM with 32 channels)
• DPP2–J9 and DPP3–J6/J9 (Artist and XT)
9. Route and connect wires M2025-A and M2025-B marked J11/J12 and J13/J14 to SRI.
10. (For Artist and XT) Route P2006 over top of magnet and connect to DPP4–J6/J9 and Rx Distribution-
J16 as marked.
11. Coil and tie-wrap excess fiber optic cable so that the bend radius is not smaller than 7 inches (178
mm) or 14 inches in diameter (365 mm). Too small of a bend radius will damage wires. Excess fiber
optics can be tie-wrapped as shown or coiled and stored on floor under magnet. Refer to Cable
Specification table in Chapter 8, Appendix on page 327 for minimum bend radius of each cable wire.
6.26 Pneumatic patient alert installation

The customer and users should be involved in the following decisions:
• Routing of Pneumatic Tubing
• Location of Control Box
NOTICE
Do not substitute other types of tubing for the pneumatic tubing supplied with this
Installation Kit. Substitution of other types of tubing may cause a control box malfunction.
Magnet room routing of pneumatic tubing

NOTICE
Make sure that pneumatic tubing is not routed where it can be stepped on, pinched, or
have an object set on it. The control box alarm will not work if pneumatic tubing is
pinched. Also, make sure that the pneumatic tubing can be routed from the PAC connector
through the overhead cable tray, and to the Penetration Panel without being pinched
along the route by other cables.
Figure 6-134 Routing of pneumatic tube
1. Push end of pneumatic tubing onto PAC tubing connector located on left side of magnet.
2. Route tubing along path of fiber optic wires and secure in place with tie wraps.Do not over-tighten
tie-wraps. Tubing must not be deformed or kinked.
NOTE
If the pneumatic tubing is to be pulled through fiber-optic conduit, coat with baby
powder, not grease, to allow easier pulling.
3. Route pneumatic tubing from PAC, through the overhead cable tray to waveguide on penetration
panel.
4. Route end of pneumatic tubing from magnet room side of penetration panel through wave guide,
through the fiber optic opening at the top of the Pen cabinet to where the control box will be
installed.
5. Refer to Determining need of extender box on page 228 to determine if extender box is required. If
extender box is not required, route pneumatic tubing through overhead cable tray in equipment
room to control box location.
Determining need of extender box

If installation requires greater than 115 feet of pneumatic tubing between the squeeze bulb (hanging on
Magnet Enclosure) and control box (near Operator’s Console), Extender Kit, 46-317758P2, must be
ordered.
• If the pneumatic tubing is long enough to reach control box: The extender is not needed,
proceed to Control box installation on wall or under shelf on page 230, Control Box Installation.
• If the pneumatic tubing is not long enough to reach control box: The extender is needed,
proceed to Installation of Extender Kit 46-317758P2 (if required) on page 229, Installation of
Extender Kit.
Installation of Extender Kit 46-317758P2 (if required)
DANGER

Extender box contains ferrous parts and will be strongly attracted to the magnet and
become a dangerous projectile.
Do not mount extender box in magnet room.
Install extender box

Figure 6-135 Component installation
1. Choose the mounting location for extender box on equipment room wall next to penetration panel.
Extender box will be mounted with pneumatic and electrical jacks on side of extender box.
2. Cut a two inch long piece of Velcro loops and a two inch long piece of Velcro hooks. Both are
obtained from the Pneumatic Patient Alert Kit.
3. Clean the back of extender box, remove protective paper from back of Velcro loops, and attach
Velcro to center of extender box back.
4. Clean wall in the area where extender box will be mounted, remove protective paper from back of
Velcro hooks, and attach Velcro to wall in same orientation as Velcro loops on extender box.
5. Push end of pneumatic tubing fully onto feed-thru connector on extender box.
6. Push the jack on one end of the 65 foot extender wire into the plug on side of extender box.
Connection of extender wire to control box

Figure 6-136 Extender wire connection
1. Route the extender wire from extender box to control box. Control box will be installed near
operator console, within five feet of an electrical outlet.
2. Push the jack at other end of extender wire into the plug on back of control box.
Control box installation options

Consult with the operator in choosing the mounting orientation for the control box. Some key factors to
consider are ease of use by operator, remaining within sight of operator, and remaining within five feet
of an electrical outlet. Choose one of the following control box locations:
• Mount control box on a wall or other vertical surface per procedures in Control box installation on
wall or under shelf on page 230, Control Box Installation on Wall or Under Shelf.
• Mount control box under shelf per procedures in Control box installation on wall or under
shelf on page 230, Control Box Installation on Wall or Under Shelf.
• Place Control Box on a counter top, desk top, or other horizontal surface. Set the control box near
operator console and within five feet of electrical outlet. Control box should be placed within sight
of operator. Proceed to Final connections to control box on page 234, Final Connections to
Control Box.
NOTE
The installer must provide additional mounting hardware if supplied screws or adhesive
backed Velcro are not adequate for installation of the control box.
Control box installation on wall or under shelf

1. Clean control box surface.
2. Remove adhesive backing from metal nameplate and apply over silk screened lettering as shown.
Figure 6-137 Apply nameplate
3. Select one of the following for installation of control box:

• If control box will be mounted to wall or shelf with Velcro, go to Control box mounted with
Velcro on page 231.
• If control box will be mounted to wall with screws, go to Installing control box with mounting screws
on vertical surface on page 232.
• If control box will be mounted to shelf with screws, go to Installing control box with mounting
screws under shelf on page 232.
Control box mounted with Velcro

Figure 6-138 Apply Velcro
1. Clean the bottom surface of the control box.

2. From the Pneumatic Patient Alert Kit, cut a three inch long piece of Velcro loops and a three inch
piece of Velcro hooks.
3. Remove protective paper from back of Velcro loops, and attach Velcro to center bottom of control
box.
4. Choose the mounting location for control box on wall (or under shelf) next to operator console.
Control box should be mounted within sight of operator.
5. Clean the area where control box will be mounted.
6. Remove protective paper from back of Velcro hooks and attach to mounting location in same
orientation as Velcro on box.
7. Mount the control box by pressing Velcro on control box against Velcro on mounting location and
twisting slightly.
8. Proceed to Final connections to control box on page 234, Final Connections to Control Box.
Installing control box with mounting screws on vertical surface

Choose the mounting area near the operator console and install mounting screws (item 9). Control box
should be mounted within sight of operator.
NOTICE
If mounting on the wall, confirm with the site that no unforeseen hazards exist beneath
the surface.
Figure 6-139 Vertical surface installation
1. Determine which of the shown keyhole slot spacings are applicable to control box and select
appropriate dimensions to use.
2. Mark top mounting hole position on wall.
3. Mark bottom mounting hole position on wall.
4. Drill a 1/16 in. pilot hole at locations if furnished screws are used.
5. Install screws to depth as shown.
6. Center box keyhole slots over screws, push in on box, and then push downward to seat screws
within slots.
7. Tighten or loosen screws as necessary to obtain a snug fit of box against wall.
Installing control box with mounting screws under shelf

Choose the mounting area near the operator console and install mounting screws (item 9). Control box
should be mounted within sight of operator.
Figure 6-140 Under shelf installation
1. Determine which of the shown keyhole slot spacings are applicable to control box and select
appropriate dimensions to use.
2. Mark front mounting hole position on underside of shelf.
3. Mark rear mounting hole position on underside of shelf.
4. Drill a 1/16 in. pilot hole at locations if furnished screws are used.
5. Install screws to depth as shown.
6. Center box keyhole slots over screws, push in on box, and then push inward to seat screws within
slots
7. Tighten or loosen screws as necessary to obtain a snug fit of box against wall.
Final connections to control box

Figure 6-141 Control box connections
1. Bring the pneumatic tubing to back of control box and mark length. Leave two inches of extra
pneumatic tubing for connection.
2. Cut tubing and push fully onto feed-thru connector on back of control box.
3. Plug power supply jack into control box.
4. Set power supply to outlet voltage (115VAC or 230VAC).
5. Plug power supply into AC outlet.
6. Check that green LED is lighted.
Squeeze bulb installation

The following steps should be completed after the side covers have been installed.
Figure 6-142 Tube connection to PAC module
Installation Manual 6.27 Bridge and rear pedestal installation
1. Insert end of pneumatic tubing into squeeze bulb approximately 1/2 inch (13 mm). For ease of
pneumatic tubing insertion, pinch pneumatic tubing in one hand while squeezing squeeze bulb and
pushing pneumatic tubing in with the other hand. This will create a positive pressure and expand
squeeze bulb opening.
2. Before cutting pneumatic tubing from roll to length required, verify that when the squeeze bulb is
held by a patient being scanned, the tubing length can be routed to the Call connector on the PAC
Interface without getting in the way of operator or patient during use.
3. Connect end of tubing to Call connection on PAC interface.
6.27 Bridge and rear pedestal installation

WARNING

If the magnet is energized, ferrous material will be strongly attracted to the magnet and
may become dangerous projectiles.
The wheel assemblies attached to the Rear Pedestal for shipping and delivery MUST be
removed before moving Rear Pedestal into Magnet Room.
Bridge front support for HM Magnet

The Bridge front support is an assembly of three brackets:
Figure 6-143 Bridge front support brackets
1. Bridge Support Upper Assembly (5335143-2)

2. Bridge Support Lower Assembly (5334546)
3. Bridge Support Magnet Mount Assembly (5337932-2).
NOTICE
Make sure that after all final adjustments have been made and all fasteners tightened that
no part of the bridge support assembly is in contact with the magnet surface.
Bridge front support for IPM magnet


2 1206-M10C020-33* M10 screws 1
2001-M10-17* M10 Stainless Steel Wash- 1
ers
1000-M10C025-33* M10 x 25 Socket Head Cap 1
Screws
5372304* M10 Flat Side Washer 1
1. Remove shipping bracket

2. Fix Bridge Support Magnet Mount Assembly (5337932-3) to item 2 using M10 screws (1206-
M10C020-33) and M10 Stainless Steel Washers (2001-M10-17). Fix Bridge Support Magnet Mount
Assembly (5337932-3) to magnet feet, using, M10 x 25 Socket Head Cap Screws (1000-
M10C025-33) and M10 Flat Side Washers (5372304).
Figure 6-144 Shipping bracket removal
Z-direction bridge alignment

Align the bridge in the Z-direction (in/out of the magnet bore) until front surface of bridge aligns with
front surface of end bell to within +/- 3mm.
Figure 6-145 Z-direction alignment
1. Alignment to front end bell is done by pushing or pulling bridge with support upper attached which
allows the L-Brackets to slide toward or away from the magnet.
2. When aligned, tighten the four M10 screws attaching L-bracket to the support lower.
NOTE
If more adjustment is needed for the Z-axis adjustment, loosen the four bolts (two on
each side) holding the support lower to the bridge support magnet mount assembly.
3. Move the support lower until the +/-3mm bridge-to-end bell alignment has been achieved.
4. Re-tighten bolts.
Attach rear pedestal to magnet
CAUTION
POTENTIAL INJURY HAZARD

Weight of rear pedestal
Rear pedestal requires at least THREE people to move rear pedestal into position at rear of
magnet.

2 3002-M10C-33* M10 SS nut 4
ers
3 1000-M10C025-33 M10 x 25 Socket Head Cap 4
Screws
ers
4 3002-M10C-33 M10 SS nut 2
er
6 3002-M10C-33* M10 SS nut 4
ers
7 3002-M10C-33 M10 SS nut 4
ers
Figure 6-146 Attaching front and rear split bridge
1. Before attaching rear pedestal, perform a preliminary check on the Y-direction distance at the front
and rear of the bridge. Refer to Y-direction bridge alignment (front of magnet) on page 240, Y-
Direction Bridge Alignment, for instructions on setting required distance between bridge and top
of the patient bore.
2. Remove four (4) M10 SS nuts (3002-M10C-33) and four (4) M10 Stainless Steel Washers (2000-
M10-17) from studs on front split bridge.
3. Attach Magnet Bracket (5343250) to rear magnet mounting blocks using four (4) M10 x 25 Socket
Head Cap Screws (1000-M10C025-33) and two (2) M10 Stainless Steel Washers (2000-M10-17) on
each screw. Do not tighten as adjustment may be needed.
NOTE
For IPM Magnet, please use Magnet Bracket (5822217)
4. Attach Rear Pedestal Bracket (5343248) to two studs on rear pedestal using two (2) M10 SS nuts
(3002-M10C-33) and M10 Stainless Steel Washers (2000-M10-17).
5. Move the rear pedestal closer to rear of magnet and adjust leveling feet to align top of rear split
bridge with top of front split bridge in magnet bore.
6. Move rear pedestal forward and engage four studs on front split bridge. Secure with the previously
removed M10 SS nut (3002-M10C-33) and M10 Stainless Steel Washer (2000-M10-17). Remove
from bridge.
Figure 6-147 Installing lower bracket
7. (For For HM series magnet) Using four (4) M10 SS nuts (3002-M10C-33) and M10 Stainless Steel
Washers (2000-M10-17), connect 5343250 and 5343248 with Mounting Bracket plate (5343249).
Do not tighten until bridge and table are completely adjusted.
(For For IPM magnet) Using four (4) M10 SS nuts (3002-M10C-33) and M10 Stainless Steel Washers
(2000-M10-17), connect 5822217 and 5343248 with Mounting Bracket plate (5429470). Do not
tighten until bridge and table are completely adjusted.
NOTE
Cables are routed below the bracket. Air hose is routed on top of bracket as shown in
following illustration.
Y-direction bridge alignment (front of magnet)
Figure 6-148 Maintain spacing from floor
1. Important
Make sure that the lower bridge support magnet mount assembly surface, only by the
magnet feet, does not come in contact with the magnet room floor (recommend a 2 mm
minimum clearance).
Figure 6-149 Y-direction alignment
2. Align the bridge in the Y-direction (up/down in the magnet bore) to within 582 mm - 585 mm using
the bridge height gauge (delivered to site packaged with Dock assembly) at the front of the magnet.
3. Make sure the distance measured is between the top of the RF body coil and the bridge surface
under the belt.
4. Adjust the M10 Nylon nuts at the bottom of the bridge support upper bracket to raise and lower
bridge to attain the 582 mm - 585 mm distance in between the top surface of the RF body coil and
the surface under the belt on the bridge.
5. A level can be used to make sure bridge is level in the X-direction. Adjust M10 nylon nuts as
necessary.
6. Tighten the two (2) M10 bolts and the M10 nylon hex nuts on each side.
Rear split bridge height adjustment (rear of magnet)
Refer to Y-Direction Bridge Alignment for distance between bridge and top of the RF Coil.
NOTE
The bridge does not need to be “level” to Earth in the Z-direction in achieving the alignment of
bridge surfaces. Therefore, you do NOT need a level at this point of the installation, you DO
NEED a straight edge. (Though you can use a level as a straight edge)
Figure 6-150 Rear bridge height adjustment
1. Use a straight edge to make sure that the front and rear bridge surfaces, on both sides of bridge
where the LPCA wheels roll, are even. This will provide smooth travel for the Carriage wheels. If
uneven, refer to next step.
2. Align the bridge in the Y-direction (up/down in the magnet bore) to within 582 mm - 585 mm using
the bridge height gauge (delivered to site packaged with dock assembly) at the rear of the magnet.
3. Adjust the rear pedestal feet (by turning) to raise and lower bridge to attain the 582 mm - 585 mm
distance in between the top of the patient bore and the surface under the belt on the bridge.
4. At this point in adjusting the rear pedestal, use a level to make sure the Bridge on the rear pedestal
is level in the X-direction. Adjust rear pedestal feet as necessary.
Front and rear split bridge alignment adjustment

1 1000-M6C016-33 M6 x 16 Socket Head Screw 8
Figure 6-151 Bridge alignment adjustment
NOTE
Illustrations of the rear pedestal shows components which are not included in Artist and
Artist XT systems.
1. Install left and right rear pedestal bumpers using M6 x 16 Socket Head Screw (1000-M6C016-33)
fasteners, four (4) at the right side and four (4) at the left side .
NOTE
Gap between rear split bridge and left and right rear pedestal bumpers should be
uniform along entire length.
2. Adjustment for left and right rear pedestal bumpers is made by loosening four fasteners
underneath each bumper and moving bumper until uniform gap is made.
X-direction bridge alignment

2 1000-M10C025-33* M10 x 25 Socket Head Cap 2
Screws
5372304* M10 Flat Side Washers 2
Figure 6-152 X-direction alignment
1. Align the bridge in the X-direction (left/right in the magnet bore) by shifting entire front bridge
support assembly until the distance between bridge and RF body coil is equal on both sides of the
bridge. It may be necessary to loosen the two (2) M10 bolts that fasten the bridge support assembly
to the magnet feet.
Important
Bridge must not be in contact with the RF body coil along its entire length.
2. Tighten the two (2) M10 x 25 Socket Head Cap Screws (1000-M10C025-33) and two (2) large M10
Flat Side Washers (5372304) that fasten the bridge support assembly to the magnet feet, once
adjustment is complete.
3. Check to make sure the bridge support upper assembly is not in contact with the front end bell and
the support lower is not touching the magnet. This is to ensure that there is not vibration short
circuit.
4. Reattach front bridge cover.
Bridge height adjustment
Make sure the distance between the top of the patient bore and the surface under the belt on the bridge
is between 582 mm to 585 mm at both ends of the magnet. Adjust bridge as necessary to meet
distance.
• Tighten all fastener connections on bridge and rear pedestal after adjustment is complete.
Installation Manual 6.28 LPCA installation
• Make sure the fasteners for the lower bracket between magnet and rear pedestal are tightened.
6.28 LPCA installation

The steps in the following procedure apply to all systems, though the illustrations show a non-GEM
LPCA cover and carriage.
Route and attach drive belt
NOTICE
Use care and avoid pinch points when performing drive belt installation.
Figure 6-153 Drive belt installation
1. Unfasten four screws from top of LPCA and remove top cover.
2. Route one end of drive belt delivered with front split bridge, through opening in LPCA base plate and
attach with clamp. Make sure that 3 teeth are exposed after clamp is attached.
3. Under bridge, loosen the two socket head screws on idler tension block.
4. Lower the idler tension block with pulley to its lowest position by unscrewing hex head bolt.
5. Route other end of drive belt from front of bridge towards tension pulley.
6. Feed back end of belt underneath bridge, around tension pulley and rear pulleys into bridge.
Installation Manual 6.28 LPCA installation
NOTE
Check to verify that belt is not caught around spacers near rear pulley.
7. Route belt under and through opening to top of carriage.
8. Position belt under clamp plate. There should be 15 teeth exposed past the clamp. Secure in place.
9. Tension the belt by raising the idler tension block. Turn the hex head bolt until the two socket head
cap screws are at the bottom of the slot in the idler tension block.
10. Tighten the two socket head screws.
Install LPCA cover
Figure 6-154 LPCA cover installation
1. Check all connectors and make sure they are seated properly.
2. Unfasten plastic bag from surface of LPCA and remove spring inside.
3. Set spring on cradle latch stud.
4. Carefully replace LPCA cover and fasten with four screws previously removed.
Installation Manual 6.29 SRI connections
6.29 SRI connections

Many of the cables connected to the SRI module have been completed prior to delivery of system to site.
Refer to applicable cable map for this site configuration and make sure that all cables, including those
routed during this installation, have been connected to the SRI.
Figure 6-155 SRI cable connections
1. Make sure Run M3342 is connected to J23.

2. Make sure Run M3345 is connected to J32.
3. Route Run M3346 from the cable track in the rear pedestal and connect to J31.
6.30 Emergency off connections

Overview
Two Emergency Off (E-off) pushbuttons are supplied with the system. One pushbutton is for installing in
the magnet room. The second pushbutton is optional and can be installed in the equipment or operator
room.
Refer to applicable site installation drawings for detailed wiring diagram.
Magnet room pushbutton installation
1. Connect Run M3030 to the SPW and route the cable to the remote E-off pushbutton location and
trim cable to length. Locate red and black pair and prepare ends for applicable terminals.
NOTE
Run M3030 has nine wires. Make sure to use the black and red pair when connecting to
the E-off pushbutton.
2. Connect Run E3030 to the Secondary Pen Wall (SPW) and route the cable to the Main Disconnect
Panel (MDP) and trim cable to length. Locate white and black pair of wires and prepare ends for
applicable terminals.
3. If the MDP power has been connected, have the proper personnel connect the E-off wiring. See
illustration below for reference.
Installation Manual 6.31 Route and connect Secondary Pen Wall (SPW) cables
Figure 6-156 Emergency off connections
6.31 Route and connect Secondary Pen Wall (SPW)

cables
The SPW was delivered to site and installed prior to magnet delivery.
• The gas lines, Runs 621 and 622, were routed thru the J110 and J111 waveguides when the magnet
was installed.
• The gradient cables were routed and connected to the gradient filter in a previous procedure in the
section.
• The coolant lines have been routed thru J100 and J101 waveguides.
• The 4 inch air hose from the PGR cabinet has been routed to J104 waveguide.
Refer to cable map and connect remaining cables to SPW after grounding and leakage test has been
completed.
Figure 6-157 SPW cable connections
1. (For MR450w, MR450w GEM, and Artist T) Route and connect Run M3309 to J123 on the transmit
switch.
Installation Manual 6.32 Route and connect penetration panel cables
2. Not used. There are no connections to J107 and J108 at this time.
3. Route and connect Runs M3022 and M3023 from MagMon to J116 and J117.
4. Route and connect Run M3030 from E-Off Switch to J115.
5. Route and connect Run E3031 from GOC to J118.
6. Remove safety cover. Route and connect Run 623 to F1 and F3. Replace safety cover.
6.32 Route and connect penetration panel cables

The site can have either of the following two types of Pen panels delivered to be installed: SRPS or
eSRPS. Follow the instructions for the applicable Pen panel installed at this site.
• Penetration panel with SRPS. Refer to SRPS Pen panel cable connections on page 249
• Penetration panel with eSRPS. Refer to eSRPS Pen panel cable connections on page 251
Figure 6-158 SRPS and eSRPS penetration panels
SRPS Pen panel cable connections

1. The blower box hoses and cables should have been installed and connected in previous procedures.
Figure 6-159 Pen panel for SRPS connections
2. Connect cables to TR/DD Filter: M1310 (J72) and M1312 (J74).

3. Connect cables to access panel:
• Top Row - M1302 (J29), M1304 (J30), M1303 (J32), M3316 (J34)
• Middle Row - M3310 (J45), M3306 (J46), M3308 (J47), M3304 (J48).
• Bottom Row - M3313 (J35), M3311 (J36), M3303 (J39), M3302 (J40), M3312 (J41), M3315 (J54),
M3314 (J42) (option)
4. Make sure the middle row cables are routed in the correct orientation, connected, and secured in
place with straps as shown.
5. Connect TDM power cables: M3300 (J51), M3301 (J52)
eSRPS Pen panel cable connections

Figure 6-160 Pen panel for eSRPS connections
1. The blower box hoses and cables should have been installed and connected in previous procedures.
2. Connect cables to TR/DD Filter: M1310 (J72) and M1312 (J74).
3. Connect cables to access panel:
• Top row - M1302 (J29), M1304 (J30) M1303 (J32) M3316 (J34 for MR450w/MR450w GEM/Artist
T, or J56 for Artist/Artist XT)
• Middle row - M3313 (J35) M3311 (J36) M3303 (J39) M3302 (J40) M3312 (J41) M3315 (J54)
M3314 (J42) (option)
• Bottom row - M3378 (J111, GEM and Artist/T/XT only), M3375 (J112)
• MEMS subpanel (Artist and XT) - M3391 (J55), M3316 (J56), M3392 (J57)
Software version DV29.1 and later introduces support for a non-MEMS system configuration.
Existing or upgraded systems will continue to use the MEMS power supply. Newly installed or
upgraded systems may not have the MEMS power supply. Identify the presence or absence of
MEMS on your system by looking for the MEMS DC Power Supply Assembly (part number
6859128) in the power supply rack of the ISC.
Installation Manual 6.33 Installation of magnet enclosure rear covers for MR450w
6.33 Installation of magnet enclosure rear covers for

MR450w
NOTICE
The rear covers are heavy. Avoid awkward body positioning. Use proper lifting techniques
when handling covers.
NOTE
The lower skirt cover is shown in the view below, but is not installed at this time.
Figure 6-161 Enclosure rear covers
1. Attach the left rear cover using the three M10 x 25mm hex head cap screws (2109867-23) and three
M10 nylon flat washers (46-294167P73) fasteners.
2. Install two M10 button head screws (2109872-12) and nylon flat washer (46-294167P73) at these
two locations.
Installation Manual 6.34 Coil and dress cable in penetration panel closet
3. Attach the right rear cover. Refer to steps 1 and 2.

4. Attach the rear cable cover (not shown) using the two screws and nylon washers provided in the
mounting holes.
6.34 Coil and dress cable in penetration panel closet

Inside the Pen panel closet, there are cable hooks for the purpose of storing excess cable lengths.
1. Separate, coil, and neatly dress any excess cable lengths and place them on available hooks.
2. Refer to Storage of Excess Cable Length on page 110 for information on coiling cables.
Figure 6-162 Storage of excess cable lengths
7
7 Final Enclosure Installation for MR450w
7.1 Install Enclosure Covers

Install Skirt Covers
Install the left and right side lower Skirt Covers as shown in the following steps.
Figure 7-1 Installation of Skirt Cover
1. Position cover on magnet.

2. Attach using two socket head cap screws and washers.
3. Attach cover to popper.
NOTE
Rear skirt covers have one popper, front skirt covers have two poppers.
4. Repeat above steps for remaining three covers.
Installation Manual 7.1 Install Enclosure Covers
Install Side Covers

Figure 7-2 Installation of Side Covers
1. Install the Right Top Cover Assembly (5335653) and then the Right Side Cover Assembly (5328957).
2. Hold the handles away from the enclosure when installing the Left Top Cover Assembly (5335654).
3. Make sure that the alignment tabs are properly slotted under the right side's slot.
4. Make sure the tab is properly placed.
Figure 7-3 Installation of Left Side Cover
5. Hold the sides of the Lower Cover and align the round feet with the front and rear cover ovals.
Route the PPG cable attached to PAC through the opening in the side cover. Snap in place.
6. Coil and place PPG cable on hook.
7. If connection points and symbols are not aligned properly, proceed to next sections for adjustment
procedures.
Adjust Cover Fit
After installing the top and side covers, adjustment will most likely be required to adjust the gap spacing
between the top & side covers and the front & rear covers.
Figure 7-4 Check for Gaps
1. Observe and measure gaps at front and rear of enclosure between the covers. Only front view is
shown in illustration.
2. Remove top and side covers.
Figure 7-5 Adjustment Points
3. To adjust front and rear covers, turn the adjusting screws up or down to achieve proper height.
4. Install top and side covers again and check gap for uniformity.
5. Repeat above steps as necessary until uniform gap is achieved.
Adjust PAC Interface Panel
The PAC Interface panel can be adjusted in three directions. The five ports on the Interface Panel should
be centered in the opening of the cover. It is suggested that the top cover be removed during this
process. This will make the adjustments easier.
Figure 7-6 Adjustment Locations
1. In/out direction
2. Side to side direction
3. Up/down direction
Figure 7-7 Check Fit of Interface Panel
4. Remove top cover and reinstall side cover.

5. Check Interface panel for alignment gaps and center location in cover opening.
6. Remove side cover and adjust Interface Panel as necessary.
7. Repeat adjustment process until Interface Panel is centered and there are no gaps between side
cover and Interface Panel.
8. Install top cover (not shown) and side cover.
Installation Manual 7.2 Install Cable Curtain at Top of Magnet (Optional)
Install Rear Pedestal Covers


2000-M6-17 M6 Washers 8
Figure 7-8 Installation of Rear Pedestal Covers
1. Obtain the bag of fasteners that is taped to the inside of the Left Rear Pedestal Cover. This bag
contains all the mounting fasteners for the Rear Pedestal Bumpers and Covers.
2. Install the Right Rear Pedestal Bumper (5328946) and Left Rear Pedestal Bumper (5328947) using
four (4) M6 x 16 Socket Head Screws (1000-M6C016-33) and M6 Washers (2000-M6-17) on each
bumper.
3. Move rear pedestal covers into place.
4. Attach with the remaining five (5) M6 x 16 Socket Head Screws (1000-M6C016-33).
7.2 Install Cable Curtain at Top of Magnet (Optional)
Overview
If the site has designated that the Curtain Cover Kit (5376552) is to be installed, the two Curtain Rails
(5376547) should have already been positioned and installed in the drop-down ceiling. The following
procedure provides instructions for cutting to length the curtain and installing it on the curtain rail. The
Curtain and associated installation parts were delivered with the Curtain Cover Kit prior to the delivery
of the components that are installed using the following procedure steps.
Installation of Cable Curtain (Optional)

Measure for Length of Curtain
1. Measure the distance from the ceiling to the top covers of the magnet.
2. Alternative Measuring Method - Measure the distance from the ceiling to the top of the magnet
cylinder and subtract 212mm.
Figure 7-9 Curtain Measurement
Cut Curtain to Length

1. Measure the length of curtain to be installed for both Front and Back curtain.
2. Cut curtains to length.
Figure 7-10 Measure and Cut Curtain
Attach Weight Bars to Curtain

Curtain weight bars are to be installed at the bottom of the Front and Back curtains as indicated in
illustration below.
1. Measure and mark the indicated location distances below on the inside of each curtain.
2. Position each of the different size A, B, and C Curtain Weight Bars and mark the mounting holes for
each.
3. Create a small hole in the curtain at each mounting hole location.
4. Attach the A, B, and C bars to the curtain by inserting a Plastic Pin Clip (5241226-3) thru the hole in
the curtain into the mounting holes of each bar.
Figure 7-11 Installation of Curtain Weights
Attach Curtain to Rail

The views below show the enclosure side, top, and cable covers installed. It may be preferable to install
the curtain covers with these covers removed.
1. Install Front cover first. Align the right hand edge of curtain with gap in ceiling rail velcro.
2. Align top edge of curtain flush with velcro as curtain is being wrapped around to the left side.
3. Install Rear Cover. Start on right hand side with overlap on Front Curtain.
4. Wrap around back to left hand side.
Installation Manual 7.3 Install Laser Alignment Light Warning Label
Figure 7-12 Installation of Curtain
7.3 Install Laser Alignment Light Warning Label

The magnet enclosure is shipped with a label in English attached below the laser light.
Installation Manual 7.4 Patient Transport Installation
Figure 7-13 Warning Labels
1. A sheet of Laser Alignment Light Warning Labels has been supplied with the magnet, attached to
the magnet bridge. An example of one of the labels on the sheet is shown above.
2. For those sites which require a label other than English, peel off the appropriate label and affix over
the English label at the laser light location.
7.4 Patient Transport Installation

Patient Transport is shipped covered with protective cardboard which should remain in place until ready
to be moved into the magnet room. Cover table with plastic previously removed when checks and
adjustments are completed.
NOTE
If hardware fastening procedures for installation of the dock and support brackets were
followed, the hardware used to fasten the dock and dock supports was left loose. The loose
hardware permits a quick and easy dock centering adjustment with table docked.
Installation Manual 7.4 Patient Transport Installation
Figure 7-14 Patient Transport
1. Unlock casters and move Patient Transport to magnet room for adjustments and function checks at
the dock.
2. Remove protective plastic sheet from table.
3. Perform mechanical procedures in MR Service Methods DVD, Adjustments and Calibrations: Patient
Table
NOTICE
All Patient Transport covers must be installed after all adjustments, calibrations, and
functional checks have been completed. The front cover is used to depress switch on dock
that establishes table type.
8
8 Final Enclosure Installation for MR450w GEM and
Artist Systems
8.1 Installation of enclosure cover brackets

For clarity, installed components and cables are not shown on the following illustrations.
The installation procedures for MR450w GEM and Artist systems are the same. However, some
illustrations show details specific to the MR450w GEM (such as the side electronics plate and rear cover
middle mount on the left side of the magnet).
Install enclosure side frames

1 1000-M10C080-33 M10 x 80 mm HSHC Screws 2
2000-M10-17 M10 Stainless Steel Flat 2
Washers
3 1000-M10C025-33 M10 x 25 Socket Head Cap 2
Screws
Washers
4 1000M10C040-33 M10 x 40mm HSHC Screw 2
1000-M10C030-33 M10 x 30 Socket Head 2
Screws
5372304 M10 Flat Side Washers 2
Washers
3002-M10C-31 M10 Stainless Steel Nuts 4
Installation Manual 8.1 Installation of enclosure cover brackets
Figure 8-1 Top side frame
1. Locate the Right Side Enclosure Top Frame (5410286-2) and mount to L-Brackets using two (2) M10
x 80 mm HSHC Screws (1000-M10C080-33) and M10 Stainless Steel Flat Washers (2000-M10-17) at
each end as shown.
NOTE
For IPM Magnet, please locate the Right Side Enclosure Top Frame (5401955-2)
2. Position the Middle Support Frame (5414810) between magnet mounting block and top frame.
NOTE
For IPM Magnet, please position the Middle Support Frame (5414810-9500)
3. Fasten to mounting block using two (2) M10 x 25 Socket Head Cap Screwss (1000-M10C025-33)
and M10 Stainless Steel Flat Washers (2000-M10-17).
NOTE
For IPM Magnet, please use two (2) M10 x 25 Socket Head Cap Screws (1000-
M10C025-33) and M10 Stainless Steel Washers (2000-M10-17).
4. Fasten Middle Support Bracket to Top Frame using two (2) M10 x 40mm HSHC Screws
(1000M10C040-33) at the top, two (2) M10 x 30 Socket Head Screws (1000-M10C030-33) at the
bottom, two (2) M10 Flat Side Washers (5372304) at the top as shown, six (6) M10 Stainless Steel
Flat Washers (2000-M10-17), and four (4) M10 Stainless Steel Nuts (3002-M10C-31).
NOTE
For IPM Magnet, Fasten Middle Support Bracket to Top Frame using four (4) M10 x 40mm
HSHC Screws (1000-M10C030-40) at the top and bottom, two (2) M10 Flat Side Washers
(5372304) at the top as shown, six (6) M10 Stainless Steel Flat Washers (2000-M10-17),
and four (4) M10 Stainless Steel Nuts (3002-M10C-31).
5. Repeat above steps for installing Left Side Enclosure Top Frame (5410286).
NOTE
For IPM Magnet, please Repeat above steps for installing Left Side Enclosure Top Frame
(5401955)
Install enclosure mid cover brackets for HM Magnet


1 5407301-12* M20 x 115mm Adjusting 1
Screw
3001-M20C-37* M20 Stainless Steel Hex Nut 1
2 1000-M10C025-31 M10 x 25mm HSHC screw 2
ers
5406021 M10 x 50mm fiberglass flat 2
washer
3 5304319* M10 x 60mm Nylon Grub 2
Screw
3000-M10C-40* M10 Brass Nut 2
6 1000-M10C020-31* M10 x 20mm HSHC Screw 1
2000-M10-30* M10 Nylon Washer 1
1000-M10C030-31* M10 x 30 mm HSHC Screw 1
2000-M10-30* M10 Nylon Washer 1
8 5407301-12* M20 x 115mm Adjusting 1
Screw
3001-M20C-37* M20 Stainless Steel Hex Nut 1
Figure 8-2 Right side mid bracket assembly
1. At each end of the Right Side Cover Bracket (5415974), install an M20 x 115mm Adjusting Screw
(5407301-12) and a M20 Stainless Steel Hex Nut (3001-M20C-37) at the two locations indicated.
The distance will be adjusted when the covers are installed in later procedures.
2. Fasten the Right Side Cover Bracket to the right side Cross Bar Bracket (5415975) using two (2) M10
x 25mm HSHC screws (1000-M10C025-31), two (2) M10 Stainless Steel Washers (2000-M10-17),
and two (2) M10 x 50mm fiberglass flat washers (5406021).
3. At the two locations indicated, install M10 x 60mm Nylon Grub Screw (5304319) and M10 Brass Nut
(3000-M10C-40).
Figure 8-3 Right side mid bracket installation
4. The Spacer Suspension Block (5410704) will be placed between the Magnet and the Rear Cover
Fixture Plate (5410705).
5. Install the Spacer Suspension Block and the Rear Cover Fixture Plate to the magnet.
6. Install the Cross Bar assembly. For the front location, use a M10 x 20mm HSHC Screw (1000-
M10C020-31) and M10 Nylon Washer (2000-M10-30). For the rear location, use a M10 x 30 mm
HSHC Screw (1000-M10C030-31) and M10 Nylon Washer (2000-M10-30).
7. Adjust M10 Grub screws to touch magnet for support of Cross Bar assembly.
8. Install an M20 x 115mm Adjusting Screw (5407301-12) and a M20 Stainless Steel Hex Nut (3001-
M20C-37) at location indicated. The distance will be adjusted when the covers are installed in later
procedures.
Install middle right side cover bracket for IPM Magnet

ers
washer
ers
washer
Figure 8-4 Install middle right side cover bracket for IPM Magnet
1. Locate Middle Cover Bracket (5439826-2) and position against existing bracket mounted on
magnet.
2. Fasten bracket using two (2) M10 x 25mm HSHC screws (1000-M10C025-31), two (2) M10 Stainless
Steel Washers (2000-M10-17), and two (2) M10 x 50mm fiberglass flat washers (5406021).
3. Locate left Middle Cover Bracket 5439826-2 to side plate and fasten using two (2) M10 x 25mm
HSHC screws (1000-M10C025-31), two (2) M10 Stainless Steel Washers (2000-M10-17), and two (2)
M10 x 50mm fiberglass flat washers (5406021).
Install enclosure lower cover brackets for IPM Magnet

washer
washer
Figure 8-5 Install enclosure lower cover brackets for IPM Magnet
1. Locate the Right bottom beam brackets (5438605-9000).

2. Fasten to magnet feet using four (4) M12 x 40mm HSHC screws (1000-M12C040-33) and four (4)
M12 Stainless Steel Flat washers (2001-M12-17).
3. Locate the Left bottom beam brackets 5445021-9000 and fasten to left side of magnet using four
(4) M12 x 40mm HSHC screws (1000-M12C040-33) and four (4) M12 Stainless Steel Flat washers
(2001-M12-17).
Install enclosure lower cover brackets for HM Magnet

2 1000-M10C025-31* M10 x 25mm HSHC screw 4
2000-M10-30* M10 Nylon Washers 4
3 E08-MC024-30* 1/2 -13 x 1.5” long Hex Head 4
Bolt
5405904* M12 x 70mm Fiberglass Flat 4
Washer
Figure 8-6 Right side lower bracket installation
1. Locate the following lower right side parts:

• Beam, 5411759 (1)
• Front/Rear Bracket, 5411769 (1)
• Front/Rear Bracket, 5411769-2 (1)
• L-Bracket, 5411765 (2)
2. Assemble with M10 x 25mm HSHC screws (1000-M10C025-31) and M10 Nylon Washers (2000-
M10-30).
3. Fasten to magnet legs using 1/2 -13 x 1.5” long Hex Head Bolt (E08-MC024-30) and M12 x 70mm
Fiberglass Flat Washer (5405904), one set at each leg.
Installation Manual 8.2 Installation of enclosure covers
Figure 8-7 Left side lower bracket installation
4. Repeat above steps to install right side lower bracket assembly.
8.2 Installation of enclosure covers

Enclosure covers
The following illustration is an overview of all the covers. All will be fastened to the magnets using M10 x
25mm HSHC screw (1000-M10C025-31) except the fastener for where the side covers meet. M6 x
16mm HSHC Screws (1000-M6C016-31) will be used to secure the bottom of the side middle cover and
the front and rear cover.
Figure 8-8 Enclosure cover overview
The following illustration calls out the cover names.
Figure 8-9 Naming convention for covers
NOTE
The left side front cover is the same as the right side rear cover. They are interchangeable. So
are the right side front cover with the left side rear cover.
Cutting right top cover (only for M6001AC)
When M6001AC is ordered, following procedure of cutting right top enclosure and curtain must be
followed for the sites having low ceiling requirement. Please check and confirm before cutting the
covers.
NOTE
All enclosure cutting actions must be taken out of magnet room.
There is no specific tool or released cutting tool required.

1. Find out the right top enclosure (5401624) with a cutting line marked.
Figure 8-10 5401624- Right top cover
Figure 8-11 Marked-up line location
2. Cut the enclosure along the marked-up line out of the magnet room.
3. Cut the right curtain align with the vent pipe and right top enclosure.
NOTE
Smooth the cover edges after cutting so that no sharp edges existed before installing the
covers.
Installation of top covers

2000-M10-30 M10 Nylon Washers 6
Figure 8-12 Top covers
1. With one person holding each side, lift and slide the front top cover into place.
2. Fasten in place with three (3) M10 x 25mm HSHC screws (1000-M10C025-31) and M10 Nylon
Washers (2000-M10-30) on each side.
NOTE
For both the left rear and right rear top covers, make sure the tab interfaces with the top
front cover at the seam.
3. Position the left top rear cover and fasten in place with five (5) M10 x 25mm HSHC screws (1000-
M10C025-31) and M10 Nylon Washers (2000-M10-30).
4. Position the right rear top cover and fasten in place with five (5) M10 x 25mm HSHC screws (1000-
M10C025-31) and M10 Nylon Washers (2000-M10-30).
Installation of rear magnet covers

3 1000-M6C030-31 M6 x 30mm HSHC Screws 2
Figure 8-13 Right and left rear covers
1. Position right rear cover and fasten with M10 x 25mm HSHC screws (1000-M10C025-31) and M10
Nylon Washers (2000-M10-30) at places indicated.
2. Install left rear cover and fasten using the same locations as in previous step.
Figure 8-14 Cable cover
3. Position rear cable cover and fasten with two (2) M6 x 30mm HSHC Screws (1000-M6C030-31).
4. Install left and right rear trim rings.
Installation of front magnet covers
The following illustration indicates the locations of all the M10 fasteners for installing the covers. The
illustration will be referred to in several of the following steps for location of screws to be installed.

5 Screws are pre-assemble in M4 x 14mm 5
the panel
11 1000-M6C050-33 M6 x 50 Socket Head screw 2
12 1000-M10C025-31 M10 x 25mm HSHC screws 2
2001-M10-17 withM10 Stainless Steel
Washers
Others 1000-M6C016-33 M6 x 16 Socket Head Screw 2
Figure 8-15 Front cover fastener locations
1. Position left front cover at front of magnet. Route the three cables, M3366, M3337, and the
emergency stop cable, through the opening while installing the cover.
Figure 8-16 OCP cover
2. Locate OCP cover.
Figure 8-17 Connect OCP cables
3. Fasten two (2) M10 x 25mm HSHC screws (1000-M10C025-31) and two (2) M10 Nylon Washers
(2000-M10-30).
4. Connect the three cables to the Left Control Panel (LCP) as marked. Note the two (2) M10 x 25mm
HSHC screws (1000-M10C025-31) and M10 Nylon Washers (2000-M10-30) attaching the cover to
the mounting bracket.
WARNING
PROJECTILE HAZARD
This procedure requires removal of ferrous material in close proximity to the magnet.
Keep operator control panel away from front of the magnet bore.
5. Fasten the LCP to the cover using the five (5) M4 x 14mm provided screws.
Figure 8-18 Left front cover
6. Secure the cover in place by fastening with M10 x 25mm HSHC screws (1000-M10C025-31) and
M10 Nylon Washers (2000-M10-30).
7. Repeat above steps for installing right front cover and RCP.
8. Both covers have vertical light strips attached. Refer to cable map and connect Runs M3382 and
M3383 to each light as marked. Connect these two cables to Run M3379 which has been routed
from the magnet I/O Panel. Connect the LED Switch into the opening on the front panel of the PAC.
Unscrew the switch lock nut, insert the switch into the hole, and reconnect the lock nut. Connect
the LED Switch cable, routed from the PAC, to J60 on Run M3379.
9. Connect the left and right covers with six (6) M10 x 25mm HSHC screws (1000-M10C025-31) and
M10 Nylon Washers (2000-M10-30).
10. Connect the left and right covers with three (3) M10 x 25mm HSHC screws (1000-M10C025-31),
two (2) M10 Stainless Steel Washers ( 2001-M10-17) and one (1) M10 Nylon Washer (2000-M10-30).
11. Install the bridge cover with two (2) M6 x 50 Socket Head screws (1000-M6C050-33).
12. Install the bridge cover with two (2) M6 x 16 Socket Head Screws (1000-M6C016-33).
13. Install left and right trim rings.
IRD cover installation

1 1000-M6C016-33* M6 x 16 Socket Head Screw 4
1. Remove the four (4) M6 x 16 Socket Head Screws (1000-M6C016-33) on the IRD bracket.
Figure 8-19 IRD outer bracket cover screws
2. Install the left and right IRD Rear Pivot Covers (5395809 and 5395808) using the four (4) M6 x 16
Socket Head Screws (1000-M6C016-33).
Figure 8-20 Install rear pivot covers
3. Install the left and right IRD Front Pivot Covers (5396352 & 5396351) using the four (4) M6 x 16
Socket Head Screws (1000-M6C016-33).
Figure 8-21 Install front pivot covers
Left and right side cover adjustments

The following illustration shows the three adjustment areas for obtaining a proper fit of the front and
rear side covers for both sides of the magnet. When adjusted properly, the middle side cover on each
side of the enclosure should install easily.
Figure 8-22 Side cover adjustment points
Figure 8-23 Side cover adjustment points for IPM Magnet
1. Mid-cover adjustment screws for side covers.

2. Front and rear cover adjustment brackets for left and right sides.
3. Lower adjustment brackets for side covers.
Installation of front and rear magnet side covers

2000-M6-10 M6 Stainless Steel Washer 1
1. Position all four covers for left and right side on their support brackets.
Figure 8-24 Front and rear side covers
2. If adjustment is necessary, refer to the three areas of adjustment in the previous procedure.
3. Fasten side covers together, as shown above, with an M6 x 16 Socket Head Screw (1000-
M6C016-33) and M6 Stainless Steel Washer (2000-M6-10).
4. Repeat steps for other side of magnet.
Installation of left and right side middle covers

Figure 8-25 Left side middle cover
NOTICE
When installing the left side middle cover, carefully thread the top PG cable through the
cable opening in the cover. The PG cable is fiber optic and should be handled with care.
1. Holding the cover on each side, lift cover up and position on the two support brackets.
2. Feed the PG cable through the opening and coil and hang on hook.
3. Fasten with an M6 x 16 Socket Head Screw (1000-M6C016-33) and M6 Stainless Steel Washer
(2000-M6-10) at bottom of cover.
4. Install right side middle cover using the above steps.
PAC alignment with cover
Check the alignment of the PAC with the enclosure in all three planes. The gap between the I/O panel
and the enclosure side cover opening should be less than 1 mm.
Figure 8-26 PAC alignment
1. There are eight screws that allow for adjustment up/down, left/right, and in/out.
2. The PAC I/O panel should be adjusted so that it lines up with the slot in the enclosure side cover
opening in the left/right and up/down plane, and adjusted in/out so the gap between the I/O panel
and the enclosure is less than 1 mm.
Bonding triangular brackets
After all the covers have been aligned and fitted, remove the side covers so that the triangular brackets
assemblies supporting the left and right top frames can be bonded.
CAUTION
POTENTIAL HEALTH HAZARD

Epoxy can be a flammable liquid and vapor. Can cause skin irritation. May be harmful if
swallowed. Contact with eyes will cause irritation.
Wear proper protective equipment. To avoid skin contact, wear neoprene of butylrubber
gloves.
Figure 8-27 Front and rear brackets
1. For left and right rear triangular brackets, insert epoxy in openings between L-bracket and spacer.
2. Insert epoxy in openings between spacer and triangular mount.
3. For left and right front triangular brackets, insert epoxy between L-bracket and triangular mount.
Installation of rear pedestal covers

Installation Manual 8.3 Cable Concealment Kit installation
Figure 8-28 Rear pedestal covers
1. Align left and right rear pedestal covers with ball studs and secure to rear pedestal.
2. Fasten the rear pedestal covers with five (5) M6 x 16 Socket Head Screws (1000-M6C016-33) at the
top of each cover and one holding both covers at the lower back).
Cable Management Kit
The GEM Cable Management Kit (5507135) should not be installed at this time. The kit should be
installed after the patient table(s) have been properly aligned.
8.3 Cable Concealment Kit installation

Overview
If the site has designated that the optional Cable Concealment Kit (5418562) is to be installed, the
ceiling rail should have already been positioned and installed in the drop-down ceiling. The following
procedure provides instructions for cutting to length the side panels and installing them on the ceiling
rail. The side panels and associated installation parts were delivered with the Cable Concealment Kit
prior to the delivery of the components that are installed using the following procedure steps
Install ceiling outer frame

Figure 8-29 Installed ceiling rail
1. The ceiling rail (inner frame) has already been installed.

Figure 8-30 Ceiling rail set screws and latch
2. Make note of the set screw and latch.

Figure 8-31 Ceiling outer frame assembly
3. Assemble the two parts of the Ceiling Outer Frame (5418432) using two (2) M6 x 16mm SS HSHC
Screws (1000-M6C016-31).
Figure 8-32 Inner and outer frame assembly
4. Lift the outer frame and slide into the inner frame as shown above.
Figure 8-33 Panel height measurement
5. Depending on ceiling height, the four side panels (Front - 5418434, Rear - 5418435, Right Side -
5418436, and Left Side - 5418437) might need to be cut to fit inside the magnet enclosure top
covers. When installed, the bottom of the covers should be a minimum of 25 mm (1inch) below the
top of the enclosure covers.
Figure 8-34 Cutting side panels to length
6. After obtaining desired length, move the four side covers outside of magnet room. Mark and cut
with circular saw. File cut edges to remove sharp corners. Repeat for all four covers.
Figure 8-35 Front and left side panel installation
7. Install the front panel. Install the left side panel. The front edge of the left side panel must be on the
outside of the front panel flange.
Figure 8-36 Rear and right side panel installation
8. Slide rear panel into place. Install the right side panel (not shown). Make sure the panel is on the
outside of the front and rear panels.
Installation Manual 8.4 PA coil installation in patient table
Figure 8-37 Gap adjustment of covers
9. Using the set screws and locknuts located at all four corners of the inner frame, adjust the outer
frame and side panels to fit into top enclosure cover opening with equal gaps all around.
Figure 8-38 Installation of ceiling nut plate
10. A Ceiling Nut Plate (5418438) will be installed at the bottom of each of the four corners.
NOTE
Make sure that the hole to be drilled will be just above the magnet enclosure top covers.
This is required for access to the screws for installation and service.
• Remove liner over double-stick tape and apply to inside flange of the front or rear panel.
• Mark where threaded hole in ceiling nut plate contacts the side panel.
• Move side panel outside of magnet room and drill a #8 (5/32 inch) hole as marked.
11. Repeat above step for all four corners.
12. Install all covers and secure together using four (4) M6 x 16 mm Pan Head Screws (2394027).
8.4 PA coil installation in patient table
Overview
This process is used to install the GEM PA coil into the patient table.
Preliminary requirements
Tools
Item Qty
Flat-head Screwdriver 1
Phillips-head Screwdriver 1
Small Phillips-head Screwdriver 1
Slip Joint Pliers or Small Crescent Wrench 1
Parts
Item FRU Part Number Qty
1.5T GEM PA Coil See FRU manual 1
Installation procedure
NOTICE
The patient table cannot be docked to the system to perform a PA Coil installation.
1. Remove the patient table from the Magnet Room, and lock the wheels on the table to prevent it
from moving.
2. Locate the front of the patient table and the buttons. Push the button labeled 1 down toward the
floor while pushing the button labeled 2 in.
Figure 8-39 Location of table buttons
3. Continue pushing in both buttons, and pull the cradle toward you until a click is heard and the
cradle stops moving.
Figure 8-40 Pulling cradle
4. Lift up on the center of the cradle, and pull the cradle toward you until the rear of the cradle clears
the cradle guide rails.
Figure 8-41 Cradle guide rails
5. Locate the rear of the cradle, remove the two inner screws with a Phillips-head screwdriver, and lift
the plastic cradle cover out.
Figure 8-42 Removing cradle cover
6. Lift the rear of the cradle, and remove the screw on the left and right side of the cradle.
Figure 8-43 Screw location on cradle (right side shown)
7. Remove the upper two screws on the plastic pieces and rotate them as shown.
Figure 8-44 Screws and plastic pieces
8. Remove the three center screws shown above; lift and remove the rear section of the cover from
the cradle.
Figure 8-45 Rear section of cradle cover removed
9. Remove the left and right strap rails by sliding each from the middle and front sections of the cradle.
(To make it easier to remove the strap rails, release the cradle from the guide rails and lift it toward
the back of the table.)
Figure 8-46 Removing left and right strap rails
10. Lift up on the on the cradle as shown in Figure 8-41 Cradle guide rails on page 296 and push it back
into position.
NOTICE
Before performing the next task, make sure the surface is clear of all materials such
as any screws, tools or plastic parts previously removed.
11. Remove the cradle cover by lifting up and sliding the cover out from the front of the cradle.
Figure 8-47 Removing cradle cover
12. Remove the shoulder screw.

Figure 8-48 Removing shoulder screw
13. Remove the four screws securing the 2 end ribs to the cradle (one near the front and one near the
rear section of the cradle.)
Figure 8-49 Removing screws on end rib
14. Remove the foam insert from the table.

Figure 8-50 Foam insert
15. Flex the cotton rod at the middle section of the cradle. Carefully slide it out from the rear section of
the cradle.
Be careful not to break the 2 pins at the end of the cotton rod or lose any of the 4 compression
springs.
16. Place the PA coil into the table and orient so the cable faces the end of the table labeled Rear.
Figure 8-51 Table end labeled rear
17. With the cotton rod loose (move it to one side), connect the cables from the new PA coil to the
cables in the table. See illustration below for cable routing. Ensure the spacer bracket is properly
oriented.
The PA coil will rest on the side of the table while the cables are being connected. See Figure
8-51 Table end labeled rear on page 301.
Figure 8-52 Connecting PA cables to table cables
18. When all the cables are connected (with the PA coil resting on the side of the table), restore the 4
compression springs to the 2 pins at the end of the cotton rod.
19. Flex the cotton road at the middle section of the cradle and reconnect to the rear section of the
cradle. Re-install the shoulder screw.
20. Place the PA coil into the cradle and orient so the cables face the end of the table (labeled REAR).
21. Reinstall the 2 end ribs with 2 screws shown in Figure 8-49 Removing screws on end
rib on page 300.
22. Secure the PA Coil to the table with six screws that are in a small resealable plastic bag in the table
as shown in Figure 8-53 PA coil screws on page 302.
Figure 8-53 PA coil screws
NOTE
It may be necessary to use a screwdriver to perforate amber-tinted film over screw holes
to permit reinstallation of screws to secure coil. Do not remove film from coil surface as
its presence prevents loose hardware from failing into coil and causing damage to coil
internal electronic circuitry.
23. Place the cradle cover on the cradle, ensuring the front edge of the cover slides into the groove of
the cradle’s front section and lower the cover onto the cradle.
Figure 8-54 Replacing cradle cover
24. Refer to Figure 8-39 Location of table buttons on page 296. Locate the front of the patient table and
the buttons. Push the button labeled 1 down toward the floor while pushing the button labeled 2 in.
25. Continue pushing in both buttons, and pull the cradle toward you (as shown in Figure 8-40 Pulling
cradle on page 296) until a click is heard and the cradle stops moving.
26. Refer to Figure 8-41 Cradle guide rails on page 296. Lift up on the center of the cradle, and pull the
cradle toward you until the rear of the cradle clears the cradle guide rails.
27. Reinstall the left and right strap rails (shown in Figure 8-46 Removing left and right strap
rails on page 298) by sliding from the middle and back sections. Ensure there is no gap between the
strap rails and the cradle front section.
Figure 8-55 Eliminating gap between strap rails and cradle
28. Reinstall the rear section cover housing, and secure with the screws as shown. Ensure the cradle
cover slides into the groove of the cover housing.
Figure 8-56 Reinstalling rear cradle cover
29. Lift the rear of the cradle, and reinstall the screws on the left and right side of the cradle shown in
Figure 8-43 Screw location on cradle (right side shown) on page 297.
30. Reinstall the last cover with the two inner screws shown on the left in Figure 8-44 Screws and
plastic pieces on page 297.
31. Lift up on the on the cradle and push it back into position.
Figure 8-57 Positioning cradle
Finalization
After start-up, complete the test for the PA coil: Run the Multi-Coil Quality Assurance Tool.
9
9 Operator Workspace Installation
9.1 Operator workspace
Operator workspace table anchor installation

The customer may have the operator workspace components installed on a customer designed
countertop of other type of table. If the GE supplied operator workspace table is to be installed, refer to
room layout plan and consult with Site customer for exact location of operator workspace table.
Figure 9-1 Position operator workspace table
1. Open palletized M1000MW box that contains the operator workspace table. Use furnished
Operator’s Workspace Table Assembly Instructions (5189137-50) to assemble the model
5191031 table.
2. Move table into designated position. Refer to room layout plan and/or consult with Site customer
for exact location of operator workspace table. Typical location with table in front of Magnet Room
viewing window is shown below.
NOTICE
Two individuals are required to move and position operator workspace table.
NOTE
The design of the new model 5191031 table does not require anti-tip anchors. This table
meets the ANSA/BIFMA anti-tip standards.
Installation Manual 9.1 Operator workspace
3. If seismic anchoring is required, refer to site architectural drawings and procure and install specified
anchors.
GOC installation
Position GOC
Consult with Site customer for exact location of Global Operator Cabinet (GOC). The location could be
underneath the left or right side of the operator workspace table, or on the outside left or right side of
the table.
Figure 9-2 Position of GOC
Seismic anchoring (if required)

GOC Seismic Mount kit is shipped with GOC. Find kit inside of plastic bag.
If seismic anchoring is required, refer to site architectural drawings for fastener type details or
applicable Preinstallation manual. Illustration below indicates hole location for installing brackets.
Figure 9-3 Install seismic brackets
Computer cabinet cable routing and connections

The GOC Cabinet is shipped with cables that will be routed and connected to components installed on
the top of the OW Table.
• Two power cords
• One video cable
• Keyboard cable
• SCIM cable
• Modem cable (Option)
These cables are already connected to the computer as shown in the illustration below. The remainder
of the cables to be connected to designated modules within the GOC Cabinet will to be routed through
the rear opening.
NOTICE
When routing cables at the customer site, confirm there are no unforeseen dangers where
the cables are routed.
Figure 9-4 Cable connections to GOC
1. Runs E0015, E3045, E3046, E3047 and E3048 are pre-connected to computer and are routed at top
of opening. (These cables are inside of plastic bag)
2. Runs E0003, E3011, E3015, E3017, E3018, the power cord for the Patient Alert system, and any
other option cables will be routed through the rear opening.
3. Route all cables before connecting any cables. Refer to cable map for connection information.
NOTE
Make sure a cable service loop of at least 4 feet (1300mm) is provided for future
servicing.
4. If GOC cabinet is to be located under OW Table, the cable coming out of the opening at the rear of
the cabinet will be routed below the Back Panel. Cables routed from components on top of table will
be routed above back panel.
5. Instructions for connection of cables to GOC are provided in later procedures.
GOC cabinet cover removal

The Computer Cabinet covers need to be removed to access the cable connection points.
Figure 9-5 Remove GOC covers
1. For right side cover, remove two screws and lift up. Disconnect Ground cable connector and remove
the cover.
2. For left side cover, remove two screws and lift up. Disconnect Ground cable connector and remove
the cover.
NOTE
A ground wire is connected to each side cover. Use care when removing side covers.
3. Peel the two shipping tapes off from PC.
GOC cable connections

The connection points of cables routed to the GOC modules and the PC are described in the following
sections. Refer to cable map for connection information.
Figure 9-6 GOC cable connections
1. Refer to Power and ground connections on page 311 for system power and ground cable
connections to GOC.
2. Refer to OW component power cable connections to PDM on page 311 for OW component power
cable connections to GOC PDU. Make sure Patient Alert power is connected to J3. If Modem is
installed, power cable is connected to J7.
3. Refer to Data cable connections on page 312 for all cables connected to Linux PC computer and
GOC modules.
4. Refer to In-Room Display (IRD) installation on page 317 for IRD component installation procedures
in GOC. (If IRD is installed at this site.)
5. After all cables are installed, route cables through clamp. Tighten clamp to secure cables in place.
NOTE
GOC Breaker is located at here. Route the cables so that the cable won’t turn the Breaker
OFF by accident.
Power and ground connections

Figure 9-7 GOC power and ground cables
1. Connect Ground wire E4008 to GND stud.

NOTE
Make sure nut is firmly tightened to GND stud.
2. Before connecting GOC power cable E0003 to J1, loosen screws and remove cover.
3. Route and connect GOC power cable to J1 on PDU.
4. Confirm that GOC Power Cable is firmly connected to J1 by pulling the cable once. Re-install cover
and tighten screws.
OW component power cable connections to PDM

The illustration shows the power cable connection locations to the power strip in the GOC cabinet.
Make sure power cables are attached as shown.
Also refer to cable map for information on power cable connections to OW1-PDM.
Figure 9-8 Connect GOC power cables
1. If Modem is installed, route power cable and connect to J7.

2. Tie-wrap point for Modem power cable.
3. Route power cables connected to J3 thru J7 through access hole.
4. Route and connect Patient Alert power cable to J3 and tie-wrap at this point.
5. Tie-wrap power cables J4 to J7 at this point.
Data cable connections

Many of the cables shown in illustration are pre-connected. Instructions for routing and connecting
cables for USB mouse, keyboard, host display, and SCIM are provided in Install monitor, and SCIM and
keyboard on page 321.
Figure 9-9 Cable connections
1. Connect Run E3031 to J7 on GOC AA.

2. For older GOCs which include the 8-port hub, use ports 3, 7 or 8 for connecting site Ethernet cables
such as AW.
NOTE
Do not use any other ports for site Ethernet cables.
NOTE
For newer GOCs without an 8-port hub, a site Ethernet cable can be connected directly
to the Host PC. If multiple Ethernet connections are required to the Host PC, a customer-
supplied switch must be used.
Host PC cable connections (Z400/Z420)

The connection points of cables routed to the PC are described in the following two sections. Several of
the cables shown are delivered with the GOC and are pre-connected.
Refer to the applicable PC shown below for cable routing and connections.
Figure 9-10 PC connections (Z400/Z420)
1. Route and connect the following to the USB ports: Keyboard USB extension cable – Run E3048,
Mouse USB cable, Serial Converter USB connector, and IRD USB cable (option)
2. Connect Run E3011 to the Ethernet connection port.
For the z420 PC, Run E3011 MUST be connected to the RIGHT side Ethernet port.
3. Connect Run E3011 to the RIGHT Ethernet port for both z400 and z420 (location of item 2 on the
z420 PC shown in Figure 9-10 PC connections (Z400/Z420) on page 314 applies to both z400 and
z420).
Connect the site network cable (or GOC Hub if available) to the onboard Ethernet port (location of
item 2 on the z400 PC Figure 9-10 PC connections (Z400/Z420) on page 314 applies to z400 only).
4. Connect Runs E3015, E3017, and E3018 to FJ6, FJ5, and FJ7 as marked.
5. Monitor cable Run E3046 will be connected to MNTR1 port.
6. If the IRD option is installed, connect DVI–D cable to MNTR2 port.
Host PC cable connections (Dell T5810)

The connection points of cables routed to the PC are described as follows. Several of the cables shown
are delivered with the GOC and are preconnected.
Figure 9-11 PC area connections (Dell T5810)
1. See Figure 9-11 PC area connections (Dell T5810) on page 315. Route and connect PC power cord.
2. Run E3011 MUST be connected to the RIGHT side Ethernet port.
3. If the IRD option is installed, connect DVI-D cable to MNTR2 port PCI5.
4. Monitor cable Run E3046 will be connected to MNTR1 port PCI2.
5. Route and connect the Line In and Line Out cables from the GOCAA.
6. For older GOCs which include a hub, route and connect Ethernet cable from GOC hub to this port.
For newer GOCs without a hub, this port is available for connecting with a service laptop, site
network, or AW option. If connection to multiple Ethernet devices is required, a customer-supplied
switch must be used.
7. Route and connect USB cable from IRD to USB 2.0 port.
8. Route and connect USB-RS422 Converter cable to USB 2.0 port.
9. (For Artist/T/XT) Route and connect USB extender cable E3037 to USB 3.0 port.
10. Connect optional BrainWave accessory cable.
11. Connect mouse (Run E3048) to USB 3.0 port.

12. Connect keyboard extension cable.
13. Connect optional BrainWave video cable.
14. Item 14 in Figure 9-11 PC area connections (Dell T5810) on page 315 has no connection.
15. Connect Runs E3015, E3017, and E3018 to FJ6, FJ5, and FJ7 as marked.
16. Dress and secure cables.
Host PC cable connections (Dell T5820)

The connection points of cables routed to the PC are described as follows. Several of the cables shown
are delivered with the GOC and are preconnected.
Use the below figures and tables as reference.
Figure 9-12 GOC with Dell T5820
Figure 9-13 PC area connections (Dell T5820)
Table 9-1 Dell T5820 cable configuration
Item Run # Description

1 NA Line In/Out cable to GOCAA J12/14
2 NA Site network Ethernet cable
3 NA Mouse USB cable
4 E3048 Keyboard USB extender cable to keyboard USB cable
5 E3037 ICE USB extender cable
6 NA USB-RS422 Converter USB cable to USB-RS422 Converter
7 NA IRDC USB cable to IRDC J1
8 NA NA
9 NA NA
10 NA IRDC miniDP cable to IRDC J2
11 E3046 Host LCD Monitor miniDP cable to Host LCD Monitor
12 E3011 ETH1 (right port) cable to PGR J2
13 NA Power cable
In-Room Display (IRD) installation

Complete this procedure if IRD is part of system installation. The GOC is delivered with cables pre-
installed for connection to the Fiber Optic Converter Box.
NOTE
Newer GOCs do not include the 8-port hub shown in some of the following illustrations.
Figure 9-14 Install fiber optic converter box
1. Disconnect and discard jumper cable (5330299-2) connected to E3019 and Sensor cable.
2. Install Fiber Optic Converter Box (5435410-2) using the provided four M5 screws
3. Connect the DVI-D cable from the Host PC to J2.
4. Route fiber optic cable Run P2026 to GOC and connect to J3.
5. Connect the USB cable from the Host PC to J1.
6. Connect Run E3019 to J4 and the Sensor cable to J5.
Figure 9-15 Secure fiber optic cable
7. Secure the fiber optic cable with tie wraps at points indicated below. Tie the tie wrap loosely as to
not damage the optical cable.
NOTE
Do NOT tighten the tie wraps firmly. Damage to the optical cable will occur if tie wrap is
to tight.
NOTE
On newer systems, the IRD connection is pre-installed on the GOC at the factory if
applicable.
Install modem cable to GOC cabinet (if applicable)

If Modem is part of system installation or upgrade, it will be placed on Operator Table or GOC.
Figure 9-16 Modem installation
1. Modem cable to the Linux PC is provided. Connect Run E3045 to Modem.

2. Modem power cord must be connected to J7 on GOC PDU Module. Route this cable to the rear top
of the GOC Cabinet.
Restore GOC covers

Figure 9-17 Install GOC covers
1. Connect Ground cables and install both side covers by inserting tabs at top of covers into slots.
2. Install screws that were removed in earlier procedure.
Install temperature and humidity sensor on GOC

Figure 9-18 Install sensor on GOC
1. Attach iButton Sensor assembly (Holder, 5141856, and iButton 5141857), to back of GOC Cabinet at
this location using Dual Locking Velcro Tape (2341779 & 2341779-2).
2. Connect cable (5267721) to Sensor.
Install monitor, and SCIM and keyboard

Consult with Site customer for exact location of SCIM/Keyboard and Monitor on operator workspace
table.
Figure 9-19 Monitor, SCIM and keyboard installation
1. Position Host Display Monitor, SCIM, Mouse, and keyboard on table.

2. Place keyboard in front of SCIM, pull the keyboard forward, flip it, and place on top of the SCIM up
side down.
3. Remove the plastic strips from the Velcro located on SCIM plate, exposing the adhesive surface (see
illustration on next page).
4. Guide the cable back into the center notched opening until all the cable is under the SCIM base.
5. Place the keyboard tight against the SCIM, Center it as best as possible, and drop into place. The
Velcro pads will now be sticking to the bottom of the keyboard.
6. Connect Mouse cable to USB port at rear of computer in GOC.
7. Connect Run E3048 to USB Keyboard cable. Route and connect other end to computer in GOC.
8. Connect Run E3047 to SCIM. Route and connect other end to computer in GOC.
9. Route and connect Runs E0015 (LCD monitor power cable) and E3046 (DVI-D cable) from the GOC
to the monitor. For E0015, use power cord adapter 5412946-2 to connect E0015 to the monitor.
Figure 9-20 LCD Monitor Power Cord Adapter (5412946-2)
NOTE
The adhesive on the Velcro takes 24 hours to completely adhere to the bottom of the
keyboard. Allow the adhesive to dry completely before removing keyboard from SCIM base.
Final positioning of GOC cabinet

1. Use the spiral tube to bind the following cables. (Length of spiral tube is about 1 m.) Spiral tube is
included in the plastic bag which is shipped with GOC.
Figure 9-21 Complete cabling of GOC
• Two power cords

• One video cable
• Keyboard cable
• SCIM cable
2. Place cabinet in final position as determined by customer.
Power on information
When powering up the GOC, make sure the Main breaker located in the rear of the GOC is ON.
10
10 Checklist
10.1 Completion checklist

Mechanical installation completion checklist
The following steps need to be reviewed and completed by GE Field Engineer, especially if the system
was installed by non-GE personnel.
Check off boxes at the front of each item below when complete.
• □ Check mechanical flowchart to make sure all steps are complete
• □ Resolve shipment shortages
• □ Resolve omissions by mechanical contractors
• □ Make sure all rating plates are installed
• □ Recheck all wiring connections using cable map
• □ Correct for wiring errors if necessary
• □ Recheck all coolant hose connections for tightness and that there are no leaks. Correct if
necessary.
• □ Recheck all air hose connections for tightness and that there are no leaks. Correct if necessary.
Returning shipping material
The shipping material must be returned as soon as possible . Prompt return is required so that
production shipments can continue with these labor saving dollies and carts. These can be included with
the Return pile, Recycling Operation will route them to appropriate location.
Final mechanical installation steps
1. Complete assembly of PPG cable and probe head.
2. Make sure all cabinet, magnet enclosure, and rear pedestal covers have been installed.
3. Make sure all safety and warning labels have been installed.
4. Make sure patient transport is in position at front of magnet.
10.2 GE Field Engineer responsibilities

Phantoms and service kits
1. Locate the following:
• (For systems with DV28.0 and earlier software) Locate the phantom kit and SPT phantom cart
kit.
• (For systems with DV29.0 and later software) Locate the phantom kit.
NOTE
(For systems with DV29.0 and later software) The phantom cart and the LVshim
phantom side lobes are not used and are not delivered with the system.
Installation Manual 10.2 GE Field Engineer responsibilities
NOTE
(For systems with DV29.0 and later software) The LVshim phantom inner ball, and the
body TLT and loader phantom will ship together with their storage holder pads. Do
not discard the storage holder pads with the packing material.
2. Unpack the phantoms carefully to reduce risk of damage, breakage, or chemical spill.
3. Locate the multilingual (provided in eight languages) phantom attention labels shipped with each of
the phantoms.
NOTICE
Three types of multilingual phantom attention labels are provided and each type must
be applied to the correct phantom. The directions at the top of each label sheet
describe which phantoms that can receive that label.
4. Read the directions provided at the top of each of the multilingual attention label sheets and apply
the appropriate language attention label for the site to each of the phantoms that should receive
that type of label.
a. Each phantom will receive the correct type of attention label written in the appropriate
language for that site.
b. (For systems with DV28.0 and earlier software) Note that the LVshim phantom assembly will
receive 3 labels, one for each phantom component.
Final GE Field Engineer installation steps
1. Complete the gradient filter cable connection safety check:
a. Make sure only the required gradient cable crimping tools were used in this installation, GEHC
5790054.
b. Visually inspect end of gradient lugs and confirm the gradient wire extends to the end of the
barrel and that there are no frayed or cut wires per procedure.
c. Make sure the compression identifies the correct embossed lug number; #24 ground lug, #42 1
AWG X and Y axis, #50 2/0 AWG Z axis, for DV systems, #42 1/0 AWG used in Pioneer/Voyager/
Premier systems.
d. Make sure there are no electrical tape or heat shrink tubing obscuring the gradient lug view.
2. Do Emergency Off Connection Safety check:
a. Launch the Service Desktop Manager, click the Tools button and select System Shutdown
from the Tools menu.
b. Turn off the breakers for the Host, ICN (Recon), and 48V Gradient Control if you are testing
more E-Off buttons.
c. Press one of the E-Off buttons (the location of buttons was determined by the customer).
Generally, the E-Off button is located on the wall next to the computer equipment or next to
the MR magnet room doors.
d. Make sure that power was removed from the PDU by viewing the PDU phase indicator lights
and checking the input voltage test points (the lights may have burned out).
e. Make sure that power was removed from the Heat Exchange Cabinet (HEC). Both the PLC
Signal Box and VFDs lights will be off.
Installation Manual 10.2 GE Field Engineer responsibilities
f. On the System Main Disconnect Panel, press the SYSTEM ON button, reset the [On] switch,
and on the PDU, press the EMO RESET button.
g. Repeat steps a through e above for all E-Off buttons, including the SYSTEM OFF button on the
MDP.
3. Record and enter applicable data into applicable site configuration files and records.
4. Complete Product Locator information for all installed serialized components, new or updated,
using either:
a. (For (U.S. Only)) FE Site Verification Web Site
b. Process and return product locator installation cards for all serialized components to: Product
Locator File, P.O. Box 414, W-523, Milwaukee, WI 53201-0414
Refer to Product Locator section in “Getting Started” for details on submitting Product Locator
information.
NOTE
Failure to fill out and return Product Locator Cards may result in failure of your site to
receive future FMIs.
5. Store the delivered site’s set of service tools in service cabinet at site.
6. Locate the surface coil (“quick disconnect”) adapters and any optional surface coils and positioning
accessories and place on Patient Transport.
7. Locate the box marked “To be opened by Applications Specialist” and set aside for a later visit by
the Applications Specialist.
8. After the Installation and Calibration Wizard (ICW) Installation workflow is complete, please
execute the e-Installation form (DOC1685408) and submit it to the e-forms repository.
9. Leave the site’s set of manuals and CD-ROM(s) at the site. Install Service and Operator
documentation on the host computer. Organize and set up the reference cabinet for the manuals.
10. Locate the Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) packed with the phantoms and the gradient coil
coolant. They must be retained on site. Customer is to be informed that material with MSDS was
brought into the site and customer should know/decide where the MSDS should be retained at the
site.
11. Make sure that coordination of application support for instruction of the site users on the
appropriate software release has been made before returning the system to the users. Turn the site
over to the Applications Specialist, who will instruct the users.
12. Staged systems are preloaded with software and configured as indicated in Getting Started,
Preloaded Software. Complete startup and calibrations as explained in SMART
Installation on page 14.
11
11 Appendix
11.1 Cable specification

Cables delivered to site for installation have specifications dependent on usage. The following tables
contain information on cable runs for this system as it was originally installed, dependent on site
configuration.
Table provides definitions for the installed cables.
Table 11-1 Cable table definitions
Column heading Description Special notes

Description Includes the Run number, destination labels Total length of cables delivered to site, func-
of the cable, and length tion of cable specifies power from data
Number of conductors Wires in cable
Certification Type designation for the cable
Voltage rating The highest voltage that may be continuously Specific to the core cable manufacturer given
applied to a wire
Temperature rating Maximum temperature insulating material Specific to the core cable manufacturer given
may be used without loss to basic properties
Notes Describe the cable's use in the MR system
Table 11-2 Cables installed on site
Description Number AWG Certifica- Voltage Temp Notes

of con- tion rating rating
ductors (volts) (Cel-
sius)
Run 623, CRY to SPW, COLD 4 16 CM, FT4 300 90° Minimum bend radius is
HEAD CONTROL, LCC, 15,000 7 inches (178 mm)
mm
Run 624, SPW to MAG, COLD 4 16 CM, FT4 300 90° Minimum bend radius is
HEAD CONTROL, LCC, 15,000 7 inches (178 mm)
mm
Run E0003, PGR-J102 to OW- 3 10 UL AWM 600 90° Minimum bend radius is
PDM-J1, Host Power, 30,000 mm 2587, FT4 6 inches (152 mm)
Run E0004 PGR-J16 to Pen-J1, 5 10 UL AWM 600 90° Minimum bend radius is
Pen Power, 17,000 mm 2587, FT4 6 inches (152 mm)
Run E0004, PGR-J16 to PEN-J1, 5 10 UL AWM 600 90° Minimum bend radius is
PEN Power, 10,000 mm 2587, FT4 6 inches (152 mm)
Run E0009, HEC to CRY, INPUT 4 12 LFNC 600 105° Four 12AWG wires in
POWER, SUMITOMO CSW-71D, conduit. Minimum bend
10,000 mm radius is 5 inches (127
mm)
Installation Manual 11.1 Cable specification
Table 11-2 Cables installed on site (Table continued)

sius)
Run E1001, PGR-J19 to SPW- 1 N/A CMR, FT4 5000 85° LMR-900 coaxial cable.
J106, 1.5 RF Transmit, 16,523 mm Minimum bend radius is
ref. aluminum braid shield. 9 inches (229 mm)
J106, 1.5T RF Transmit, 10,327 Minimum bend radius is
mm ref. aluminum braid shield. 9 inches (229 mm)
Run E1002 SPW-J128 to PGR- 1 N/A CMR, FT4 4000 85° LMR-600 coaxial cable.
J18, RF Transmit, 10,218 mm, Minimum bend radius is
aluminum braid shield. 6 inches (152 mm)
Run E1002 SPW-J128 to PGR- 1 N/A CMR, FT4 4000 85° LMR-600 coaxial cable.
J18,RF Transmit, 16,348 mm, alu- Minimum bend radius is
minum braid shield. 6 inches (152 mm)
Run E1003 PGR-J12 to PEN-J5, 1 N/A CMR, FT4 1500 85° LMR-240 coaxial cable.
Body TR, 17,000 mm Minimum bend radius is
2.5 inches (64 mm)
Run E1003, PGR-J12 to PEN-J5, 1 N/A CMR, FT4 1500 85° LMR-240 coaxial cable.
Body TR, 10,000 mm Minimum bend radius
-2.5 inches (64 mm)
Run E1004 PGR-J13 to Pen-J6, 1 N/A CMR, FT4 1500 85° LMR-240 coaxial cable.
Head TR, 10,000 mm Minimum bend radius is
2.5 inches (64 mm)
Head TR, 17,000 mm Minimum bend radius is
2.5 inches (64 mm)
Tx Output, 10,000 mm Minimum bend radius is
2 inches (51 mm)
2 inch (51 mm)
2 inches (51 mm)
2 inch (51 mm)
J109, 1.5 RF Transmit, 16,523 mm Minimum bend radius is
ref. aluminum braid shield. 9 inches (229 mm)
J106, 1.5T RF Transmit, 10,327 Minimum bend radius is
mm ref. aluminum braid shield. 9 inches (229 mm)
Run E1307, PGR-J300 to PEN-J23, 2 20 CL2, FT4 300 75° twinaxial cable. Mini-
10,160 mm mum bend radius is 5 in-
(ICE only) ches (127 mm)

sius)
Run E2002 PGR-J1 to PEN-J19, 2 N/A OFNR N/A 85° Optical fibers, 2 simplex
10,000 mm connectors bundled on
(XGD only) each end. Minimum bend
radius is 4.8 inches (122
mm)
(XGD only) each end. Minimum bend
mm)
Run E2020 PGR-J22 to PEN-J17, 6 N/A LFNC N/A 85° Optical fibers in conduit,
10,000 mm 3 connectors bundled on
each end. Minimum bend
radius is 7 inches (178
mm)
Run E2020 PGR-J22 to PEN-J17, 6 N/A LFNC N/A 85° Optical fibers in conduit,
17,000 mm 3 connectors bundled on
mm)
(MR450w and MR450w GEM only) each end. Minimum bend
mm)
(MR450w and MR450w GEM only) each end. Minimum bend
mm)
Run E3002 PGR-J103 to Pen-J11, 15 22 CL3, FT4 300 80° Minimum bend radius is
17,000 mm 6 inches (152 mm)
Run E3002, PGR-J103 to PEN-J11, 15 22 CL3, FT4 300 80° Minimum bend radius is
E-Stop, 10,000 mm 6 inches (152 mm)
17,000 mm 6 inches (152 mm)
HART, 10,000 mm 6 inches (152 mm)
CAN, 10,000 mm 6 inches (152 mm)
CAN, 17,000 mm 6 inches (152 mm)
10,000 mm 3.9 inches (99 mm)

sius)
17,000 mm 3.9 inches (99 mm)
Run E3011, PGR-J2 to OW1-Host, 8 26 CMP 300 75° Minimum bend radius is
Ethernet, 30,000 mm 6 inches (152 mm)
Run E3013, PGR-J6 to HEC-CAT 5, 8 26 CMP 300 75° Minimum bend radius is
Cooling Control Ethernet, 10,000 6 inches (152 mm)
mm
Run E3014, PGR-J20 to RF Door 2 22 CMG, FT4 300 105° Minimum bend radius is
SW, E-Stop, 25,000 mm 6 inches (152 mm)
Run E3015, PGR-J17 to OW-FJ6, 9 22 CL3, FT4 300 90° Minimum bend radius is
E-stop, 30,000 mm 6 inches (152 mm)
Run E3017, PEN-J10 to OW-FJ5, 9 22 CL3, FT4 300 90° Minimum bend radius is
E-stop, 30,000 mm 6 inches (152 mm)
Run E3018, PEN-J12 to OW-FJ7, 15 22 CL3, FT4 300 80° Minimum bend radius is
HART-RS422, 30,000 mm 6 inches (152 mm)
Run E3020 Pen-J13 to Mon-J10, 15 22 CL3, FT4 300 80° Minimum bend radius is
17,000 mm 6 inches (152 mm)
Run E3022,MON-J7 to SPW-J116, 6 22 CMG, FT4 300 80° Minimum bend radius is
Instrumentation Box, 17000 mm 6 inches (152 mm)
Run E3023 SPW-J117 to MON-J8, 25 22 CL3, FT4 300 80° Minimum bend radius is
17,000 mm 6 inches (152 mm)
Run E3025, CRY to MON-FJ4, 10 22 CMG, FT4 300 80° Minimum bend radius is
Flow Monitor-Sumitomo, 10,000 6 inches (152 mm)
mm
Run E3028, HEC-PLC-RS232 to 8 26 CM, FT4 300 75° Minimum bend radius is
PGR-J3, Cooling Control Commu- 6 inches (152 mm)
nication, 10,000 mm
Run E3030 E-Off Switch to SPW- 2 22 CMG, FT4 300 105° Minimum bend radius is
J115, 17,000 mm 6 inches (152 mm)
Run E3030, SPW-J115 to E-Off 2 22 CMG, FT4 300 105° Minimum bend radius is
SW, E-off, 10,000 mm 6 inches (152 mm)
Run E3031, SPW-J118 to OW-J7, 25 22 CL3, FT4 300 80° Minimum bend radius is
Patient Intercom, 30,000 mm 6 inches (152 mm)
Run E3034 MON-J5 to customer- 8 26 CMP 300 75° Minimum bend radius is
supplied Network, 30,000 mm 6 inches (152 mm)
Run E3037 PGR-J301 to GOC- 4 20 USB 5 165°
USB 3.0, 30,000 mm
(ICE only)
Run E3317 Gradient Cable X, 5 4/C 1 UL Type TC- 600 90° Minimum bend radius is
Equip Room, Long, 17,000 mm AWG + ER, FT4 13 inches (330 mm)
1/C 6
AWG

sius)
Run E3317 Gradient Cable X, 5 4/C 1 UL Type TC- 600 90° Minimum bend radius is
Equip Room, Short, 10,000 mm AWG + ER, FT4 13 inches (330 mm)
1/C 6
AWG
Run E3318 Gradient Cable Y, 5 4/C 1 UL Type TC- 600 90° Minimum bend radius is
1/C 6
AWG
Run E3318 Gradient Cable Y, 5 4/C 1 UL Type TC- 600 90° Minimum bend radius is
1/C 6
AWG
Run E3319 Gradient Cable Z, 5 4/C 2/0 UL Type TC- 600 90° Minimum bend radius is
1/C 6
AWG
1/C 6
AWG
1/C 6
AWG
1/C 6
AWG
Run E4002, PEN-GND to PGR- 1 10 CMG 300 80° single conductor ground
GND, Ground Cable, 10,000 mm cable. Minimum bend ra-
dius is 5 inches (127
mm)
Run E4002, PEN-GND to PGR- 1 10 CMG 300 80° single conductor ground
GND, Ground Cable, 17,000 mm cable. Minimum bend ra-
mm)
Run E4005 RF COM GND STUD to 1 1/0 UL AWM 600 105° single conductor ground
PGR-GND STUD, 10,000 mm 1284, TEW cable. Minimum bend ra-
mm)
PGR-GND STUD, 17,000 mm 1284, TEW cable. Minimum bend ra-
mm)

sius)
Run E4007, HEC-GND to PGR- 1 10 CMG 300 80° single conductor ground
GND,Ground Cable, 10,000 mm cable. Minimum bend ra-
mm)
Run E4008, OW-GOC-GND to 1 10 CMG 300 80° single conductor ground
PGR-GND, Ground Cable, 30,000 cable. Minimum bend ra-
mm dius is 5 inches (127
mm)
SPW-GND STUD, 2,800 mm 1284, TEW cable. Minimum bend ra-
mm)
PEN-GND STUD, 2,800 mm 1284, TEW cable. Minimum bend ra-
mm)
Run M1001, SPW-J106 to MAG- 1 N/A CMR, FT4 5000 85° LMR-900 coaxial cable.
HYB-J1, 1.5T RF Body Transmit, Minimum bend radius is
12,394 mm ref. aluminum braid 9 inches (229 mm)
shield.
Run M1001, SPW-J106 to MAG- 1 N/A CMR, FT4 5000 85° LMR-900 coaxial cable.
HYB-J1, 1.5T RF Body Transmit, Minimum bend radius is
16,525 mm ref. aluminum braid 9 inches (229 mm)
shield.
Run M1302, PEN-J29 to MAG- 2 20 CL2, FT4 300 75° twinaxial cable. Mini-
TDM-J11, Receiver Clock, Twinax, mum bend radius is 5 in-
11,000 mm ches (127 mm)
(MR450w, MR450w GEM, Artist T)
Run M1302, PEN-J29 to MAG- 2 20 CL2, FT4 300 75° twinaxial cable. Mini-
TDM-J11, Receiver Clock, Twinax, mum bend radius is 5 in-
15,000 mm ches (127 mm)
Run M1302, PEN-J29 to MAG- 2 20 FT4, CMG 300 75° twinaxial cable. Mini-
RxDist-J19, Receiver Clock, Twi- mum bend radius is 5 in-
nax, 15,140 mm ches (127 mm)
(Artist and XT)
Run M1303, PEN-J32 to PED- 1 N/A CMR, FT4 1000 100° LMR-195 coaxial cable.
HUB-SLOT11-J16, NB Exciter, Minimum bend radius is
14,500 mm 2 inch (51 mm)
Run M1303, PEN-J32 to PED- 1 N/A CMR, FT4 1000 100° LMR-195 coaxial cable.
HUB-SLOT11-J16, NB Exciter, Minimum bend radius is
18,500 mm 2 inch (51 mm)

sius)
Run M1303 MAG-RxDist-J12 to 1 19 FT4, CMG 300 85° twinaxial cable. Mini-
PEN-J32, Loopback, 15,550 mm mum bend radius is 5 in-
(Artist and XT) ches (127 mm)
Run M1304, PEN-J30 to PED- 2 20 CL2, FT4 300 75° twinaxial cable. Mini-
HUB-SLOT11-J17, Rx LO - Exciter mum bend radius is 5 in-
Reference Clock, Twinax, 13,500 ches (127 mm)
mm
Run M1304, PEN-J30 to PED- 2 20 CL2, FT4 300 75° twinaxial cable. Mini-
HUB-SLOT11-J17, Rx LO - Exciter mum bend radius is 5 in-
Reference Clock, Twinax, 17,500 ches (127 mm)
mm
Run M1304, PEN-J30 to MAG- 2 20 FT4, SMG 300 75° twinaxial cable. Mini-
RxDist-J10, Rx LO, Twinax, 16,330 mum bend radius is 5 in-
mm) ches (127 mm)
(Artist and XT)
Run M1305, SPW-J122 to PED- 1 N/A CMR, FT4 4000 85° LMR-600 coaxial cable.
IO-J1, P1 port RF Transmit, Minimum bend radius is
14,306 mm reference, aluminum 6 inches (152 mm)
braid shield.
IO-J1, P1 port RF Transmit, Minimum bend radius is
18,393 mm reference, aluminum 6 inches (152 mm)
braid shield.
IO-J2, A port RF Transmit, 13,965 Minimum bend radius is
mm reference, aluminum braid 6 inches (152 mm)
shield.
IO-J2, A port RF Transmit, 18,052 Minimum bend radius is
mm reference, aluminum braid 6 inches (152 mm)
shield.
(MR450w, MR450w GEM, Artist T
Run M1310 PEN-J72 to MAG-J9, 1 N/A CMR, FT4 1000 100° LMR-195 coaxial cable.
10,000 mm Minimum bend radius is
2 inches (51 mm)
Run M1310 PEN-J72 to MAG-J9, 1 N/A CMR, FT4 1000 100° LMR-195 coaxial cable.
14,000 mm Minimum bend radius is
2 inches (51 mm)
Run M1312, DVw, Pen-J74 to 1 N/A CMR, FT4 1000 100° LMR-195 coaxial cable.
MAG-HYB-J6, 13,000 mm Minimum bend radius is
2 inches (51 mm)

sius)
Run M1312, DVw, Pen-J74 to 1 N/A CMR, FT4 1000 100° LMR-195 coaxial cable.
MAG-HYB-J6, 17,000 mm Minimum bend radius is
2 inches (51 mm)
Run M1313, MAG-DDSPLIT-J20 to 1 N/A CMR, FT4 1000 100° LMR-195 coaxial cable.
MAG-BORE-J6, DVw, 6,250 mm Minimum bend radius is
2 inches (51 mm)
Run M1314, MAG-DDSPLIT-J21 to 1 N/A CMR, FT4 1000 100° LMR-195 coaxial cable.
MAG-BORE-J7, DVw, 6,250 mm Minimum bend radius is
2 inches (51 mm)
Run M1315 MAG-RxDis-J11 to 1 19 FT4, UL N/A 85° LMR-195 coaxial cable.
MAG-Extended Bridge Rear Sup- Minimum bend radius is
port TNS Antenna 2 inches (51 mm)
(Artist and XT)
Run M1335 MAG-AMP-J11 to 1 19 FT4, UL N/A 85° LMR-195 coaxial cable.
MAG-RxDist-J13, body receive, Minimum bend radius is
5,000 mm 2 inches (51 mm)
(Artist and XT)
Run M1366 DPP1-J10 to RxDist- 2 20 N/A 750V 86° Minimum bend radius is
J5, Rx LO, 2,020 mm rms 2.5 inches (64 mm)
(Artist and XT)
J6, Rx LO, 1,830 mm rms 2.5 inches (64 mm).
(Artist and XT)
J7, Rx LO, 1,330 mm rms 2.5 inches (64 mm)
(Artist and XT)
J8, 810 mm rms 2.5 inches (64 mm)
(Artist and XT)
Run M2025 MAG to PEN, CAN fi- 8 N/A LFNC N/A 85° optical fibers in conduit,
ber optic, 12,500 mm 4 duplex connectors
bundled. Minimum bend
mm)
Run M2025 MAG to PEN, CAN fi- 8 N/A LFNC N/A 85° optical fibers in conduit,
ber optic, 16,500 mm 4 duplex connectors
bundled. Minimum bend
mm)
Run M3022, SPW-J116 to MAG- 9 22 CL3, FT4 300 90° Minimum bend radius is
P403, 14,000 mm 6 inches (152 mm)
Run M3023 SPW-J117 to Mag- 25 22 CL3, FT4 300 80° Minimum bend radius is
FJ2, 14,000 mm 6 inches (152 mm)

sius)
Run M3030, SPW-J115 to E-OFF, 9 22 CL3, FT4 300 80° Minimum bend radius is
30,000 mm 6 inches (152 mm)
J1, Console Intercom, 10,000 mm 6 inches (152 mm)
J1, Console Intercom, 14,000 mm 6 inches (152 mm)
Run M3300,PEN-J51 to MAG- 24 7/C CL2, FT4 300 105° Minimum bend radius is
TDM-J9, TDM Power, 24W7, Low- 12AWG 8.3 inches (211 mm)
Mag, 11,200 mm + 17/C
(SRPS only) 22AWG
TDM-J9, TDM Power, 24W7, Low- 12AWG 8.3 inches (211 mm)
Mag, 15,200 mm + 17/C
(SRPS only) 22AWG
Run M3301, PEN-J52 to MAG- 24 7/C CL2, FT4 300 105° Minimum bend radius is
TDM-J10, TDM Power, 24W7, 12AWG 8.3 inches (211 mm)
Low-Magnetic, 11,200 mm + 17/C
(SRPS only) 22AWG
TDM-J10, TDM Power, 24W7, 12AWG 8.3 inches (211 mm)
Low-Mag, 15,200 mm + 17/C
(SRPS only) 22AWG
Run M3302 PEN-J40 to MAG- 37 22 CL3, FT4 300 80° Minimum bend radius is
J4,SRI Power, 10,000 mm 613.0 inches (330 mm)
J4,SRI Power, 14,000 mm 613.0 inches (330 mm)
Run M3303 PEN-J39 to MAG-J3, 37 22 CL3, FT4 300 80° Minimum bend radius is
MCPDB Interface, 10,000 mm 613.0 inches (330 mm)
MCPDB Interface, 14,000 mm 613.0 inches (330 mm)
Run M3304 PEN-J48 to PED- 12 6/C UL AWM 300 105° Minimum bend radius is
HUB-SLOT12-J2, RFHub Power, 10AWG 2464, FT4 8 inches (203 mm)
13W6, 17,500 mm + 6/C
(SRPS only) 22AWG
Run M3304,PEN-J48 to PED- 12 6/C UL AWM 300 105° Minimum bend radius is
13W6, 13,500 mm + 6/C
(SRPS only) 22AWG
Run M3306, PEN-J46 to PED- 12 6/C UL AWM 300 105° Minimum bend radius is
17C5, 13,500 mm + 6/C
(SRPS only) 22AWG

sius)
17C5, 17,500 mm + 6/C
(SRPS only) 22AWG
HUB-SLOT12-J6, RFHub Power, 10AWG 2464, FT4 7.3 inches (185 mm)
9C4, 13,500 mm + 4/C
(SRPS only) 22AWG
HUB-SLOT12-J6, RFHub Power, 10AWG 2464, FT4 7.3 inches (185 mm)
9W4, 17,500 mm + 4/C
(SRPS only) 22AWG
Run M3309, SPW-J123 to PED- 7 22 CMG, FT4 300 80° Minimum bend radius is
HUB-SLOT_11-J9, Transmit 6.8 inches (173 mm)
switch control, 13,500 mm
Run M3309, SPW-J123 to PED- 7 22 CMG, FT4 300 80° Minimum bend radius is
HUB-SLOT_11-J9, Transmit 6.8 inches (173 mm)
switch control, 17,500 mm
Run M3310 PEN-J45 to PED- 25 22 CL3, FT4 300 80° Minimum bend radius is
HUB-SLOT12-J4, RF Power, 6.8 inches (173 mm)
13,500 mm
(SRPS only)
Run M3310 PEN-J45 to PED- 25 22 CL3, FT4 300 80° Minimum bend radius is
HUB-SLOT12-J4, RF Power, 6.8 inches (173 mm)
17,500 mm
(SRPS only)
Run M3311 PEN-J36 to PED-MTR- 6 4/C CMG, FT4 300 80° Minimum bend radius is
J1, Long Drive Power, 15,500 mm 14AWG 6.0 inches (152 mm)
+ 2/C
22AWG
Run M3311 PEN-J36 to PED-MTR- 6 4/C CMG, FT4 300 80° Minimum bend radius is
J1, Long Drive Power, 19,500 mm 14AWG 6.0 inches (152 mm)
+ 2/C
22AWG
PAC Power, 10,000 mm 6.0 inches (152 mm)
PAC Power, 14,000 mm 6.0 inches (152 mm)
Dock Power, 10,000 mm 6.0 inches (152 mm)
Dock Power, 14,000 mm 6.0 inches (152 mm)

sius)
LCD Power, 10,000 mm 6.0 inches (152 mm)
Run M3314 Pen-J42 to Mag-J2, 15 22 CL3, FT4 300 80° Minimum bend radius is
14,000 mm 6.0 inches (152 mm)
Run M3315 Pen-J54 to PED-TIF- 9 22 CL3, FT4 300 90° Minimum bend radius is
J4, 18,500 mm. 6.0 inches (152 mm)
Run M3315, PEN-J54 to PED-TIF- 9 22 CL3, FT4 300 90° Minimum bend radius is
J4 , Hall's Signal, 14,500 mm. 6.0 inches (152 mm)
Run M3316 Pen-J34 to PED-HUB- 9 22 CL3, FT4 300 90° Minimum bend radius is
SLOT11-J10, 17,500 mm. 6.0 inches (152 mm)
Run M3316, PEN-J34 to PED- 9 22 CL3, FT4 300 90° Minimum bend radius is
HUB-SLOT11-J10, TR_DD Un- 6.0 inches (152 mm)
blank, 13,500 mm
.
Run M3317 Gradient Cable X, 5 4/C 1 UL Type TC- 600 90° Minimum bend radius is
Scan Room, Long, 14,000 mm AWG + ER, FT4 13 inches (330 mm)
1/C 6
AWG
Run M3317 Gradient Cable X, 5 4/C 1 UL Type TC- 600 90° Minimum bend radius is
Scan Room, Short, 10,000 mm AWG + ER, FT4 13 inches (330 mm)
1/C 6
AWG
Run M3318 Gradient Cable Y, 5 4/C 1 UL Type TC- 600 90° Minimum bend radius is
1/C 6
AWG
Run M3318 Gradient Cable Y, 5 4/C 1 UL Type TC- 600 90° Minimum bend radius is
Scan Room, Short, 10,000 mm AWG + ER, FT4 613.0 inches (330 mm)
1/C 6
AWG
Run M3319 Gradient Cable Z, 5 4/C 2/0 UL Type TC- 600 90° Minimum bend radius is
1/C 6
AWG
1/C 6
AWG
Run M3367 MAG-DPP1-J7 to 44 24 UL AWM 30 80° Minimum bend radius is
MAG-RxDist-J4, 1,250 mm 2919, 22P- 7.9 inches (201 mm)
(Artist and XT) MAEB

sius)
MAG-RxDist-J3, 850 mm 2919, 22P- 7.9 inches (201 mm)

MAG-RxDist-J2, 400 mm 2919, 22P- 7.9 inches (201 mm)
Run M3375 PEN-J112 to PED- 24 22/12 CSA FT4 300 105° Minimum bend radius is
HUB-SLOT12-J1, RFHub Power, 8.3 inches (211 mm)
13,500 mm
(MR450w and MR450w GEM with
eSRPS and Artist T only)
Run M3375 PEN-J112 to PED- 24 22/12 CSA FT4 300 105° Minimum bend radius is
HUB-SLOT12-J1, RFHub Power, 8.3 inches (211 mm)
17,500 mm
Run M3375 PEN-J112 to MAG- 24 22 FT4 300 105° Minimum bend radius is
RxDist-J1, RxDist Power 24W7, 8.3 inches (211 mm)
13,500 mm
(Artist and XT)
Run M3376 PED-HUB-SLOT12-J3 24 22/12 CSA FT4 300 105° Minimum bend radius is
to MAG-TDM-J10 8.3 inches (211 mm)
Run M3377 PED-HUB-SLOT12-J2 24 22/12 CSA FT4 300 105° Minimum bend radius is
to MAG-TDM-J9 8.3 inches (211 mm)
J50, Enclosure LED Power, Long, 6.0 inches (152 mm)
14,000 mm
J50, Enclosure LED Power, Short, 6.0 inches (152 mm)
10,000 mm
Run M3380 MAG-RxDist-J58 to 4 22 UL 1007 300 85° Minimum bend radius is
DTRSW-J20, MAG-Bore-J9, MAG- CSA TR64 3.5 inches (152 mm)
Preamp-J9, HART ID cable
(Artist and XT)
1/C 6
AWG

sius)
1/C 6
AWG
Run M3470 MAG-DPP4-J7 to 44 24 UL 2919, 30 80° Minimum bend radius is
MAG-RxDist-J22, 1,200 mm 22P-MAEB 7.9 inches (201 mm)
(Artist and XT)
Run M4005 RF COM GND STUD 1 1/0 UL AWM 600 105° single conductor ground
to MAG-GND STUD, 13,500 mm 1284, TEW cable. Minimum bend ra-
mm)
Run M4005 RF COM GND STUD 1 1/0 UL AWM 600 105° single conductor ground
to MAG-GND STUD, 17,500 mm 1284, TEW cable. Minimum bend ra-
mm)
Run P2003 PGR-J15 to Mag-J20, 6 N/A OFNR N/A 85° optical fibers, 3 duplex
(MR450w and MR450w GEM) each end. Minimum bend
mm)
Run P2003 ICE-J31/J32 to Receiv- 6 N/A OFNR N/A 85° optical fibers, 3 duplex
er 1-J4, Receiver 2-J4, 20,000 mm connectors bundled on
(Artist T) each end. Minimum bend
mm)
Run P2003 ICE-J31/J32 to Receiv- 6 N/A OFNR N/A 85° optical fibers, 3 duplex
er 1-J4, Receiver 2-J4, 27,000 mm connectors bundled on
(Artist T) each end. Minimum bend
mm)
Run P2003 ICE-J1/J2/J5 to DPP1- 6 N/A OFNR N/A 85° optical fibers, 3 duplex
J6/J9 and DPP2-J6, 20,000 mm connectors bundled on
(Artist and XT) each end. Minimum bend
mm)
Run P2004 PGR-J14 to Mag- 6 N/A OFNR N/A 85° optical fibers, 3 duplex
J21,20,000 mm connectors bundled on
mm)
Run P2004 PGR-J14 to Mag-J21, 6 N/A OFNR N/A 85° optical fibers, 3 duplex
mm)

sius)
Run P2004 ICE-J6/J14/J13 to 6 N/A OFNR N/A 85° optical fibers, 3 duplex
DPP2-J9 and DPP3-J6/J9, 20,000 connectors bundled on
mm each end. Minimum bend
(Artist and XT) radius is 3.78 inches (96
mm)
DPP2-J9 and DPP3-J6/J9, 27,000 connectors bundled on
mm each end. Minimum bend
mm)
DPP4-J6/J9 and Rx Distribution connectors bundled on
J16, 20,000 mm each end. Minimum bend
mm)
DPP4-J6/J9 and Rx Distribution connectors bundled on
J16, 27,000 mm each end. Minimum bend
mm)
Run P2026 OW to Mag-J11,Scan 4 N/A OFNR N/A 85° optical fibers, 2 duplex
Room Display, 40,000 mm connectors bundled on
mm)
Run P2026 OW to Mag-J11,Scan 4 N/A OFNR N/A 85° optical fibers, 2 duplex
Room Display, 44,000 mm connectors bundled on
mm)
Run M3316 MEMS Inhibit Cable, 15 22 FT1 300 85° Minimum bend radius is
Rx Distribution-J18 to PEN-J56, 3.9 inches (100 mm)
10,000 mm
(Artist and XT)
Run M3316 MEMS Inhibit Cable, 15 22 FT1 300 85° Minimum bend radius is
Rx Distribution-J18 to PEN-J56, 3.9 inches (100 mm)
17,000 mm
(Artist and XT)
Run M3392 MEMS Pport Power 1 38 - - 200° Coaxial RF cable. Mini-
Cable, PEN-J57 to MAG I/O, mum bend radius 1.5 in-
10,000 mm ches (38 mm)
(Artist and XT)
Run M3392 MEMS Pport Power 1 38 - - 200° Coaxial RF cable. Mini-
Cable, PEN-J57 to MAG I/O, mum bend radius 1.5 in-
17,000 mm ches (38 mm)
(Artist and XT)
Installation Manual 11.2 Stripping and crimping gradient cables

sius)
Run M3391 ICE Diagnostic Cable, 25 22 FT1 300 85° Minimum bend radius
PEN-J55 to Rx Distribution-J14, 5.0 inches (127 mm)
10,000 mm
(Artist and XT)
Run M3391 ICE Diagnostic Cable, 25 22 FT1 300 85° Minimum bend radius
PEN-J55 to Rx Distribution-J14, 5.0 inches (127 mm)
17,000 mm
(Artist and XT)
Run M3375 PEN-J112 to Rx Dis- 24 22 FT4 300 105° Composite RF and signal.
tribution-J1, Rx Distribution Pow- Minimum bend radius
er 24W7, 13,500 mm 8.3 inches (211 mm)
(Artist and XT)
Run M3375 PEN-J112 to Rx Dis- 24 22 FT4 300 105° Composite RF and signal.
tribution-J1, Rx Distribution Pow- Minimum bend radius
er 24W7, 17,500 mm 8.3 inches (211 mm)
(Artist and XT)
Cable Table Interface 12/8 22 FT4 300 80° Y-cable. Minimum bend
(Artist and XT) radius 3.5/2.6 inches
(89/66 mm)
11.2 Stripping and crimping gradient cables

11.2.1 Stripping gradient cables
WARNING

The crimping tools are ferrous and should not be taken into the scan room. All cutting and
crimping should be done outside of the scan room when the magnet is ramped.
WARNING
Maintain some slack for the gradient cables on the cable tray before cutting to length.
1. Install the large hook onto the Greenlee 1903 wire stripper supplied in the GEHC Gradient Cable
Tool Kit.
a. While pushing up on the small hook, push the stem of the large hook into the hook release until
a you hear a click.
b. Remove the small hook.
c. Put the large hook into the stripper until you hear a click.
Figure 11-1 Installing a large hook
1 Push up on small hook

2 Hook release, stem of large hook
NOTE
Give some slack to the cables before cutting to length. Slack is necessary for re-
termination, if required.
2. Put the stripper at the end with the blade next to the outer jacket. Rotate the collar to adjust the
blade depth to match the thickness of the outer insulation, making sure the blade will not cut into
the braid layer.
Figure 11-2 Adjusting blade depth
1 Blade
2 Outer insulation
3. Turn the blade to the -- mark. Lift the spring-loaded hook and put the stripper on the desired
position.
4. Turn the stripper clockwise around the outer jacket.
Important
If the blade adjustment is done with the stripper blade in contact with the jacket, the
blade may be damaged.
Figure 11-3 Turning the stripper
1 Rotate the tool around the jacket

2 Rotate the blade 90⁰
3 Cut the jacket lengthwise
5. Pull back on the handle until the blade is clear of the jacket or remove the stripper from the cable.
6. With the blade clear of the jacket, rotate the blade 90⁰ (turn the handle from -- mark to | mark). Let
the blade re-enter the material and cut the jacket lengthwise to the end of the cable.
7. Remove the outer jacket.
8. Remove the foil shield to expose the braid shield.
Figure 11-4 Foil shield and braid shield
1 Foil shield
2 Braid shield
9. Carefully cut the braid shield using a diagonal head semi-flush or shear wire cutter. Do not use a
knife as this may cut into the wires.
Figure 11-5 Cutting the braid shield
10. Remove the white gradient cable packing to the end of the braided shield.
Figure 11-6 Cable packing
11. Wrap electrical tape around the end of the braid to keep the braid from unraveling.
Figure 11-7 Wrapping braid in tape
12. Measure the excess cut cable. Tell the GE field engineer of the length of the excess cut cable. The
data will be used for future gradient cable design.
14. Put the correct lug next to each cable and mark the bellmouth depth to identify how much
insulation to remove on each cable.
NOTE
Lug color/type will be different depending on the cable thickness and application.
Figure 11-8 Identifying length
15. On the Greenlee 1903 wire stripper, replace the large hook, used on the outer jacket, with the small
hook.
Figure 11-9 Setting blade depth
16. Put the stripper over the end of the cable.
17. Identify the correct blade depth to avoid gradient cable strand damage. Turn the silver blade head in
a clockwise or counterclockwise direction to decrease or increase the top blade cutting depth.
Important
Do not cut into the cable. Cut or damaged cable must be replaced.
18. Turn the blade to the -- mark. Lift the spring-loaded hook and put the stripper on the desired
location. Turn the tool clockwise once around the cable until the insulation is sufficiently
penetrated.
Figure 11-10 Tool position
NOTE
Do not touch the wire strands with the blade.
19. Pull back on the handle until the blade is clear of the jacket or remove the stripper from the cable.
Figure 11-11 Removing the insulation
20. With the blade clear of the jacket, rotate the blade 90⁰ (turn the handle from -- mark to | mark).
Allow the blade to re-enter the material and cut the jacket lengthwise to the end of the cable.
11.2.2 Crimping gradient cables

NOTE
An optional hydraulic crimping tool (T&B TBM6PCR-LI) has been bay tested to be safe at 200
G. This tool is available for purchase directly from the manufacturer (www.tnb.com). If
choosing this option, also purchase the necessary crimping dies for the tool as specified
above.
Important
These steps are general crimping procedure. There may be more specific information in the
procedure that requires the crimping.
1. Make sure you have the correct crimping tool. The only qualified crimpers approved for use with the
Thomas and Betts Color-Keyed® lugs are the Thomas and Betts model TBM5 or TBM5-S.
Figure 11-12 TBM5-S crimp tool
1 Crimp tool
2 Tool creates diamond style crimp
2. Identify the required lugs for your procedure. Consult the procedure for the correct lugs.
Table 11-3 Available Lugs
Picture GE part num- MFG MFG part num- Color Die number/ Stud size
ber ber band gauge
5799023 Thomas & 54155-TB Pink 42/1/0 AWG .500 inch
Betts
5826292 Thomas & 256-30695-886 Pink 42/1/0 AWG .500 inch

Betts
5368384 Thomas & 54105 Blue 24/6AWG .250 inch
Betts
Table 11-3 Available Lugs (Table continued)
Picture GE part num- MFG MFG part num- Color Die number/ Stud size
ber ber band gauge
5826504 Thomas & 54165-TB Orange 50/3.0 AWG .500 inch
Betts
5826505 Thomas & 54265 Orange 50/3.0 AWG .500 inch

Betts
3. The crimpers and lugs in the kit are approved for DV field-terminated gradient cable installation:
a. Crimper tool: Thomas & Betts TBM5 or TBM5-S
b. Lugs: Use the lugs shown by the procedure.
Figure 11-13 Lug feature identification
1 Terminal mating area

2 End bellmouth
3 Barrel (conductor crimp area)
4 Entry bellmouth
5 Brush inspection window
4. Match the color on the lug to the color on the die.

NOTE
The die may need to be switched when crimping a different colored lug (blue ground and
pink or green lugs require different dies).
NOTE
A crimping nest with more than one color band may be used to crimp Color-Keyed®
connectors matching any of the nest color bands.
Figure 11-14 Die
1 Die
2 Color code
Table 11-4 Die color codes
Die catalog number Die groove color Equivalent hex die code number
13454 Blue 24
13455 Green 37
5. Examine the end of each wire that will receive a lug. Wire strands must be equal in length to allow
full insertion into the barrel of the lug to the end of the bellmouth.
NOTE
The clear plastic insulation can be removed from the stripped cable.
6. Dry fit the correct lug on each cable and:
a. Align the lug with the connection on the component.
b. Mark the orientation of the lug with a marker. (This step eliminates the need to twist the
gradient cable when attaching the lug.)
7. While dry fitting the lug, make sure that the:
a. Cable is fully inserted in the lug.
b. Insulation is not charred or melted.
c. Gap from the insulation to barrel is less than the width of a two-wire bundle.
d. Insulation does not extend into the barrel of the lug.
e. If these conditions are not confirmed, trim the cable or insulation as needed.
Figure 11-15 Confirming gap and insulation clearance
1 Barrel
2 Insulation to barrel gap (must be less than #3)
3 Two-wire bundle diameter
8. Put each lug in the die grooves of the crimping tool so the die is between the outer color-coded
marks. Align each lug with the marks and crimp each lug onto the wires.
NOTE
Use only the TBM5 or the TBM5-S supplied in GEHC Gradient Cable Tool Kit and the
furnished T&B lugs.
Figure 11-16 Lug placement on crimp tool
1 Wire
2 Die
3 Lug
4 Crimp tool
9. As each crimp is made, make sure that:

a. There are no loose wire strands. All conductor strands must be contained within the conductor
crimp area. Zero loose strands are allowed.
Figure 11-17 Good loose strand example
Figure 11-18 Bad loose strand example
b. The crimp is centered within the crimp area and the bellmouth is evident at each end of the
conductor crimp area. No visible fractures or cracks should be present in the lug barrel or
terminal contact mating area.
Figure 11-19 Good strand depth example
Figure 11-20 Bad strand depth example
c. Strand damage is within allowable parameters. The allowable strand damage as defined by IPC/
WHMA-A-620C section 3.2 for Class 2 is 6%. The number of damaged (scraped, nicked, or
severed) strands in a single cable should not exceed this limit. The maximum number of
allowable cut strands is limited to 6% (for a 1AWG gauge wire, the maximum number of
damaged strands is 50).
NOTE
Strands that are cut off and do not continue into the lug barrel should be considered
a loose strand and noted as a defect.
Figure 11-21 Example of 1 AWG with greater than 6% cut strands
d. The gap is less than the diameter of a two-wire bundle from the barrel. For an example, see
Figure 11-15 Confirming gap and insulation clearance on page 351.
e. Proper crimp compressions were used on the 1 AWG and 6 AWG gradient cables. Reference the
next step for details.
10. Do a check of the lug crimp pattern.
a. For the 1 AWG gradient cable (X and Y), pink bands with the printed word PINK and the number
42 appear on the lug. The single crimp compression is diamond shaped and embossed with the
number 42.
Figure 11-22 1 AWG crimp pattern
b. For the 2/0 AWG gradient cable (Z axis), orange bands with the printed word ORANGE and the
number 50 appear on the lug. The single crimp compression is diamond shaped and embossed
with the number 50.
c. For the 6 AWG gradient cable (ground lead), blue bands with the printed word BLUE and the
number 24 appear on the lug. The single crimp compression is diamond shaped and embossed
with the number 24.
Figure 11-23 6 AWG Crimp Pattern
11.2.3 Preparing the cables for the GFA2

The following steps provide instructions for exposing the cable braid, cutting to length, and terminating
cables for connection to the gradient filter in the equipment room.
1. From the gradient filter end of the positive cable, measure 210 mm up the gradient cable. Cut or
adjust the cable lengths as needed to allow these dimensions.
NOTE
For instructions on the proper way to strip the gradient cable, see 11.2.1 Stripping
gradient cables on page 341.
Figure 11-24 Stripping gradient cables
1 Wires
2 Braid
2. On the ground (blue) cable, measure 102mm from the end of the braid and cut.
3. On the negative (black) cables, measure 77 mm from the braid (or 152 mm from the edge of the
outer insulation) and cut each cable.
5. Strip the red and black wires 20 mm from the cut end.
NOTE
You can also position the barrel of the lug next to the wires and mark the strip distance
using the lug as shown in 11.2.1 Stripping gradient cables on page 341.
6. On the end of each cable jacket, apply the provided yellow and green tape as shown .
Figure 11-25 Label and tape application
1 Yellow tape
2 Green tape
3 Cable label
7. Apply the applicable cable label for each run: Run E3317 = FILT X, run E3318 = FILT Y, and run E3419
= FILT Z .
clamps.
NOTE
Figure 11-26 GEN2 gradient filter, equipment room side
1 Run E3317 = FILT X, left side

2 Run E3318 = FILT Y, middle
3 Run E3419 = FILT Z, right side
9. Label the black and red wires in each gradient cable :

• Red wires are positive (+)
• Black wires are negative (-)
NOTE
the gradient cable.
NOTE
12. Install the equipment room side gradient filter cover.
www.gehealthcare.com

Optima MR450w, MR450w GEM, and SIGNA Artist: Installation Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Optima MR450w, MR450w GEM, and SIGNA Artist: Installation Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Optima MR450w, MR450w GEM, and SIGNA

ПРЕДУПРЕЖД Това упътване за работа е налично само на английски език.

WAAR- Deze onderhoudshandleiding is enkel in het Engels verkrijgbaar.

ΠΡΟΕΙΔΟΠΟΙ Τοπαρόν εγχειρίδιο σέρβις διατίθεται στα αγγλικά μόνο.

ĮSPĖJIMAS Šis eksploatavimo vadovas yra tik anglų kalba.

UPOZORENJE Ovo servisno uputstvo je dostupno samo na engleskom jeziku.

Revision Date Description

Revision Date Description

Revision Date Description

Revision Date Description

IDENTIFIER LOC ACCEPTANCE METH- SAMPLING RATE NOTES

2 SMART Installation for IPM Magnet...................................................................................................... 28

3 Getting Started ....................................................................................................................................... 38

5 PGR Cabinet PDU Setup ......................................................................................................................... 74

5.1 PGR/PDU setup .................................................................................................................................................................................. 74

6 Cable and System Installation .............................................................................................................. 77

6.32 Route and connect penetration panel cables................................................................................................................. 249

7 Final Enclosure Installation for MR450w........................................................................................... 254

9 Operator Workspace Installation....................................................................................................... 305

10 Checklist .............................................................................................................................................. 324

1.1 SMART installation

Site readiness process

Site readiness to enable SMART requires:

SMART install timeline

The key to SMART installation is:

Day 10 and 11 - Finished calibrations to transfer system for clinical application

1.2 SMART installation overview

Day 6–7 Pre-Ramp Install

Magnet Ramping System Power Up

Day 10 Drift Test/Passive Shimming

Day 11–13 Calibrations

Figure 1-1 Smart Installation Overview for IPM Magnet

1.3 Service documentation

1.4 Site readiness

MDP installed RF filters backup water

Chilled water installed RF blank panels

HEC water complete Trays / facility work

Scan room requirements

RF panels ready to re- PEN panel closet finish-

1.5 Pre-magnet delivery mechanical installation

Install VibroAcoustic damping

1.6 Magnet installation

Magnet unloading and movement

Moving magnet to MR suite

Note: Scheduled for same day Post delivery tasks

1.7 Equipment delivery

Important: Color-coded labels key:

Scan room Equipment room

1.8 Mechanical installation (day 1-5)

Installation Manual: Gradient cable routing/termina-

Ground cable installation

RF transmit cables routing

Scan room cables - route and confirm lengths

Equipment room cables - route and confirm lengths

Dock, bridge, rear pedestal

Install blower box on PEN panel Connect equipment room cables

Connect scan room cables IRD/LED install

Complete PDU settings

Wiring check and FE hand-off

1.9 Mechanical install hand-off to GE (day 5)

Mechanical install hand-off to GE

Resolve open install issues

Final top-off of HEC coolant